1
Download FOUNDATION
Transcript
TM FOUNDATION JUL / 04 TM FOUNDATION F B L OC - F F ME smar web: www.smar.com Specifications and information are subject to change without notice. For the latest updates, please visit the SMAR website above. BRAZIL Smar Equipamentos Ind. Ltda. Rua Dr. Antonio Furlan Jr., 1028 Sertãozinho SP 14170-480 Tel.: +55 16 3946-3510 Fax: +55 16 3946-3554 e-mail: [email protected] ARGENTINA Smar Argentina Soldado de La Independencia, 1259 (1429) Capital Federal – Argentina Telefax: 00 (5411) 4776 -1300 / 3131 e-mail: [email protected] CHINA Smar China Corp. 3 Baishiqiao Road, Suite 30233 Beijing 100873, P.R.C. Tel.: +86 10 6849-8643 Fax: +86-10-6894-0898 e-mail: [email protected] GERMANY Smar GmbH Rheingaustrasse 9 55545 Bad Kreuznach Germany Tel: + 49 671-794680 Fax: + 49 671-7946829 e-mail: [email protected] MEXICO Smar México Cerro de las Campanas #3 desp 119 Col. San Andrés Atenco Tlalnepantla Edo. Del Méx - C.P. 54040 Tel.: +53 78 46 00 al 02 Fax: +53 78 46 03 e-mail: [email protected] SINGAPORE Smar Singapore Pte. Ltd. 315 Outram Road #06-07, Tan Boon Liat Building Singapore 169074 Tel.: +65 6324-0182 Fax: +65 6324-0183 e-mail: [email protected] USA Smar International Corporation 6001 Stonington Street, Suite 100 Houston, TX 77040 Tel.: +1 713 849-2021 Fax: +1 713 849-2022 e-mail: [email protected] Smar Laboratories Corporation 10960 Millridge North, Suite 107 Houston, TX 77070 Tel.: +1 281 807-1501 Fax: +1 281 807-1506 e-mail: [email protected] Smar Research Corporation 4250 Veterans Memorial Hwy. Suite 156 Holbrook , NY 11741 Tel: +1-631-737-3111 Fax: +1-631-737-3892 e-mail: [email protected] FRANCE Smar France S. A. R. L. 42, rue du Pavé des Gardes F-92370 Chaville Tel.: +33 1 41 15-0220 Fax: +33 1 41 15-0219 e-mail: [email protected] Introduction Introduction Fieldbus is not a replacement for 4-20 mA or Intelligent/Smart Transmitter Protocols, it provides much more. Fieldbus is a complete Control System Architecture enabling distribution of the control function to equipment in the field; therefore it is a replacement for the DCS Architecture of the 1970s. To achieve the desired control the devices must be configured. That includes calibration but also building of a control strategy. The latter is covered in this manual. One of the major advantages of Fieldbus is interoperability. Some blocks described in this manual are used not only by Smar devices, but other Foundation Fieldbus devices too. No particular configuration tool is addressed in this manual, because the devices are independent of configuration tool due to the DD technology. Get the best results of the Fieldbus System by carefully reading these instructions. This manual presents the necessary background knowledge to understand the programming language of Function Blocks diagram focusing on Foundation Fieldbus technology. Besides that, it is explained in details blocks supported by the following devices: - LD292/LD302 TT302 IF302 TP302 FY302 FP302 FI302 FB700 DC302 DFI302 HI302 (all types) DT302 FR302 Other Smar devices, that are members of System 302, may not be covered by this manual, because they have specific manuals. III Function Blocks Instruction Manual IV Table of Contents Table of Contents INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................III CHAPTER 1 - INTRODUCTION TO FUNCTION BLOCK APPLICATION ..................................1.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................................ 1.1 Function Block .............................................................................................................................................. 1.1 Transducer Block .......................................................................................................................................... 1.1 Resource Block ............................................................................................................................................. 1.1 Function Block Definitions ............................................................................................................................ 1.1 Function Block Linkages ...............................................................................................................................1.1 Link with Function Block executing in DFI302............................................................................................... 1.2 Information Access ....................................................................................................................................... 1.2 Function Block Application Structure............................................................................................................ 1.2 Block Object .................................................................................................................................................. 1.2 Block Parameters .......................................................................................................................................... 1.2 Parameter Identifiers.................................................................................................................................................................. 1.2 Parameter Storage..................................................................................................................................................................... 1.3 Parameter Usage ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1.3 Parameter Relationships............................................................................................................................................................ 1.4 Parameter Status ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1.4 Composition of Status................................................................................................................................... 1.5 Process Variable Calculation......................................................................................................................... 1.7 Setpoint Calculation ...................................................................................................................................... 1.7 Output Calculation......................................................................................................................................... 1.8 Cascade Control ............................................................................................................................................ 1.8 Mode Parameter .......................................................................................................................................... 1.10 Scaling Parameters ..................................................................................................................................... 1.17 Modbus Scale Conversion........................................................................................................................... 1.18 Fault State Handling .................................................................................................................................... 1.20 Fault State Active ........................................................................................................................................ 1.21 Alarms and Events – Alert Processing ........................................................................................................ 1.23 Simulation ................................................................................................................................................... 1.29 CHANNEL configuration .............................................................................................................................. 1.30 Block Instantiation....................................................................................................................................... 1.31 Order of Parameters during Download ........................................................................................................ 1.31 Data Type and Data Structure Definition ..................................................................................................... 1.32 Block Structure – DS-64 .......................................................................................................................................................... 1.32 Value & Status - Floating Point Structure – DS-65 .................................................................................................................. 1.33 Value & Status - Discrete Structure – DS-66 ........................................................................................................................... 1.33 Scaling Structure – DS-68 ....................................................................................................................................................... 1.33 Mode Structure – DS-69 .......................................................................................................................................................... 1.33 Access Permissions – DS-70................................................................................................................................................... 1.33 Alarm Float Structure – DS-71 ................................................................................................................................................. 1.34 Alarm Discrete Structure – DS-72............................................................................................................................................ 1.34 Event Update Structure – DS-73 ............................................................................................................................................. 1.34 Alarm Summary Structure – DS-74 ......................................................................................................................................... 1.34 Simulate - Floating Point Structure – DS-82 ............................................................................................................................ 1.34 Simulate - Discrete Structure – DS-83 ..................................................................................................................................... 1.35 Test Structure – DS-85 ............................................................................................................................................................ 1.35 Discrete Structure – DS-159 .................................................................................................................................................... 1.35 Discrete Structure – DS-160 .................................................................................................................................................... 1.36 Manufacturer Specific Data Structure.......................................................................................................... 1.36 Scaling Conversion Structure - DS-256 ................................................................................................................................... 1.36 Scaling Conversion Structure with Status - DS-257 ................................................................................................................ 1.37 Scaling Locator Structure - DS-258 ......................................................................................................................................... 1.37 Scaling Locator Structure with Status- DS-259........................................................................................................................ 1.37 Modbus Variable Locator Structure - DS-260 .......................................................................................................................... 1.38 Modbus Variable Locator Structure with Status- DS-261 ........................................................................................................ 1.38 FF Parameter ID Structure - DS-262 ....................................................................................................................................... 1.38 Slave Address Structure - DS-263 ........................................................................................................................................... 1.39 V Function Blocks Instruction Manual CHAPTER 2 - BLOCK LIBRARY..............................................................................................2.1 Description of Block Types ........................................................................................................................... 2.1 Block type availability and initial block set.................................................................................................... 2.4 Resource ....................................................................................................................................................... 2.6 RS – Resource Block................................................................................................................................................................. 2.6 Transducer Blocks ...................................................................................................................................... 2.10 DIAG – Diagnostics Transducer Block..................................................................................................................................... 2.10 DSP - Display Transducer ....................................................................................................................................................... 2.12 HC – Hardware Configuration Transducer............................................................................................................................... 2.13 IDShell Transducer Block ........................................................................................................................................................ 2.16 Input Transducer Blocks ............................................................................................................................. 2.27 LD292 / LD302 - Pressure Transducer.................................................................................................................................... 2.27 DT302 - Concentration/Density Transmitter ............................................................................................................................ 2.28 TT302 - Temperature Transducer............................................................................................................................................ 2.29 IF302 - Current Fieldbus Transducer....................................................................................................................................... 2.31 TP302 – Position Fieldbus Transducer.................................................................................................................................... 2.32 TEMP – DF-45 Temperature Transducer ................................................................................................................................ 2.33 Input Function Blocks ................................................................................................................................. 2.37 AI - Analog Input ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2.37 DI - Discrete Input .................................................................................................................................................................... 2.41 MAI - Multiple Analog Input ...................................................................................................................................................... 2.44 MDI - Multiple Discrete Input.................................................................................................................................................... 2.46 PUL – Pulse Input .................................................................................................................................................................... 2.48 Control and Calculation Function Blocks .................................................................................................... 2.52 PID/EPID - PID Control/Enhanced PID Control ....................................................................................................................... 2.52 APID – Advanced Pid .............................................................................................................................................................. 2.61 ARTH - Arithmetic .................................................................................................................................................................... 2.67 SPLT-Splitter............................................................................................................................................................................ 2.73 CHAR - Signal Characterizer ................................................................................................................................................... 2.77 INTG - Integrator ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2.81 AALM - Analog Alarm .............................................................................................................................................................. 2.88 ISEL - Input Selector ................................................................................................................................................................ 2.94 SPG/ESPG - Setpoint Ramp Generator/Enhanced Setpoint Ramp Generator ....................................................................... 2.97 TIME – Timer and Logic......................................................................................................................................................... 2.104 LLAG - Lead Lag.................................................................................................................................................................... 2.112 OSDL - Output Signal Selector and Dynamic Limiter ............................................................................................................ 2.114 DENS - Density...................................................................................................................................................................... 2.119 CT – Constant........................................................................................................................................................................ 2.123 FFET - Flip-Flop and Edge Trigger........................................................................................................................................ 2.129 AEQU – Advanced Equations ................................................................................................................................................ 2.131 Modbus Function Blocks........................................................................................................................... 2.134 MBCF – ModBus Configuration ............................................................................................................................................. 2.134 MBCS – ModBus Control Slave............................................................................................................................................. 2.136 MBSS – ModBus Supervision Slave...................................................................................................................................... 2.140 MBCM – ModBus Control Master .......................................................................................................................................... 2.144 MBSM – ModBus Supervision Master ................................................................................................................................... 2.149 Output Function Blocks............................................................................................................................. 2.152 AO - Analog Output................................................................................................................................................................ 2.152 DO - Discrete Output ............................................................................................................................................................. 2.156 MAO - Multiple Analog Output ............................................................................................................................................... 2.159 MDO - Multiple Discrete Output ............................................................................................................................................. 2.162 STEP – Step Output Pid ........................................................................................................................................................ 2.165 Output Transducer Blocks......................................................................................................................... 2.172 FR302 – Fieldbus Relay ........................................................................................................................................................ 2.172 FY302 – Fieldbus Positioner Transducer............................................................................................................................... 2.173 FP302 - Fieldbus Pressure Transducer................................................................................................................................. 2.174 FI302 – Fieldbus Current Transducer .................................................................................................................................... 2.175 Flexible Function Block ............................................................................................................................. 2.176 HART Function Blocks .............................................................................................................................. 2.192 HCFG Block ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2.192 HIRT Block............................................................................................................................................................................. 2.195 HVT Block .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2.198 HBC – HART Bypass Communication ................................................................................................................................... 2.216 VI Table of Contents Block Options............................................................................................................................................ 2.219 Resource Block Bit Strings .................................................................................................................................................... 2.219 Function Block Options............................................................................................................................. 2.221 IO_OPTS ............................................................................................................................................................................... 2.221 CONTROL_OPTS.................................................................................................................................................................. 2.222 STATUS_OPTS..................................................................................................................................................................... 2.223 ALARM_SUM and ACK_OPTION ......................................................................................................................................... 2.224 APID and EPID Function Blocks Options................................................................................................... 2.225 PID_OPTS ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2.225 Integrator Function Block Options ............................................................................................................ 2.225 INTEG_OPTS ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2.225 Timer Function Block Options................................................................................................................... 2.226 INVERT_OPTS...................................................................................................................................................................... 2.226 Arithmetic Function Block Options ........................................................................................................... 2.226 INPUT_OPTS ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2.226 Output Signal Selector and Dynamic Limiter Function Block Options ...................................................... 2.227 OSDL_OPTS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2.227 Multiple Output Function Block Options ................................................................................................... 2.227 MO_STATUS_OPTS ............................................................................................................................................................. 2.227 MO_OPTS (Profile Rev. 0 – FB700)...................................................................................................................................... 2.228 MO_OPTS (Profile Rev. 1 – DFI302)..................................................................................................................................... 2.228 Hardware Configuration Block Options ..................................................................................................... 2.229 MODULE_STATUS_R0_3..................................................................................................................................................... 2.229 MODULE_STATUS_R4_7..................................................................................................................................................... 2.229 MODULE_STATUS_R8_11................................................................................................................................................... 2.230 MODULE_STATUS_R12_14................................................................................................................................................. 2.230 CHAPTER 3 - EXAMPLES .......................................................................................................3.1 Simple Control Application............................................................................................................................ 3.1 Cascade Control ............................................................................................................................................ 3.1 Corresponding Configuration ..................................................................................................................................................... 3.2 Parameterization ........................................................................................................................................................................ 3.3 Ratio Control ................................................................................................................................................. 3.3 Corresponding Configuration ..................................................................................................................................................... 3.4 Parameterization ........................................................................................................................................................................ 3.4 Feedforward Control...................................................................................................................................... 3.5 Corresponding Configuration ..................................................................................................................................................... 3.5 Parameterization ........................................................................................................................................................................ 3.6 Split Range Control ....................................................................................................................................... 3.6 Corresponding Configuration ..................................................................................................................................................... 3.7 Parameterization ........................................................................................................................................................................ 3.7 Level Control ................................................................................................................................................. 3.8 Corresponding Configuration ..................................................................................................................................................... 3.8 Parameterization ........................................................................................................................................................................ 3.9 Rate Control Loop with Lead - Lag ................................................................................................................ 3.9 Corresponding Configuration ................................................................................................................................................... 3.10 Parameterization ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3.10 Flow Compensation Configuration with Totalization ................................................................................... 3.11 Corresponding Configuration ................................................................................................................................................... 3.11 Parameterization ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3.11 Hydrostatic Tank Gauging ........................................................................................................................... 3.12 Corresponding Configuration ................................................................................................................................................... 3.13 Parameterization ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3.13 Combustion Control with Double Cross Limits ........................................................................................... 3.15 Corresponding Configuration ................................................................................................................................................... 3.16 Parameterization ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3.16 3 Element Boiler Level/Feedwater Control................................................................................................... 3.18 Corresponding Configuration ................................................................................................................................................... 3.19 Parameterization ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3.19 VII Function Blocks Instruction Manual VIII Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION TO FUNCTION BLOCK APPLICATION Overview Function block applications are defined as plant or factory applications that perform one or more automatic monitoring and control functions. Function Block Function blocks represent the basic automation functions performed by the function block application. Each function block processes input parameters according to a specified algorithm and an internal set of control parameters. They produce output parameters that are available for use within the same function block application or by other function block applications. Transducer Block Transducer blocks insulate function blocks from the specifics of I/O devices, such as sensors, actuators, and switches. Transducer blocks control access to I/O devices through a device independent interface defined for use by function blocks. Transducer blocks also perform functions, such as calibration and linearization, on I/O data to convert it to a device independent representation. Their interface to function blocks is defined as one or more implementation independent I/O channels. Resource Block Resource blocks are used to define hardware specific characteristics of function block applications. Similar to transducer blocks, they insulate function blocks from the physical hardware by containing a set of implementation independent hardware parameters. Function Block Definitions Function blocks are defined by their inputs, outputs, control parameters, and by the algorithm that operates on these parameters. Function blocks are identified using a name (Tag) and a numeric index. Tags provide a symbolic reference to function blocks. They are unambiguous within the scope of a Fieldbus system. Numeric indices are numbers assigned to optimize access to function blocks. As opposed to function block tags, which are global, numeric indices have meaning only within the application that contains the function block. Function block parameters define the inputs, outputs, and the data used to control function block operation. They are visible and accessible over the network. Additional parameters, called “contained within” parameters are used to define the private data of a function block. Although visible over the network, they may not participate in function block linkages. Function Block Linkages Function block outputs may be linked to inputs of other function blocks. Each linkage indicates that an input parameter of one function block obtains its value from specific output parameters of another function block. While function block “pull” their values from upstream blocks, which block controls the “pulling” depends on the characteristics of the underlying communications. Two function blocks linked together may exist in the same function block application, or in separate applications, either in the same device or in different devices. To transfer the data for a function block link, the communication channel must be known, that provide the transfer of parameter data (and other types of data) between applications. 1.1 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Link with Function Block executing in DFI302 Any function block executing in DFI302 may be linked to any other function block being executed in other device connected to any of four H1 channels available. Information Access Function block information may be grouped for access depending on how it is to be used. The following four groups are defined for access purposes: 1) 2) 3) 4) dynamic operation data, static operation data, all dynamic data, and other static data. To support access of operator interface information during function block execution, two levels of network access are defined, one for operational traffic and one for background traffic. Operator interface traffic is transferred as background traffic to prevent it from interfering with the operation of time-critical function blocks. Function Block Application Structure Function block applications are modeled as a set of function blocks coordinated to execute a related set of operations. This set of operations collectively provides a single, higher level control function. Function block model is real-time algorithm that transforms input parameters into output parameters. Their operation is controlled through the setting of control parameters. Interoperation between function blocks is modeled by linking an input parameter of one function block to an output parameter of another. Function blocks can be bound together within and across devices. Interfaces between function blocks located in the same function block application are locally defined. Those interfaces between function blocks in different devices use the communication services. To support function block operation, the function block architecture also provides transducer and resource blocks, and display objects. Function Block Application Process represents the function block application as an integrated set of these components accessed to its network interface. Block Object A block object represents a logical processing unit composed of a set of input, processing, and control parameters and an associated algorithm. Each block is identified by its Tag which is defined to be unique throughout the control system at one plant site. Block tags are defined as strings with a maximum length of 32 characters. During system operation, a short hand reference, known as a numeric index is used for block access purposes. A block’s numeric index is unique only within the function block application where it exists. The algorithm of a block is identified by its type and the revision level of its type. This information indicates how the execution of the algorithm is affected by control parameters. Block Parameters Parameters define the inputs, outputs, and control data for a block. Their relationship to each other and to the block algorithm is shown below. Parameter Identifiers Parameter names are unique within a block. Within a system, a parameter can be unambiguously identified by qualifying its name with the tag of its block. This construction is referred to as “Tag.Parameter”. The Tag.Parameter construct is used to obtain the index of a parameter. This is the second way of identifying a parameter. 1.2 Introduction to Function Block Application Parameter Storage Parameter attributes may be classified as dynamic, static, or non-volatile. The value of parameter attributes may need to be restored after a power failure based on its classification: Dynamic - a parameter attribute whose value is calculated by the block algorithm and therefore does not need to be restored after a power failure. Static - a parameter attribute which has a specific configured value that must be restored by a device after power failure. An Interface or temporary devices may write to static parameter attributes on an infrequent basis. Static parameter attribute values are normally tracked by a configuration device. To support tracking changes in static parameter attributes, the associated block’s static revision parameter will be incremented and an update event will be generated each time a static parameter attribute value is modified. Non-volatile - a parameter attribute whose value is written on a frequent basis and the last saved value must be restored by the device after a power failure. Since the values of these parameter attributes are constantly changing, they are not normally tracked by a configuration device. The classification of a parameter attribute will determine the manner is which the attribute value is stored within a device. Parameter Usage Parameters are defined for a block for a specific purpose. Each is defined for use as an input, an output, or a control parameter. Control parameters are also referred to as “contained” parameters because they may not be linked with parameters in other blocks. Each type of usage is defined as follows: Contained A contained parameter is a parameter whose value is configured, set by an operator, higher level device, or calculated. It may not be linked to another function block input or output. The mode parameter is an example of a contained parameter common to all blocks. Output An output parameter is a parameter that may be linked to an input parameter of another function block. Output parameters contain status. The output status indicates the quality of the parameter value and the mode of the block when it was generated. The value of an output parameter may not be obtained from a source external to the block. It may be generated by the block algorithm, but does not have to be. The values of certain output parameters are dependent on the value of the mode parameter of the block. These output parameters may be referred to as mode-controlled output parameters. Blocks whose purpose is to generate a single output contain one parameter designed as the primary output parameter. Primary outputs are used by other blocks for control or calculation purposes. These blocks also contain secondary output parameters such as alarm and event parameters that play a supporting role to the primary output parameter. Input An input parameter obtains its value from a source external to the block. An input parameter may be linked to an output parameter of another function block. Its value may be used by the algorithm of the block. Input parameter values are accompanied by status. When an input parameter is linked to an output parameter, the status will be provided as the status of the output parameter. When it is not linked to an output parameter, the status will indicate that the value was not provided by an output parameter. When an expected input parameter value is not received, the function block supported services responsible for delivering the data will set the status of the input parameter to indicate the failure. If an input parameter is not linked to an output parameter, then it will be treated as a constant value by the function block application. The difference between unlinked input parameters and contained 1.3 Function Blocks Instruction Manual parameters is that input parameters have the capability to support a linkage and contained parameters do not. Blocks whose purpose is to transform or operate on a single input will contain one parameter designed as the primary input parameter. One input parameter of some types of blocks is designated as the primary input parameter. Primary inputs are used for control or calculation purposes. These blocks may also contain secondary input parameters that support processing done on the primary input parameter. Parameter Relationships The execution of a block involves the inputs, outputs, contained parameters, and the algorithm of the block. The execution time for a block’s algorithm is defined as a parameter of the block. Its value is dependent on how the block was implemented. The input parameters are used by the algorithm in conjunction with the state of the function block application containing the block to determine if the algorithm can achieve the target mode established for it. The target mode is the part of the mode parameter that indicates what mode of operation is desired for the block. It is normally set by a control device or the operator. Under certain operating condition a block may not be able to function in the requested mode. In such cases, the actual mode reflects the mode it is able to achieve. Comparison of the actual against the target indicates whether the target was achieved. The values for the mode parameter for a block are defined by the Permitted Mode parameter. Thus, the modes available for controlling a block may vary with each block. The values assigned to the Permitted Mode are selected from those defined by the block designer. They are assigned during block configuration for the specific use of the function block application. Once the actual mode is determined, the block execution progresses and the outputs are generated. Parameter Status All input and output parameters are structures composed of status and value, but some contained parameter (internal parameter, not accessible by other blocks) have also that data type, for example, RCAS_IN, ROUT_IN, SP and PV. The Status field is composed of three parts: Quality, Sub-Status and Limits. Quality – It indicates the quality of the parameter value. Good Cascade – The quality of the value is good, and it may be part of a cascade structure. Good Non-Cascade – The quality of the value is good, and the block doesn’t support a cascade path. Uncertain – The quality of the value is less than normal, but the value may still be useful. Bad – The value is not useful. Sub-Status – The sub-status is a complement of the quality status and takes information to initialize or break a cascade control, alarms and others. There are different sets of sub-status for each quality. Limits – It provides information whether the associated value is limited or not, as well the direction. The limits are classified as: Not Limited, High Limited, Low Limited, Constant. When an input parameter is linked to an output parameter through the link object, the whole structure (status and value) is copied (local link) or received from the bus (external link). If the input is not linked, then the status may be set manually by the user, as well the value. 1.4 Introduction to Function Block Application Composition of Status The Status has the following composition: MSB Quality LSB SubStatus Limits The quality, sub-status, and limit components of status are defined as follows: Quality - The quality used will be determined by the highest priority condition: 0 = Bad 1 = Uncertain 2 = Good (Non-cascade) 3 = Good (Cascade) Sub status - Sub-status values in the status attribute are defined as shown in the following table. Limit - The following limit conditions will be always available in the status attribute. 0 = Not limited 1 = Low limited 2 = High limited 3 = Constant Examples: 0xC1 (in hexadecimal) is “Good-Cascade Non Specific and Low Limited” status 0xCF (in hexadecimal) is “Good-Cascade Not invited and Constant” status 0x4E (in hexadecimal) is “Uncertain Initial Value and High Limited” status Bad 0 = Non-specific Hex value 0x00 Bad 1 = Configuration Error 0x04 Bad 2 = Not Connected 0x08 Bad 3 = Device Failure 0x0c X X X Bad 4 = Sensor Failure 0x10 X X X Bad 5 = No Communication, with last usable value 0x14 Bad 6 = No Communication, with no usable value 0x18 Bad 7 = Out of Service (highest priority) 0x1c Not in cascade X Forward path of cascade Backward path of cascade Quality Sub-status Not in cascade X Forward path of cascade X Backward path of cascade X X X X Uncertain 0 = Non-specific Hex value 0x40 Uncertain 1 = Last Usable Value 0x44 X Uncertain 2 = Substitute 0x48 X Uncertain 3 = Initial Value 0x4c X Uncertain 4 = Sensor Conversion not Accurate 0x50 X Uncertain 5 = Engineering Unit Range Violation 0x54 X Uncertain 6 = Sub-normal 0x58 X Quality Sub-status 1.5 Function Blocks Instruction Manual GoodNC 0 = Non-specific (lowest priority) Hex value 0x80 GoodNC 1 = Active Block Alarm 0x84 X GoodNC 2 = Active Advisory Alarm 0x88 X GoodNC 3 = Active Critical Alarm 0x8c X GoodNC 4 = Unacknowledged Block Alarm 0x90 X GoodNC 5 = Unacknowledged Advisory Alarm 0x94 X GoodNC 6 = Unacknowledged Critical Alarm 0x98 X Hex value Not in cascade Quality Sub-status Quality Sub-status Not in cascade X Forward path of cascade Backward path of cascade Forward path of cascade Backward path of cascade X GoodC 0 = Non-specific 0xc0 X GoodC 1 = Initialization Acknowledge(IA) 0xc4 X GoodC 2 = Initialization Request(IR) 0xc8 X GoodC 3 = Not Invited (NI) 0xcc X GoodC 4 = Not Selected(NS) 0xd0 X GoodC 6 = Local Override(LO) 0xd8 X GoodC 7 = Fault State Active(FSA) 0xdc X GoodC 8 = Initiate Fault State (IFS) 0xe0 X Example: Conversion from the Enumerations to Number The following formula is used to obtain the enumeration number of a determinate status attribute: Decimal Value Status = 64*Quality + 4* Sub-Status + Limit For example, considering the following status: “Uncertain - Initial Value - High Limited” Where: Quality = “uncertain” = 1 Sub-Status = “Initial Value” = 3 Limit = “High Limited “= 2 Applying the formula: Decimal Value Status = 64 * 1 + 4 * 3 + 2 = 78 (in decimal) or 0x4E (in Hexadecimal) Example: Conversion from Number to Enumerations There are many forms to convert the enumerate number to the status string. Below is shown two forms to do this. The number is expressed in binary as: Hex Value Status = 78 = 0x4E = 01001110 (in binary) Dividing this binary number in quality, sub-status and limit fields: Quality = 01 = 1 = “Uncertain” Sub-Status = 0011 = 3 = “Initial Value” Limit = 10 = 2 = “High Limited” The corresponding status is “Uncertain - Initial Value - High Limited”. Using the value of status in decimal format. Decimal Value Status = 78 1.6 Introduction to Function Block Application Divide the number by 64. The quotient will be the Quality and save the remainder: Quality = 78 / 64 = 1 Remainder = 14 Divided the remainder by 4. The quotient will be the Sub-Status and the remainder will be the limit: SubStatus = 14 / 4 = 3 Limit = 2 Process Variable Calculation The process variable (PV) parameter reflects the value and status of the primary input value or calculated value based on multiple inputs. The PV parameter is the IN parameter after filtering (PID and AALM), or it reflects the value from the transducer after filtering (AI and AO-readback), or the combination of two input parameters for range extension (ARTH). The PV parameter has a status, although it is a contained parameter. This status is a copy of the primary input status or the worst status when the PV is based on multiple inputs. The PV value reflects the value of the calculated input regardless the mode of the block, unless this input is not usable, then the PV holds the last usable value. Optionally, a filter may be applied in the process value signal, whose time constant is PV_FTIME. Considering a step change to the input, this is the time in seconds to the PV reaches 63,2% of the final value. If the PV_FTIME value is zero, the filter is disabled. Setpoint Calculation a) SP limits: SP_HI_LIM and SP_LO_LIM At first, the SP will be limited to a range specified by the SP_HI_LIM and SP_LO_LIM parameters only in Auto mode. However in the PID block, if the bit “Obey SP limits if Cas or Rcas” in CONTROL_OPTS parameter is true, then the setpoint value will be also restricted to setpoint limits in Cas and RCas mode. b) SP rate limits: SP_RATE_UP and SP_RATE_DN These parameters avoid bump in SP change, and they depend on the block type as well the mode to be effective. The SP rate limits are applied for the PID block in Auto mode, and AO block in Auto, Cas or Rcas modes. When the block is in Auto mode and the user change the SP to a value greater than the current value, then the SP value ramps upward based on the SP_RATE_UP parameter. If the new setpoint is less than the current value, the SP value ramps downward based on the SP_RATE_DN. When the SP_RATE_DN and/or SP_RATE_UP is zero the rate limiting is disabled. TARGET SP t VALUE SP DELTA_2 DELTA_1 t DELTA_1 / SP_RATE_UP DELTA_2 / SP_RATE_DN 1.7 Function Blocks Instruction Manual The below table summarizes the conditions for SP limits and SP rate limits. Block type Required configuration for SP limits Mode Required configuration for SP rate limits (SP_RATE_UP/SP_RATE_DN) (SP_HI_LIM/SP_LO_LIM) Auto None Cas/Rcas CONTROL_OPTS.“Obey limits if Cas or Rcas” is true Auto None SP_RATE_UP / SP_RATE_DN different of zero Cas/Rcas Not apply SP_RATE_UP / SP_RATE_DN different of zero. PID AO SP_RATE_UP / SP_RATE_DN different of zero SP Not apply c) SP tracking PV Some control strategies require that the transition from a “manual” mode (Rout, Man, LO and Iman) to an “auto” mode (Auto, Cas, Rcas) must be done with error equals to zero, therefore SP must be equal to PV. The CONTROL_OPTS of the PID block and the IO_OPTS of the AO block may be configured for SP tracking PV when the block is in a “manual” mode. This option is summarized in the following table: CONTROL_OPTS IO_OPTS (PID) (AO) SP-PV Track in Man X X SP-PV Track in Rout X SP-PV Track in LO or Iman X Bitstring Meaning The SP tracks the PV when the target mode is Man. The SP tracks the PV when the actual mode is Rout. X The SP tracks the PV when the actual mode is LO or Iman. Output Calculation When the actual mode is AUTO, CAS or RCAS, the normal algorithm is executed. This calculation is specific for each function block type. If the mode is a “manual” mode, the output is just following a value provided by another block (LO, Iman), the user (Man) or a Control Application running on an interface device (Rout). The output value is limited high and low by the OUT_HI_LIM and OUT_LO_LIM parameters in PID and ARTH blocks for all modes. It is possible to disable the output limits in Manual mode in the PID block by setting “No OUT limits in Manual” bit in CONTROL_OPTS. Cascade Control There is a linked output and input pair involved in each of the different forms of cascade, as shown in the following table. Mode Forward Backward Cas CAS_IN BKCAL_OUT RCas RCAS_IN RCAS_OUT ROUT_IN ROUT_OUT ROut Table 1 – Parameter Pairs In a cascade, the upper control block provides an output value and status, which becomes the cascade input to the lower block. The lower block in the cascade provides an output value, which is communicated to the upper block as back-calculation input. 1.8 Introduction to Function Block Application Based on the following example, which is the most common form of cascade, it will be shown the process of cascade initialization. Backward Path Backcalculation Input Backcalculation Output Cascade Input Primary Output Primary Input PID AO Forward Path There are four steps to complete a cascade initialization: 1. Not cascade mode – As the AO block is in Auto mode, the PID block is not calculating the output (OUT), it is just following the backward value (AO.BKCAL_OUT -> PID.BKCAL_IN). PID MODE_BLK.Target = Auto MODE_BLK.Actual = IMan OUT.Status = GoodC-Non-specific AO MODE_BLK.Target = Auto MODE_BLK.Actual = Auto BKCAL_OUT.Status = GoodC-Not Invited 2. Initialize – The user changes the target mode of AO block to Cas, then the AO block sets GoodC-IR in BKCAL_OUT. The value of BKCAL_OUT is the initial value for the PID starts to calculate. The AO block waits for the PID to set GoodC-IA in OUT, which is linked to AO.CAS_IN (PID.OUT -> AO.CAS_IN). PID MODE_BLK.Target = Auto MODE_BLK.Actual = IMan OUT.Status = GoodC-Non-specific AO MODE_BLK.Target = Cas MODE_BLK.Actual = Auto BKCAL_OUT.Status = GoodC-Initialization Request (IR) 3. Initialization complete – The AO block goes to Cas, because the PID block sent GoodC-IA. PID MODE_BLK.Target = Auto MODE_BLK.Actual = IMan OUT.Status = GoodC- Initialization Acknowledge (IA) AO MODE_BLK.Target = Cas MODE_BLK.Actual = Cas BKCAL_OUT.Status = GoodC- Non-specific 1.9 Function Blocks Instruction Manual 4. Cascade complete – The PID block changes the status of OUT from GoodC-IA to GoodC-NS. PID MODE_BLK.Target = Auto MODE_BLK.Actual = Auto OUT.Status = GoodC- Non-specific AO MODE_BLK.Target = Cas MODE_BLK.Actual = Cas BKCAL_OUT.Status = GoodC- Non-specific Notes: • The remote cascade modes (Rcas and Rout) have a similar mechanism to the process of cascade initialization. • The function blocks prepared to work as the upper block in the cascade have the BKCAL_IN parameter, as PID, SPLT, SPG and OSDL • The function blocks prepared to work as the lower block in the cascade have the BKCAL_OUT parameter, as PID, AO, SPLT and OSDL. • The upper blocks will be in Iman mode when the lower block is not in cascade, whose main reasons are: • Link failure in backward path (lower.BKCAL_OUT -> upper.BKCAL_IN) • Lower block can not execute in Cas: the target mode of lower block is not Cas, or there is any condition forcing the lower block to a higher priority mode as fault state (AO in LO), link failure in the forward path (OUT -> CAS_IN). • Tracking (PID in LO), link failure in the primary input (PID in Man), and others. (See details in the section Mode Parameter). • Control Application running on as interface device works similarly an upper block in the remote cascade modes (Rcas and Rout). Mode Parameter a) Mode types The operation of the block is summarized for each mode type as follows: Out of Service (O/S): The block is not being evaluated. The output is maintained at last value or, in the case of output class function blocks, the output may be maintained at an assigned Fault State value – last value or configured Fault State value. Setpoint is maintained at last value. Initialization Manual (IMan): This mode means that the downstream block is not in cascade (Cas mode), therefore the normal algorithm must not be executed and the block output will just follow an external tracking signal (BKCAL_IN) coming from the downstream block. This mode cannot be requested through the target mode. Local Override (LO): It applies to control block that supports a track input parameter, when the control block is LO, its output is tracking the TRK_VAL input parameter. The LO mode also applies to output block when it is in fault state. This mode cannot be requested through the target mode. Manual (Man): The block output is not being calculated, although it may be limited. The operator may set directly the outputs of the block. Automatic (Auto): The normal algorithm calculates the block output. If the block has a setpoint, it will be used a local value that may be written by an operator through an interface device. Cascade (Cas): The setpoint comes from another block over a link (CAS_IN), therefore the operator cannot change the setpoint. The normal algorithm calculates the block output based on that setpoint. In order to achieve this mode, the algorithm uses the CAS_IN input and BKCAL_OUT output to establish the cascade with the upstream block in a bumpless way. 1.10 Introduction to Function Block Application Remote Cascade (RCas): The block setpoint is being set by a Control Application running on an interface device to the RCAS_IN parameter. The normal algorithm calculates the block output based on that setpoint, so the block running in Rcas works similarly a “lower block” in cascade. In order to achieve this mode, the block algorithm uses the RCAS_IN and RCAS_OUT to establish a relation like a cascade with the interface device in a bumpless way. Therefore the Control Application works similarly as an “upper block”, but its algorithm is not synchronized to the schedule and neither does it use a link to transfer the setpoint to the block. Remote Output (ROut): The block output is being set by a Control Application running on an interface Device to the ROUT_IN parameter. In order to achieve this mode, the block algorithm uses the ROUT_IN and ROUT_OUT to establish a relation like a cascade with the interface device in a bumpless way. Therefore the Control Application works similarly as an “upper block”, but its algorithm is not synchronized to the schedule and neither does it use a link to transfer the output to the block. The block running in ROut works similarly a “lower block” in cascade. Auto, Cas, and RCas are the “automatic” modes, which calculate the primary output using the normal algorithm. The “manual” modes are IMan, LO, Man, and ROut. Mode type Source of SP Source of OUT O/S User User Iman User Other function block – following BKCAL_IN parameter PID / EPID / APID : User LO AO / DO : Fault state (last value or FSTATE_VAL) PID / EPID / APID : Other function block – following TRK_VAL parameter AO / DO :Fault state (last value or FSTATE_VAL) Man User User Auto User Block algorithm Cas Other function block – following CAS_IN parameter Block algorithm Rcas Control Application running on an interface device Block algorithm Rout Block keeps last value Control Application running on an interface device b) Elements of MODE_BLK The mode parameter (MODE_BLK) is defined in every function block. It is defined as having four elements: 1) Target - This is the mode requested by the operator. Only one mode from those allowed by the permitted mode parameter may be requested, that check will be done by the device. 2) Actual - This is the current mode of the block, which may differ from the target based on operating conditions and block configuration, as input parameter status and bypass configuration, for example. Its value is always calculated as part of block execution, therefore the user can not write in this attribute. 3) Permitted – It defines the modes that are allowed for an instance of the block. The permitted mode is configured based on the application requirement. For example, if a PID block does not have link for CAS_IN, the Cas mode should not be permitted for that block. It is like a list of mode types selected from the supported modes. 4) Normal - This is the mode which the block should be set to during normal operating conditions. The normal attribute is used as a reminder. It does not affect the algorithm calculation. Execution of a function or transducer block will be controlled through the mode parameter. The user sets the target mode, which indicates what mode of operation is desired for the block. Then, the algorithm evaluates if the block can be executed in the requested mode (target mode) or the nearest higher priority mode possible. The actual mode reflects the mode of block operation. 1.11 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Other concepts of mode: Retained target: When the target mode is O/S, MAN, RCAS or ROUT the target mode attribute may retain information about the previous target mode. This information may be used by the block in mode shedding and setpoint tracking. This feature is optional and the interface device is responsible to implement it. Supported mode: Each block type has a set of mode types supported, it means that the block definition specifies in which modes the block may operate. c) Priority of mode The concept of priority is used when the block calculates the actual mode, and when determining if write access is allowed for a particular mode or other of higher priority. Mode Description Priority O/S Out of Service 7 – highest IMan Initialization Manual 6 Local Override 5 Man Manual 4 Auto Automatic 3 Cas Cascade 2 Rcas Remote Cascade 1 Rout Remote Output 0 - lowest LO Priority of the Mode d) Mode shedding Interface devices such as a host computer, distributed control system (DCS) controller, or programmable logic controller (PLC) may exist which not support the function blocks application architecture but have proprietary control applications running on them. Such applications may adjust the values of the block setpoint (RCas mode) and/or primary output (ROut mode) parameters in a function block. When doing so, they provide the value of each parameter along with its status. If a new value is not received by the function block within a specified “update time” (SHED_RCAS and SHED_ROUT), or a bad status is received, then the function block mode will be changed to a non-remote mode of higher priority. The SHED_OPT parameter configures the desired behavior when shedding from a remote mode (Rcas and Rout); therefore it does not include the Cas mode. Also, it determines if the shed mode is maintained once the RCAS_IN or ROUT_IN parameter updating is recovered (no return – target mode receives the shed mode) or original mode will be restored when the cause of shedding has cleared (normal return – no change in target mode). The shed option has the following enumeration: 0 = Undefined – Invalid 1 = Normal shed, normal return – Actual mode changes to the next lowest priority non-remote mode permitted but returns to the target remote mode when the remote computer completes the initialization handshake. 2 = Normal shed, no return – Target mode changes to the next lowest priority non-remote mode permitted. The target remote mode is lost, so there is no return to it. 3 = Shed to Auto, normal return. 4 = Shed to Auto, no return – Target mode changes to Auto on detection of a shed condition. 5 = Shed to Manual, normal return. 6 = Shed to Manual, no return – Target mode changes to Man on detection of a shed condition. 7 = Shed to Retained target, normal return. 8 = Shed to Retained target, no return (change target to retained target). 1.12 Introduction to Function Block Application e) Mode calculation The actual mode will be calculated based on the following: Each mode type has some conditions that force the actual mode to be of higher priority than the target mode. Starting from the highest priority mode (O/S), it is analyzed its corresponding conditions. If they are present, then the actual mode will be this one, otherwise it is necessary to check the conditions for the next lower priority mode (Iman, LO, Man, Auto, Cas, Rcas and Rout) till the target mode, exclusive. For instance, if the target mode is Cas, it is necessary to check the conditions for O/S, IMan, LO, Man and Auto, in this order. If all those conditions are false, the actual mode will be the target mode. Mode Conditions O/S Resource block is in O/S (resource state is Standby) - Enumerated parameter has an invalid value IMan BKCAL_IN.status is Bad BKCAL_IN.status is Good – Fault State Active, Not Invited or Initialization Request. LO Fault state is active (in an output function block) CONTROL_OPTS.Track Enable active and TRK_IN_D is active. If target is Man, then the CONTROL_OPTS.Track in Manual must be active. Man Target mode has just changed from O/S (Status attribute of primary input parameter (IN parameter) is Bad or Uncertain with option to treat Uncertain as Bad) and (Bypass not set). Target mode is RCas or ROut, and SHED_OPT=shed to Manual or shed to next Auto Target mode is Cas and (CAS_IN.status=Bad or cascade initialization not completed) Target mode is RCas and RCAS_IN.status=Bad and SHED_OPT=shed to Auto or shed to next Target mode is ROut and ROUT_IN.status=Bad and SHED_OPT = shed to Auto or shed to next. Cas Actual mode last execution was Cas. Target mode is Cas and cascade initialization has just completed Target mode is RCas and RCAS_IN.status=Bad and SHED_OPT=shed to next and cascade initialization has just completed Target mode is ROut and ROUT_IN.status=Bad and SHED_OPT=shed to next and cascade initialization has just completed RCas RCas cascade initialization has just completed or actual mode last execution was RCas. ROut ROut cascade initialization has just completed or actual mode last execution was ROut. When the actual mode is different from the target, a good suggestion to find the cause is an analysis of the corresponding conditions for the actual mode. The most frequent causes are shown below. Mode Frequent cause O/S Check the Resource block mode and all enumerated parameters Iman Check the BKCAL_IN.status: Bad – No Comm : link failure in backward path (BKCAL_OUT -> BKCAL_IN) NI : lower block can not execute in Cas (check the target mode of lower block as well fault state condition) or link failure in forward path (OUT -> CAS_IN) LO Check : Value and status of TRK_IN_D, TRK_VAL and CONTROL_OPTS (Track Enable, Track in Manual) Output block : status of CAS_IN and the delay time for fault state established by FSTATE_TIME Man Status of IN If the target is Cas, check the links with the upper block in backward path (BKCAL_OUT -> BKCAL_IN) and forward path (OUT -> CAS_IN) 1.13 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Frequent cause Mode If the block is not reaching the target mode Rcas or Rout, compare the updating rate of RCAS_IN and ROUT_IN by a Control Application to SHED_RCAS and SHED_ROUT. Auto If the target is Cas, check the links with the upper block in backward path (BKCAL_OUT -> BKCAL_IN) and forward path (OUT -> CAS_IN) If the block is not reaching the target mode Rcas or Rout, compare the updating rate of RCAS_IN and ROUT_IN by a Control Application to SHED_RCAS and SHED_ROUT. Cas If the block is not reaching the target mode Rcas or Rout, compare the updating rate of RCAS_IN and ROUT_IN by a Control Application to SHED_RCAS and SHED_ROUT. f) Cascade initialization AI LD302 LD302 AI PID AO FY302 PID BUS BACKWARD PATH READ PID.OUT FORWARD PATH AO.BKCAL_OUT MACROCYCLE AO READ PARAMETERS FY302 PID: MODE_BLK, IN, BKCAL_IN, OUT AO: MODE_BLK, CAS_IN, BKCAL_OUT Fig.1 – Example to analyze the cascade initialization The following table shows the sequence of status exchange between the PID and AO blocks for cascade initialization, and a link failure between PID.OUT and AO.CAS_IN (forward path) after execution 8. PID parameters Execution 1 2 Target O/S Auto IN Bad BKCAL_IN 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 GNC GNC GNC GNC GNC GNC GNC GNC GNC GNC Bad Bad-O/S NI IR GC GC GC GC NI NI NI Actual O/S Iman IMan IMan Auto Auto Auto Auto IMan IMan IMan OUT Bad-O/S GC GC IA GC GC GC GC GC GC GC 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 AO parameters Execution 1 2 Target O/S Cas CAS_IN Bad GC GC IA GC GC GC Bad Bad Bad Bad Actual O/S Man Auto Cas Cas Cas Cas LO LO LO LO BKCAL_OUT Bad-O/S NI IR GC GC GC GC NI NI NI NI 1.14 Introduction to Function Block Application Meaning of status: GNC – Good Non-Cascade – Non Specific GC - Good Cascade – Non Specific IA - Good Cascade – Initialization Acknowledge IR - Good Cascade – Initialization Request NI - Good Cascade – Not Invited Bad – Bad – any sub-status The above sequence for cascade initialization applies not only for the Cas mode, but also for Rcas and Rout modes. g) Example The mode configuration for the control loop of the figure 1. Supported Target Actual Permitted Normal AI O/S,Man,Auto Auto - O/S,Auto Auto PID O/S,Iman,LO,Man,Auto,Cas,Rcas,Rout Auto - O/S,Man,Auto Auto AO O/S,Iman,LO,Man,Auto,Cas,Rcas Cas - O/S,Man,Auto,Cas Cas h) Specific information for driver developers Internally, the each mode attribute is assigned within the bitstring in the following manner: O/S Hex value Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0x80 1 0 0 X X X X X Iman & LO - Man 0x10 0 0 0 1 0 X X X Auto 0x08 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Cas 0x0c 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 Rcas 0x0a 0 0 0 0 1 X 1 0 Rout 0x09 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 1 Not Valid Target Modes Where: X = indicates the bit setting is retained from the previous target mode. Target and Normal Mode Bitstring Hex value Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 O/S 0x80 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Iman 0x40 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 LO 0x20 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Man 0x10 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Auto 0x08 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Cas 0x04 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Rcas 0x02 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Rout 0x01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Actual Mode Bitstring 1.15 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Block Permitted modes Hex value O/S - - Man Auto Cas Rcas Rout AI O/S,Auto 0x88 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 PID O/S,Man, Auto 0x98 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 AO O/S,Man, Auto,Cas 0x9c 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 Permitted Mode Bitstring (Example for the loop control in the previous figure ) The retained target mechanism is suitable to work with toggle switch in the interface device following the rules: A/M toggle switch: “automatic mode” Æ Man mode : Bit #4 <- 1 and Bit #3 Å 0 Man mode Æ “automatic mode” : Bit #4 <- 0 and Bit #3 Å 1 Cascade/Local toggle switch: Cascade Æ Local: Bit #2 Å0 Local Æ Cascade: Bit #2 Å1 Remote/Non-remote setpoint toggle switch: Remote Æ Non-remote: Bit #1 Å0 and Bit #0 Å0 Non-remote Æ Remote: Bit #1 Å1 and Bit #0 Å0 Remote/Non-remote output toggle switch: Remote Æ Non-remote: Bit #1 Å0 and Bit #0 Å0 Non-remote Æ Remote: Bit #1 Å0 and Bit #0 Å1 Target mode O/S : Man: 100xxxxx 00010xxx Rcas: 00001x10 Rout: 00001x01 1.16 Rule for toggle Bit #7 Å0 Bit #4 Å0 and Bit #3 Å1 Bit #1 Å0 and Bit #0 Å0 Bit #1 Å0 and Bit #0 Å0 Value retained 000xxxxx 00001xxx 00001x00 00001x00 Possible retained modes 00010000 (0x10) : Man Target + Retained modes 10010000 (0x90) : Man 00001000 (0x08) : Auto 10001000 (0x88) : Auto 00001100 (0x0c) : Cas 10001100 (0x8c) : Cas 00001010 (0x0a) : Rcas 10001010 (0x8a) : Rcas 00001001 (0x09) : Rout 10001001 (0x89) : Rout 00001000 (0x08) : Auto 00010000 (0x10) : Auto 00001100 (0x0c) : Cas 00010100 (0x14) : Cas 00001010 (0x0a) : Rcas 00010010 (0x12) : Rcas 00001001 (0x09) : Rout 00010001 (0x11) : Rout 00001000 (0x08) : Auto 00001010 (0x0a) : Auto 00001100 (0x0c) : Cas 00001110 (0x0e) : Cas 00001000 (0x08) : Auto 00001001 (0x09) : Auto 00001100 (0x0c) : Cas 00001101 (0x0d) : Cas Introduction to Function Block Application Scaling Parameters The scaling parameter defines the operating range and the engineering units associated with a parameter. It also defines the number of digits to the right of the decimal point, which should be used by an interface device in displaying that parameter. Scaling information is used for two purposes. Display devices need to know the range for bar graphs and trending, as well as the units code. Control blocks need to know the range to use internally as percent of span, so that the tuning constants may remain dimensionless. The PID blocks take the error and convert it to percent of span using the PV_SCALE. The algorithm operates on percent of span to produce an output in that form. This is converted back to a number with engineering units by using the range of OUT_SCALE. The AI block has the XD_SCALE parameter to define the engineering units expected from the transducer. The AO block uses the XD_SCALE to convert the SP value to the engineering unit expected by the output transducer block, which is also the engineering unit of the readback value. The following fields form the scale: • Engineering Units at 100% of scale - The value that represents the upper end of range in engineering unit; • Engineering Units at 0% of scale - The value that represents the lower end of range in engineering unit; • Units Index - Device Description units code index for the engineering unit. • Decimal Point - The number of digits to the right of the decimal point which should be used by an interface device in displaying the specified parameter. Example Using Scale Parameter The PID algorithm works internally with values in percent of span. Therefore the PID block converts the error to percentage (PV_SCALE), it calculates the output in percentage, and then it converts to engineering unit of output (OUT_SCALE). 1. The PID takes the input IN and SP and converts to percentage of the PV_SCALE: VALUE% = (VALUE – EU_0) * 100/ (EU_100 – EU_0) [PV_SCALE] PV_SCALE: EU at 100% = 20 EU at 0% = 4 Units Index = mA Decimal point = 2 SP = 15 mA PV = 10 mA The values of SP and PV in percentage are: SP% = (15 – 4) * 100/( 20 – 4) = 68.75% PV% = (10 – 4) * 100/(20 – 4) = 37.50% 2. The PID algorithm calculates the error in percentage. If it is configured the reverse action, the error is the difference between SP% and PV%. Error% = SP% - PV % = 31.25% 3. The PID algorithm applies the Error% to the calculation of the P, I and D terms. If only the proportional term is enabled, the value of the output is: GAIN = 1.0 RESET = +INF RATE = 0.0 OUT% = 31.25% 1.17 Function Blocks Instruction Manual 4. The output value is converted from percentage to engineering units of the OUT_SCALE: OUT = OUT% /100 * (EU_100 – EU_0) + EU_0 [OUT_SCALE] OUT_SCALE: EU at 100% = 15 EU at 0% = 3 Units Index = psi Decimal point = 2 The output value of this example is: OUT = 31.25/100 * (15 – 3) + 3 = 6.75 psi Modbus Scale Conversion The Modbus function blocks can read and write digital and analogical data of other Modbus slave or master devices. For each configured analogical point, which for Modbus reading or writing, it is associated a scale conversion parameter. The parameters and blocks which have Modbus conversion scale are: MBCM.IN_x, MBCS.IN_x, MBCS_OUT.x, MBSM.PVALUE_x, which x=1, 2, until the point limit of that block. The scale conversion for the Modbus protocol has two purposes: • Conversion from the Fieldbus analogical value to Modbus value expressed in Engineering Units. • Conversion from the Modbus analogical value to the Fieldbus value in Engineering Units. The scale parameters are defined in the data structures DS_256, DS_257, DS_258, and DS_259 (see the item “Data Structure”) and they are composed by the following fields: • FROM_EU_100% - defines the higher input unit value (actual data unit). • FROM_EU_0% - defines the lower input unit value (actual data unit). • TO_EU_100% - defines the higher output unit value (desired data unit). • TO_EU_0% - defines the lower output unit value (desired data unit). • Data Type – data type which it desires to convert from or to Modbus (in the Fieldbus the data always will be float). The table with the supported data type is below: Number of Data Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Data Type Float Unsigned8 Unsigned16 Unsigned32 Integer8 Integer16 Integer32 Swapped.Float Swapped.Unsigned8 Swapped.Unsigned16 Swapped.Unsigned32 Swapped.Integer8 Swapped.Integer16 Swapped.Integer32 Note In despite of there are different data structures which have scale conversion, they follow the same conversion procedure. Procedure to handle the conversion from FF parameter to Modbus variable • Load INx_VALUE. • Calculate Y = (A * INx_VALUE + B). • Convert Y to DATA_TYPE_IN, generating MOD_VAR_IN. • Write MOD_VAR_IN. Procedure to handle the conversion from Modbus variable to FF parameter: • 1.18 Read MOD_VAR_OUT. Introduction to Function Block Application • • • Convert MOD_VAR_OUT to float, generating Y Calculate OUTx_VALUE = (A * Y + B). Store OUTx_VALUE. Y To_EU_100% To_EU_0% from_EU_0% from_EU_100% X Where: A = (To_EU_100% - To_EU_0%)/(From_EU_100% - From_EU_0%) B = To_EU_0% - A*From_EU_0%; IN_VALUE, OUT_VALUE: FF parameters MOD_VAR_IN, MOD_VAR_OUT: Modbus variables Y: auxiliary float variable Below, there are examples using the Modbus scale conversion. 1) Conversion from Modbus to Fieldbus It considers a Modbus Slave device which has an analogical value of temperature in percentage (010000) with the data type Integer 2 bytes. It desired to use the value in Fieldbus in Celsius degree (0-500). It uses the Master Control Block Modbus (MBCM). A) In the MBCM block, the scale is configured (OUT_1.SCALE_LOC_OUT_1) of the following form: • FROM_EU_100% = 10000 • FROM_0% = 0 • TO_EU_100% = 500 • TO_EU_0% = 0 • DATATYPE = Integer16 B) The MBCM block reads the Modbus data from the slave and stores in MOD_VAR_OUT. Thus, it converts the Y value. For last, it calculates the OUT output using the equation OUT = A*Y+B. Using the values from the example above and considering the actual value of temperature is 6000, it has: MOD_VAR_OUT = 6000 (value read from Modbus) And following the equations showed above: A = (TO_EU_100% - TO_EU_0%) / (From_EU_100% - From_EU_0%) A = (500 – 0) / (10000 – 0) = 0,05 B = TO_EU_0% - A * From_EU_0% B = 0 – (0,02 * 0) = 0 OUT = A * Y + B OUT = 0,05 * Y OUT = 0,05 * 6000 = 300 The OUT output value for this example will be: o OUT = 300 [ C] 2) Conversion from Fieldbus to Modbus It considers the DFI is the Modbus slave equipment and it desires to become available one temperature analogical value from one TT302, range 0-500 [ºC] for a Modbus master in the range 420 [mA] with the data type integer 2 bytes. Using the Modbus Block Control Slave (MBCS). A) In the MBCS block, the scale is configured (IN_1.SCALE_CONV_IN_1) of the following form: • FROM_EU_100% = 500 • FROM_0% = 0 1.19 Function Blocks Instruction Manual • • • TO_EU_100% = 20 TO_EU_0% = 4 DATATYPE = Integer16 B) The MBCS block reads the data from the Fieldbus in the IN input and stores in IN_VALUE. It calculates the Y value following the equation Y = A * IN_VALUE + B. Thus, it converts the value to the DATATYPE specified and saves in MOD_VAR_IN which it will be the value to be sent to the Modbus. Using the values from the example above and considering the actual value of temperature is 300, it has: IN_VALUE = 300 (value read from TT302) And following the equations showed above: A = (TO_EU_100% - TO_EU_0%) / (From_EU_100% - From_EU_0%) A = (20 – 4) / (500 – 0) = 0,032 B = TO_EU_0% - A * From_EU_0% B = 4 – (0,032 * 0) = 4 MOD_VAR_IN = A * IN_VALUE + B MOD_VAR_IN = 0,032 * 300 + 4 MOD_VAR_IN = 13,6 The value of the Modbus variable read (after the conversion to integer) for this example will be: OUT = 14 [mA] Fault State Handling A) Definition The Fault State is a special state that allows the output block to do safe action when it has been detected an abnormal situation or the user set to Fault State in the Resource block. The abnormal situation occurs to there is an unusable input (bad sensor, for example) or the loss of the communication between function blocks longer than a specified time (FSTATE_TIME). The blocks that support cascade control (as PID, OSDL and SPLT) propagate the fault state status forward to the output block. When the condition that activated the Fault State is normalized, the Fault State is cleared and the block returns to the normal operation. B) Generate the Initiate Fault State status (The fault was detected by the own block) Blocks like PID, OSDL and SPLT may be configured to send an Initiate Fault State (IFS) status when they detect an unusable input. The bit “IFS if bad IN” and/or the bit “IFS if bad CAS_IN” in the STATUS_OPTS or OSDL_OPTS parameters must be true to generate an IFS status when the corresponding input is unusable. C) Propagate the Initiate Fault State status (The fault occurred in the upstream block) The blocks that support the cascade control have special handling to propagate the fault to the downstream blocks till the output block. When the block, that is in cascade mode (Cas, RCas), receives an Initiate Fault State (IFS) status, then this status will be reported to forward path. For example, it considers a PID block that is receiving a “Good Cascade IFS” status in CAS_IN input. If the target mode of the PID is Cas, then the IFS status will be the status of OUT, replacing the normal status. Otherwise, the IFS status will not be propagated forward. D) Using the Resource Block to activate the Fault State The Fault State of the Resource block forces all output function blocks into the device to go immediately to the fault state condition. The Resource block has some parameters that define the fault state behavior: 1.20 Introduction to Function Block Application • • • • FEATURES_SEL – The “Fault State supported” bit is used to enable the Fault State characteristic into the Resource block. The default value is disabled. FAULT_STATE – It only indicates the Fault State in the Resource block, not in individual output block. For example, if an AO block is in Fault State because its CAS_IN input is bad, the FAULT_STATE parameter will not be active. SET_FSTATE – The user may force FAULT_STATE to active by setting this parameter to On. CLEAR_FSTATE – The user may force FAULT_STATE to clear by setting this parameter to On. Fault State Active When the Output Function Blocks detects an abnormal condition, the block goes to a fault state. The abnormal conditions are: - Loss of communication to CAS_IN for a time that exceeds FSTATE_TIME; - IFS status in the CAS_IN input when the target mode is Cas, for a time that exceeds FSTATE_TIME; - IFS status in the RCAS_IN when the target mode is Rcas, for a time that exceeds FSTATE_TIME; - The FAULT_STATE parameter of the Resource block is Active because the user set to on the SET_FSTATE parameter and the bit “Fault State supported” in the FEATURES_SEL is true. When the output block is in the Fault State the output may retain the last value or goes to the preset value determined by the FSTATE_VAL. The default is retaining the last value. The output goes to the preset value if the bit “Fault State to value” in the IO_OPTS is true. When the Fault State is active then the actual mode of the output block goes to Local Override (LO). In the backward path, the block sends the Not Invited (NI) status to indicate that the block is in “Fault State”. Optionally, the target mode of the output block will be changed to Manual by the block algorithm when the Fault State is active. In order to set this characteristic, the “Target to Man if Fault State activated” bit in IO_OPTS needs to be true. Examples The following control loop must be considered for the examples below. The below tables show the sequence of status exchange between the PID_1 1.21 Function Blocks Instruction Manual A I_ 1 OUT FAILURE IN THE EXECUTION 2: SENSOR FAILURE OR COMMUNICATION FAILURE IN BKCAL_IN P ID _ 1 OUT FAILURE 1 CAS_IN BKCAL_OUT BKCAL_IN A I_ 2 OUT IN P ID _ 2 OUT FAILURE 3 FAILURE 2 CAS_IN AO BKCAL_OUT The Master, PID_2 Slave and AO blocks in a fault and normal condition. The status of PID_1.IN becomes bad in the execution 2, which may be due to a Bad-Sensor Failure detected by the AI_1 or a communication failure between AI_1.OUT and PID_1.IN. The PID_2 Slave only propagates the status forward. The AO block receives the IFS status and active the Fault State. In the safety condition the preset value of the FSTATE_VAL is used to the output of the AO block. After the execution 6, the bad status in the IN of the PID master is cleared and the loop returns to normal operation. PID 1 – Master STATUS _OPTS = “IFS if Bad IN” Execution 1 Target Auto IN 2 … 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 GNC Bad … Bad Bad Bad Bad GNC GNC GNC GNC BKCAL_IN GC GC … GC GC NI NI NI NI NI IR Actual Auto Man … Man Man Iman Iman Iman Iman Iman Iman OUT GC IFS … IFS IFS IFS IFS GC GC GC IA 1.22 Introduction to Function Block Application PID 2 – Slave Execution 1 Target Cas CAS_IN 2 … 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 GC IFS … IFS IFS IFS GC GC GC IA GC BKCAL_IN GC GC … GC NI NI NI IR GC GC GC Actual Cas Cas … Cas Iman Iman Iman Iman Auto Cas Cas GC IFS IFS IFS IFS GC IA GC GC GC 100 100 100 100 NI NI NI NI IR GC GC OUT … BKCAL_OUT GC GC … GC AO FSTATE_VAL = 100 FSTATE_TIME = 2 sec IO_OPTS = “Fault State to value” PV_SCALE (E0%-E100%)=0-100 XD_SCALE (E0%-E100%)= 4-20 2 sec |------------------------| Execution 1 Target Cas CAS_IN SP Actual OUT BKCAL_OU T GC 2 3 IFS 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 IFS IFS IFS IFS GC IA GC GC 100 100 100 100 100 IFS IFS IFS IFS GC IA GC GC 100 100 100 100 100 100 LO LO LO LO Auto Cas Cas Cas GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC 20 20 20 20 20 20 NI NI NI NI IR GC GC GC IFS GC IFS IFS Cas Cas GC GC Cas GC GC GC GC Other link failures in the forward path could force the AO into Fault State since the configuration is as it follows: Failure 1) PID_1.OUT to PID_2.CAS_IN: PID_2.STATUS_OPTS = “IFS if Bad CAS_IN” Failure 2) AI_2.OUT to PID_2.IN: PID_2.STATUS_OPTS = “IFS if Bad IN” Failure 3) PID_2.OUT to AO.CAS_IN: No configuration is required for the AO block to force it to Fault State. Note: • • FSTATE_VAL has the same engineering unit of SP. Therefore it is using the PV_SCALE, not the XD_SCALE. When the Resource block forces all output blocks to Fault State, the FSTATE_TIME is not used. Alarms and Events – Alert Processing Alarms and events, known as alerts, represent state changes within function block applications. In detection of a significant event, a function block may report this event to an interface device or other field devices. Alarms refer not only to the comparison between a variable and a limit, but also what is called block alarm, that is used to report errors found in the software and/or hardware during block execution. 1.23 Function Blocks Instruction Manual For alarms, both entering and exiting alarm condition are defined as an alert state, which will cause a report message to be published onto the network. The time at which the alert state was detected is included as a time stamp in the alert message. The reporting of alerts may be individually suppressed by setting the corresponding priority. Update event is a mechanism used to inform an interface device that a static parameter was changed so the parameter is read only in this case. It is a much optimized way to keep track of such kind of parameters without doing polling, because these parameters are changed very rarely compared with dynamic parameters. a) Alarm parameter (X_ALM parameter) The alarm parameter is provided in a block to capture the dynamic information associated with an alarm. The information contained in the alarm parameter is transferred to an alert object when the alarm is reported. The following fields form the alarm parameter: • Unacknowledged • Alarm state • Time stamp • Subcode • Value Each one of these fields is explained below. Unacknowledged When it is detected a positive transition of alarm state (entering in alarm active), it will be set to Unacknowledged. This field is set to Acknowledged when the plant operator acknowledges the alarm through the interface device, which is responsible for alarm management. It is possible to configure the auto-acknowledgement feature for each type of alarm for the block through the ACK_OPTION parameter. If a positive transition of alarm type happens and the corresponding bit in the ACK_OPTION is true, then it will not be required an operator plant acknowledgement. The other form to auto-acknowledge the alarm notice is configuring the alert-priority of the respective alarm to 0,1 or 2. The alert-priority will be discussed later. Unacknowledged will have the following enumerations: 0 = Undefined 1 = Acknowledged 2 = Unacknowledged Alarm state This field gives an indication of whether the alert is active and whether it has been reported. The Alarm State will have the following bit enumeration: 1 – Clear-Reported 2 – Clear-Not Reported 3 – Active-Reported 4 – Active-Not Reported The alarm state is cleared when the block goes to Out of service mode. Time stamp Time stamp is the time when the change in alarm state was detected that is unreported. This value will be maintained constant until alert confirmation has been received. Sub code This field contains an enumeration specifying the cause of the alert to be reported. Value The value of the associated parameter at the time the alert was detected. 1.24 Introduction to Function Block Application b) Alarm limit (X_LIM parameter) An analog alarm occurs when a value meets or exceeds a limit. For a high alarm, an alarm is true when the analog value is greater than the limit. The status of the alarm remains true until the value drops below the limit minus the alarm hysteresis. The alarm type can be disabled setting its respective alarm limit parameter to +/- infinity, which is the default of all alarm limits. The analog parameter compared to alarm limit depends on the block type: PID: PV and (PV-SP), regardless of CONTROL_OPTS.Direct acting Analog alarm: PV AI: OUT Setpoint generator: BKCAL_IN – OUT c) Alarm hysteresis (ALARM_HYS parameter) Amount the PV or OUT must return within the alarm limits before the alarm condition clears. Alarm Hysteresis is expressed as a percent of the PV/OUT span. The span used depends on the block type: PID: PV_SCALE AI, Setpoint generator, Analog alarm: OUT_SCALE d) Alert Priority (X_PRI parameter) The alert priority is a parameter, which may be used to configure the priority value assigned to an alarm or event. The Alert Priority can be: 0-1 – The associated alert is not sent as a notification. The priority is above 1, and then the alert must be reported. This priority is auto-acknowledged. 2 – Reserved for alerts that do not require the attention of a plant operator. Block alarm and update event have this priority. This priority is auto-acknowledged. 3-7 – Advisory Alarms. In this priority is necessary to send an acknowledged. 8-15 – Critical Alarms. In this priority is necessary to send an acknowledged. e) Alert key (ALERT_KEY parameter) It is an identification number of the plant unit. This information may be used in the host for sorting alarms, etc. f) Alarm Summary (ALM_SUM parameter) The parameter Alarm Summary summarizes the status of up to 16 process alarms of the same block. For each alarm, the current status, unacknowledged status, unreported status, and disabled status are maintained. It has four attributes: • Current Alarms - the Active status of each alarm. • Unacknowledged - the Unacknowledged status of each alarm. • Unreported - the Unreported status of each alarm. • Disabled - the Disabled status of each alarm. g) ACK_OPTION parameter Selection of whether alarms associated with the block will be automatically acknowledged. Bit = 0 -> auto-acknowledgment disabled Bit = 1 -> auto-acknowledgment enabled The correspondent bits for each type of alarm in the ACK_OPTION are the same of that defined for ALARM_SUM except for the resource block. 1.25 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Bit Meaning 0 Discrete alarm 1 High High alarm 2 High alarm 3 Low Low alarm 4 Low alarm 5 Deviation High alarm 6 Deviation Low alarm 7 Block alarm 8 Not used 9 Not used 10 Not used 11 Not used 12 Not used 13 Not used 14 Not used 15 Not used Association of bit number to alarm type (ALARM_SUM and ACK_OPTION) The ACK_OPTION of the resource block has a different association of bit number to alarm type from the previous table; its special meaning is described below: Bit #1 – Writes have been enabled (WRITE_ALM) Bit #8 – Block Alarm (BLOCK_ALM) h) FEATURES_SEL parameter It is a resource block parameter that has an element to enable/disable alert report for the whole resource, “report supported”. i) CONFIRM_TIME parameter A reply is required that confirms receipt of the alert notification. If the reply is not received within a time-out period (CONFIRM_TIME), the alert will be re-transmitted. It is a resource block parameter, so it is valid for all alert of that resource. Therefore the alarm parameter is a structured object, which is defined in conjunction with other parameters: - Enable / disable alarm evaluation: ALARM_SUM: enable/disable each alarm type for a specific block. X_LIM: it is possible to disable the alarm evaluation by setting the limit to +INF or –INF. - Enable / disable alarm report: FEATURES_SEL: setting the bit “report supported” enables alarm report for the whole resource X_PRI: besides configuring the FEATURES_SEL, it is necessary to set the priority of alarm greater than or equal to 2 to enable the alarm report. - Auto-acknowledgment: X_PRI: the corresponding alarm will be auto-acknowledged if the alarm priority is 0, 1 or 2 ACK_OPTION: this parameter makes possible to enable/disable auto-acknowledgment for each alarm type, regardless the configuration of X_PRI. 1.26 Introduction to Function Block Application The information contained in the alarm parameter is transferred to an alert object when the alarm is reported (if it is enabled) to an interface device. As an example, the following parameters are used to configure the Low Low Alarm of the PID block: LO_LO_PRI (alarm priority), LO_LO_LIM (limit parameter) and LO_LO_ALM (alarm parameter), ALARM_SUM, ACK_OPTION. Summarizing, the function block detects the alarm condition. The communication stack is responsible to send the alert report to the interface device, which must reply to device, otherwise the alert report will be re-transmitted after a timeout defined by CONFIRM_TIME. The alarm configuration (ACK_OPTION and priority) may require that a plant operator acknowledge it even though the condition has cleared. j) Example of analog alarm It follows an example of AI block alarm configuration, which illustrates how is the alarm processing as well the corresponding alert report. RS parameter: FEATURES_SEL = Reports supported CONFIRM_TIME = 640 000 (20 seconds, multiple of 1/32 milliseconds) AI parameters: ALERT_KEY = 12 (this value could be related to a boiler, for example, therefore any alert received by interface device with this alert key means an alert in that boiler) OUT_SCALE.EU at 100% = 200 OUT_SCALE.EU at 0% = 0 HI_LIM = 190 HI_PRI = 4 ALARM_HYS = 5% ALARM_SUM.DISABLED = Discrete, HiHi, LoLo, Lo, DevHi, DevLo, BlockAlm ACK_OPTION = 0x00 Only the high alarm is enabled in ALARM_SUM.DISABLED and it is disabled the autoacknowledgement (HI_PRI=4 and bit reset in ACK_OPTION), therefore it is necessary an operator plant intervention. 1.27 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Fig. 2 – Alert processing 1.28 Introduction to Function Block Application k) Block alarm (BLOCK_ALM parameter) The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. These problems detected by the block algorithm are registered in the BLOCK_ERR parameter, which is a bit string, so that multiple errors may be shown. Block error conditions is defined (0= inactive, 1 = active) as follows: Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Description Other (LSB) Block Configuration Error Link Configuration Error Simulate Active Local Override Device Fail Safe Set Device Needs Maintenance Soon Input Failure/ process variable has BAD status Output Failure Memory Failure Lost Static Data Lost NV Data Readback Check Failed Device Needs Maintenance Now Power-up Out-of-Service (MSB) The cause of the alert is entered in the Subcode field of BLOCK_ALM, for example, value 3 means Simulate Active. The first condition to become active will set to Active the Alarm State attribute, if other conditions also become active, no alert will be sent. When all conditions become inactive, then an alert with Clear will be reported. Block alarm has a fixed priority of 2, therefore it is auto-acknowledged (no operator plant intervention is required). l) Update Event (UPDATE_EVT parameter) The update event parameter is provided in a block to capture the dynamic information associated with a write to a static parameter within the block. An update alert object transfers the information contained in the update event parameter when the alert is reported. The index of the changed parameter (relative to the start of the function block in the OD) and the new static revision level (ST_REV) are also included in the alert message. Update event has a fixed priority of 2, therefore it is auto-acknowledged (no operator plant intervention is required). Simulation All input and output class function blocks have a SIMULATE or SIMULATE_D or SIMULATE_P parameter, which has a pair of status and values, and an enable switch. This parameter acts as a switch at the interface between the I/O function block and the associated transducer block or hardware channel. Enable simulation The simulate jumper must be ON to enable simulation in the SIMULATE (SIMULATE_D or SIMULATE_P) parameter. The BLOCK_ALM and BLOCK_ERR parameters will show the simulation condition (enable or disable). Such parameters in the Resource Block (RS) will indicate the condition of simulate jumper, while in the Input/Output Function Blocks they will indicate the enable switch condition in the SIMULATE (SIMULATE_D or SIMULATE_P) parameter. 1.29 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Simulation disabled When disabled, the SIMULATE. Simulate Value and Status will track SIMULATE. Transducer Value and Status in order to provide a bumpless transfer from disabled to enabled. The parameter will always initialize to disabled and will be stored in dynamic memory. Input Function Block (AI, DI, PUL) The SIMULATE. Transducer Status and SIMULATE.Transducer Value come from the transducer block or input channel, and contain what will be sent to the input block if the switch is off (disabled). The SIMULATE.Simulate Value and SIMULATE.Simulate Status are presented to the input block when the enable switch is on, and the transducer block or input channel is ignored. The status can be used to simulate transducer faults. The transducer value and status will always be written with transducer data at each evaluation of the input function block. Simulation condition Action Enable SIMULATE.Simulate Value and Status -> PV (after scaling, linearization and filtering) Disable SIMULATE.Transducer Value and Status -> PV (after scaling, linearization and filtering) and SIMULATE.Simulate Value and Status Output Function Block (AO, DO) The SIMULATE.Simulate Value and SIMULATE.Simulate status become the READBACK value and status when the enable switch is on, and the transducer block is ignored. The status can be used to simulate transducer faults. The transducer attribute value and status reflect the transducer readback value and status when simulation is enabled and the transducer maintains last output and ignores the OUT of the Output block. Simulation condition Action Enable SIMULATE.Simulate Value and Status -> READBACK Disable SIMULATE.Transducer Value and SIMULATE.Simulate Value and Status Status -> READBACK and CHANNEL configuration The CHANNEL parameter configuration depends on the device features as it follows: a) Fixed I/O device: This type of device has a fixed number of I/O. All Smar field devices belong to this class. The channel is numbered from 1 to the maximum number of I/O. The DC302 has specific rules to set the CHANNEL parameter as it follows: - DI and DO Blocks: group A has inputs numbered from 1 to 8 and group B has inputs numbered from 9 to 16. - MDI and MDO Blocks: the whole group A is selected setting CHANNEL to 1, and group B to 2. b) Configurable I/O device: The user may configure the number of I/O modules as well the I/O type (input or output, discrete, analog, pulse…). The DFI302 is the only device classified as a configurable I/O device. All I/O modules have the I/O points arranged as it follows: - Point (P): Ordinal number of I/O point in a group, it is numbered from 0 (first point) to 7(last point in the group), and 9 means the whole group of points. The whole group may have 4 or 8 points of I/O. - Group (G): Ordinal number of group in the specified I/O module, it is numbered from 0 (first group) till number of groups minus 1. The I/O points are arranged in groups of 8 points, regardless how they are grouped for electrical isolation. If the I/O type is “8- discrete input/4- discrete output”, the inputs belong to the group 0 and the outputs belong to the group 1. - Slot (S): One slot supports one I/O module, and it is numbered from 0 (first slot in the rack) till 3 (last slot in the rack). 1.30 Introduction to Function Block Application - Rack (R): Each rack has four slots. The rack is numbered from 0 (first rack) till 14 (last rack). Therefore a single I/O point in the DFI302 may be identified by specifying the rack (R), slot (S), group (G) and point (P). As the CHANNEL parameter in the multiple I/O blocks (MIO) must specify the whole group (8 points), the point must be 9, which mean the whole group. The value in the CHANNEL parameter is composed by those elements in the following form: RRSGP. For example, a CHANNEL parameter equals to 1203, it means rack 1, slot 2, group 0 and point 3. If CHANNEL parameter of a MAI block is 10119, it means rack 10, slot 1, group 1 and point 9 (whole group). Before setting the CHANNEL parameter, it is recommended to configure the hardware in the HC block. Because the write check will verify if the I/O type configured in the HC block is suitable for block type. Therefore setting the CHANNEL parameter of AI block to access an I/O type different of analog input will be rejected. Block Instantiation Before explaining block instantiation it is better to clarify some concepts: Block type: It is an algorithm to process the input parameters based on the configuration in the contained parameters, then it generates the outputs. It includes also method to write/read the parameters, DD and others. Indeed all this information are stored in Flash memory of device, therefore one device type has a predefined set of block type available in its firmware. Block (block instance): It is a block type associated to a database where the block parameters are stored (RAM and non-volatile memory). Action Object: Through the action object, a block may be instantiated (created) or deleted. Before instanting a block, it will be checked if the device supports the specified block type as well if there is available RAM and non-volatile memory to store the parameters. All Smar devices support block instantiation and the Block Library (set of block type) for each type of device is shown in the item “Block type availability and initial block set”. Order of Parameters during Download Some block parameters have a write check based on the value of others parameters. Such relationships are shown in the block parameter table of each block type in the columns “Valid Range” and “Store/Mode”. It follows the most common parameter relationship used in write check: - It is required a mode to write the parameter. - The valid range depends on a scale parameter - For configurable I/O device, the CHANNEL parameter depends on the hardware configuration in the HC block. Due to these relationships between parameters in the write check, some times it is necessary to take care about the order of parameters during a download of configuration. The Smar configuration tool Syscon always sends the command to write in the MODE_BLK parameter as last one for that block, it is enough to avoid a lot of problems in the download. The user must observe the other cases and may change the parameter order easily using drag and drop in Syscon. 1.31 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Data Type and Data Structure Definition In this section are defined every data structure and data types used in the system. Object Index Data Type Description 1 Boolean True or false 2 Integer8 1 byte 3 Integer16 2 bytes 4 Integer32 4 bytes 5 Unsigned8 1 byte 6 Unsigned16 2 bytes 7 Unsigned32 4 bytes 8 FloatingPoint * 9 VisibleString They are one byte per character, and include the 7 bit ASCII character set. 10 OctetString Octet strings are binary. 11 Date Date and hour – 7 bytes 12 TimeofDay Time in millisecond elapsed in the day – 6 bytes 13 TimeDifference Time difference – 6 bytes 14 BitString * 21 TimeValue Integer – 8 bytes It represents the date/hour to synchronize the clock. • o o Date: Date (3 bytes) – Format#Year#Month#(Week Day and Month Day) Hour (4 bytes) – Format: HH#MM#MSEG • o o TimeofDay: Time (4 bytes) – It counted in milliseconds from the Zero hour of the day. Date (3 bytes) – It counted in days related to the January, 1, 1984. • • TimeDifference: The structure is the same of the TimeofDay. TimeValue: It used to represent Date and Hour to synchronize the clock. It is an integer with 8 bytes in the base of 1/32 milliseconds. Block Structure – DS-64 This data structure consists of the attributes of a block. 1.32 E Element Name Data Type Size 1 Block Tag VisibleString 32 2 DD MemberId Unsigned32 4 3 DD ItemId Unsigned32 4 4 DD Revision Unsigned16 2 5 Profile Unsigned16 2 6 Profile Revision Unsigned16 2 7 Execution Time Unsigned32 4 8 Period of Execution Unsigned32 4 9 Number of Parameters Unsigned16 2 Introduction to Function Block Application E Element Name Data Type Size 10 Next FB to Execute Unsigned16 2 11 Starting Index of Views Unsigned16 2 12 NumberofVIEW_3 Unsigned8 1 13 NumberofVIEW_4 Unsigned8 1 Value & Status - Floating Point Structure – DS-65 This data structure consists of the value and status of floating point parameters that are Inputs or Outputs. E Element Name Data Type Size 1 Status Unsigned8 1 2 Value Float 4 Value & Status - Discrete Structure – DS-66 This data structure consists of the value and status of discrete value parameters. E Element Name Data Type Size 1 Status Unsigned8 1 2 Value Unsigned8 1 Scaling Structure – DS-68 This data structure consists of the static data used to scale floating point values for display purposes. E Element Name Data Type Size 1 EU at 100% Float 4 2 EU at 0% Float 4 3 Units Index Unsigned16 2 4 Decimal Point Integer8 1 Mode Structure – DS-69 This data structure consists of bit strings for target, actual, permitted, and normal modes. E Element Name Data Type Size 1 Target Bitstring 1 2 Actual Bitstring 1 3 Permitted Bitstring 1 4 Normal Bitstring 1 Access Permissions – DS-70 This data structure consists of access control flags for access to block parameters. E Element Name Data Type Size 1 Grant Bit String 1 2 Deny Bit String 1 1.33 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Alarm Float Structure – DS-71 This data structure consists of data that describes floating point alarms. E Element Name Data Type Size 1 Unacknowledged Unsigned8 1 2 Alarm State Unsigned8 1 3 Time Stamp Time Value 8 4 Subcode Unsigned16 2 5 Value Float 4 Alarm Discrete Structure – DS-72 This data structure consists of data that describes discrete alarms. E Element Name Data Type Size 1 Unacknowledged Unsigned8 1 2 Alarm State Unsigned8 1 3 Time Stamp Time Value 8 4 Subcode Unsigned16 2 5 Value Unsigned8 1 Event Update Structure – DS-73 This data structure consists of data that describes a static revision alarm. E Element Name Data Type Size 1 Unacknowledged Unsigned8 1 2 Update State Unsigned8 1 3 Time Stamp Time Value 8 4 Static Revision Unsigned16 2 5 Relative Index Unsigned16 2 Alarm Summary Structure – DS-74 This data structure consists of data that summarizes 16 alerts. E Element Name Data Type Size 1 Current Bit String 2 2 Unacknowledged Bit String 2 3 Unreported Bit String 2 4 Disabled Bit String 2 Simulate - Floating Point Structure – DS-82 This data structure consists of simulate and transducer floating point value and status and a simulate enable/disable discrete. 1.34 E Element Name Data Type Size 1 Simulate Status Unsigned8 1 2 Simulate Value Float 4 3 Transducer Status Unsigned8 1 Introduction to Function Block Application E Element Name Data Type Size 4 Transducer Value Float 4 5 Simulate En/Disable Unsigned8 1 Simulate - Discrete Structure – DS-83 This data structure consists of a simulate and transducer discrete value and status and a simulate enable/disable discrete. E Element Name Data Type Size 1 Simulate Status Unsigned8 1 2 Simulate Value Unsigned8 4 3 Transducer Status Unsigned8 1 4 Transducer Value Unsigned8 4 5 Simulate En/Disable Unsigned8 1 Test Structure – DS-85 This data structure consists of function block test read/write data. E ElementName DataType Size 1 Value1 Boolean 1 2 Value2 Integer8 1 3 Value3 Integer16 2 4 Value4 Integer32 4 5 Value5 Unsigned8 1 6 Value6 Unsigned16 2 7 Value7 Unsigned32 4 8 Value8 FloatingPoint 4 9 Value9 VisibleString 32 10 Value10 OctetString 32 11 Value11 Date 7 12 Value12 Time of Day 6 13 Value13 Time Difference 6 14 Value14 Bitstring 2 15 Value15 Time Value 8 Discrete Structure – DS-159 This data structure consists of one status and eight discrete value parameters. E Element Name Data Type Size 1 Status Unsigned8 1 2 Value1 Unsigned8 1 3 Value2 Unsigned8 1 4 Value3 Unsigned8 1 5 Value4 Unsigned8 1 1.35 Function Blocks Instruction Manual E Element Name Data Type Size 6 Value5 Unsigned8 1 7 Value6 Unsigned8 1 8 Value7 Unsigned8 1 9 Value8 Unsigned8 1 Discrete Structure – DS-160 This data structure consists of one status and sixteen discrete value parameters. E Element Name Data Type Size 1 Status Unsigned8 1 2 Value1 Unsigned8 1 3 Value2 Unsigned8 1 4 Value3 Unsigned8 1 5 Value4 Unsigned8 1 6 Value5 Unsigned8 1 7 Value6 Unsigned8 1 8 Value7 Unsigned8 1 9 Value8 Unsigned8 1 10 Value9 Unsigned8 1 11 Value10 Unsigned8 1 12 Value11 Unsigned8 1 13 Value12 Unsigned8 1 14 Value13 Unsigned8 1 15 Value14 Unsigned8 1 16 Value15 Unsigned8 1 17 Value16 Unsigned8 1 Manufacturer Specific Data Structure In this section are defined manufacturer specific data structure used in the system. Scaling Conversion Structure - DS-256 This data structure consists of data used to generate constants A and B in equation Y= A*X + B. 1.36 E Element Name Data Type Size 1 From EU 100% Float 4 2 From EU 0% Float 4 3 To EU 100% Float 4 4 To EU 0% Float 4 5 Data Type Unsigned8 1 Introduction to Function Block Application Scaling Conversion Structure with Status - DS-257 This data structure consists of data used to generate constants A and B in equation Y= A*X + B plus the output status. E Element Name Data Type Size 1 From EU 100% Float 4 2 From EU 0% Float 4 3 To EU 100% Float 4 4 To EU 0% Float 4 5 Data Type Unsigned8 1 6 Output Status Unsigned8 1 Scaling Locator Structure - DS-258 This data structure consists of data used to generate constants A and B in equation Y= A*X + B plus the addresses in a slave device. E Element Name Data Type Size 1 From EU 100% Float 4 2 From EU 0% Float 4 3 To EU 100% Float 4 4 To EU 0% Float 4 5 Data Type Unsigned8 1 6 Slave Address Unsigned8 1 7 Modbus Address of Value Unsigned16 2 • Slave Address: It informs the slave address which is required to reference to the PVALUEn parameter. For example, it suppose there is one LC700 with device address equal 3 and In this equipment is required to monitor one specific variable. Thus, this Slave Address is 3. • Modbus Address of Value: It informs the Modbus address of variable which it will be monitored. In the example of the last element, it supposes the Modbus address of the monitored variable was 40032. Thus, element must receive this address. Scaling Locator Structure with Status- DS-259 This data structure consists of data used to generate constants A and B in equation Y= A*X + B plus the addresses in a slave device. E Element Name Data Type Size 1 From EU 100% Float 4 2 From EU 0% Float 4 3 To EU 100% Float 4 4 To EU 0% Float 4 5 Data Type Unsigned8 1 6 Slave Address Unsigned8 1 7 Modbus Address of Value Unsigned16 2 8 Modbus Address of Status Unsigned16 2 • Slave Address: It informs the slave address which is required to reference to the PVALUEn parameter. For example, it suppose there is one LC700 with device address equal 3 and In this equipment is required to monitor one specific variable. Thus, this Slave Address is 3; 1.37 Function Blocks Instruction Manual • Modbus Address of Value: It informs the Modbus address of variable which it will be monitored. In the example of the last element, it supposes the Modbus address of the monitored variable was 40032. Thus, element must receive this address. • Modbus Address of Status: In this parameter, the user informs the Modbus address which the status will be read or write. Each input and output has one correspondent status. The status interpretation follows the Foundation Fieldbus Default (See the item “Parameter Status” for more details). Modbus Variable Locator Structure - DS-260 This data structure consists of data indicating the addresses in a slave device. E Element Name Data Type Size 1 Slave Address Unsigned8 1 2 Modbus Address of Value Unsigned16 2 • Slave Address: It indicates the Slave Address which the required variable to be monitored is located. For example, if in an application one LC700 was adjusted with Device Address 1, the Slave Address must be 1. • Modbus Address Value: It writes the Modbus address of the variable which will be monitored in the MBSM block. It supposes the user needs to monitor the variable with MODBUS Address 40001 located in one Slave I/O module with Device Address 1. Thus, the Modbus Address of Value must be 40001. Modbus Variable Locator Structure with Status- DS-261 This data structure consists of data indicating the addresses in a slave device. E Element Name Data Type Size 1 Slave Address Unsigned8 1 2 Modbus Address of Value Unsigned16 2 3 Modbus Address of Status Unsigned16 2 FF Parameter ID Structure - DS-262 This data structure consists of data informing the position of the FF parameter requested. E Element Name Data Type Size 1 Block Tag VisibleString(32) 2 Relative Index Unsigned16 2 3 Sub Index Unsigned8 1 32 • Block Tag: It informs the Block Tag that contains the variable which is required to visualization. For example, the user needs to monitor the gain value from the PID block. Thus, it inserts the PID Tag Block which contained the gain parameter required to be visualized in the Modbus Master. • Relative Index: It is the parameter index of a function block which it desired to monitor. (See the function block parameter tables). Thus, it inserts the relative index to the desired parameter to be monitored. In the case above, to monitor the gain parameter from the ID relative block, the relative index is 23. • Sub Index: The Sub Index is used for parameters which posses structure. In this case, it is necessary to indicate which structure element is being referred. 1.38 Introduction to Function Block Application Slave Address Structure - DS-263 This data structure consists of data informing the IP address and the Modbus address of the slaves. E Element Name Data Type Size 1 IP Slave1 VisibleString(16) 16 2 IP Slave2 VisibleString(16) 16 3 IP Slave3 VisibleString(16) 16 4 IP Slave4 VisibleString(16) 16 5 IP Slave5 VisibleString(16) 16 6 IP Slave6 VisibleString(16) 16 7 IP Slave7 VisibleString(16) 16 8 IP Slave8 VisibleString(16) 16 9 Slave Address1 Unsigned8 1 10 Slave Address2 Unsigned8 1 11 Slave Address3 Unsigned8 1 12 Slave Address4 Unsigned8 1 13 Slave Address5 Unsigned8 1 14 Slave Address6 Unsigned8 1 15 Slave Address7 Unsigned8 1 16 Slave Address8 Unsigned8 1 1.39 Function Blocks Instruction Manual 1.40 Chapter 2 BLOCK LIBRARY Description of Block Types RESOURCE RS TRANSDUCER BLOCKS DESCRIPTION RESOURCE – This block contains data that is specific to the hardware that is associated with the resource. DESCRIPTION DIAG DIAGNOSTICS TRANSDUCER – It provides online measurement of block execution time, check of links between blocks and other features DSP DISPLAY TRANSDUCER – This block supported by devices with LCD display can be used to monitor and actuate in local parameters of blocks. HC IDSHELL INPUT TRANSUCER BLOCKS HARDWARE CONFIGURATION TRANSDUCER – It configures the module type for each slot in the DFI302. This transducer block provides configuration of the initial settings of the system and device and block online diagnostics. DESCRIPTION LD292/LD302 PRESSURE TRANSDUCER – This is the transducer block for LD292/LD302, a pressure transmitter. TT302 TEMPERATURE TRANSDUCER – This is the transducer block for TT302, a temperature transmitter. IF302 CURRENT FIELDBUS TRANSDUCER – This is the transducer block for IF302, a Current to Fieldbus Transmitter. TP302 POSITION FIELDBUS TRANSDUCER – This is the transducer block for TP302, a Position Fieldbus Transmitter. TEMP DF-45 TEMPERATURE TRANSDUCER – This is the transducer block for the module DF-45, an eight low signal input module for RTD, TC, mV, Ohm. DT302 CONCENTRATION/DENSITY TRANSDUCER – This is the transducer block for the DT302, a concentration/density transmitter. OUTPUT TRANSUCER BLOCKS DESCRIPTION FY302 FIELDBUS POSITIONER TRANSDUCER - This is the transducer block for FY302, a Fieldbus Positioner. FP302 FIELDBUS PRESSURE TRANSDUCER - This is the transducer block for FP302, a Fieldbus to Pressure Converter. FI302 FIELDBUS CURRENT TRANSDUCER - This is the transducer block for IF302, a Fieldbus to Current Converter. FR 302 FIELDBUS RELAY TRANSDUCER – This is the transducer block for the FR302, a Fieldbus relay transmitter. INPUT FUNCTION BLOCKS DESCRIPTION AI ANALOG INPUT – This block takes the analog input data from the analog input signal and it makes available to other function blocks. It has scaling conversion, filtering, square root, low cut and alarm processing. DI DISCRETE INPUT – This block takes the discrete input data from the discrete input signal, and it makes available to other function blocks. It has option to invert, filtering and alarm processing. MAI MULTIPLE ANALOG INPUT– It provides a way to receive 8 analog variables from other modules or physical inputs. MDI MULTIPLE DISCRETE INPUT– It provides a way to receive 8 discrete variables from other modules or physical inputs. PUL PULSE INPUT – It provides an analog value that represents a totalization of pulses in a physical discrete input. 2.1 Function Block Instruction Manual CONTROL AND CALCULATION FUNCTION BLOCKS PID DESCRIPTION PID CONTROL – This standard block has a lot of valuables features as setpoint treatment (value and rate limiting), filtering and alarm on PV, feedforward, output tracking and others. EPID ENHANCED PID – It has all the standard features plus: bumpless or hard transfer from a “manual” mode to an “automatic” mode and bias. APID ADVANCED PID – It has all the standard features plus: bumpless or hard transfer from a “manual” mode to an “automatic” mode, bias. adaptative gain, PI sampling, dead band for error, special treatment for error, ISA or parallel algorithm,.. ARTH ARITHMETIC – This calculation block provides some pre-defined equations ready for use in applications as flow compensation, HTG, ratio control and others. SPLT SPLITTER – This block is used in two typical applications: split ranging and sequencing. It receives the output of PID block, which is processed according to the selected algorithm, and then it generates the values for the two analog output blocks. CHAR SIGNAL CHARACTERIZER – It has capability for two signal characterization based on the same curve. The second input has an option for swapping “x” to “y”, providing an easy way to use the inverse function, which may be used in signal characterization of readback variables. INTG INTEGRATOR – It integrates a variable in function of the time. There is a second flow input that may be used for the following applications: net flow totalization, volume/mass variation in vessels and precise flow ratio control. AALM ANALOG ALARM – This alarm block has dynamic or static alarm limits, hysteresis, and temporary expansion of alarm limits on step setpoint changes to avoid nuisance alarms, two levels of alarm limits and delay for alarm detection. ISEL INPUT SELECTOR – This block has four analog inputs that may be selected by an input parameter or according to a criterion as first good, maximum, minimum, middle and average. SPG SETPOINT RAMP GENERATOR – This block generates setpoint following a profile in function of the time. Typical applications are temperature control, batch reactors, etc. ESPG ENHANCED SETPOINT RAMP GENERATOR – It has an extra parameter to identify the step or segment of the profile in the float format. TIME TIMER and Logic – This block has four discrete inputs that are processed by combination logic. The selected timer processing type operates on the combined input signal to produce a measurement, delay, extension, pulse or debounce. LLAG LEAD-LAG – This block provides dynamic compensation of a variable. It is used normally in a feedforward control. OUTPUT SELECTOR / DYNAMIC LIMITER – It has two algorithms: OSDL Output selector – selection of output by a discrete input Dynamic limiter – this algorithm was developed specially for double cross limit in combustion control. DENS CT 2.2 DENSITY – This block has a special algorithm to calculate the density in different types of engineering units: plato degree, INPM and others. CONSTANT – It provides analog and discrete output parameters with constant values. FFET FLIP-FLOP AND EDGE TRIGGER – It can be configured to work as SR flip-flop, RS flip-flop, D-LATCH and EDGE TRIGGER (rising, falling or bi-directional) AEQU ADVANCED EQUATIONS - This block was specially designed to support specific calculations. MODBUS FUNCTION BLOCKS DESCRIPTION MBCF MODBUS CONFIGURATION – This transducer block is used to configure general features related to Modbus gateway. MBCS MODBUS CONTROL SLAVE – When the device is working as gateway between Foundation Fieldbus and Modbus (slave device), this block may be used to exchange control data between both protocols. MBSS MODBUS SUPERVISION SLAVE – When the device is working as gateway between Foundation Fieldbus and Modbus (slave device), this block may be used to convert Foundation Fieldbus parameters into Modbus variables. Such variables will be available to the supervisory with a Modbus driver. MBCM MODBUS CONTROL MASTER – When the device is working as gateway between Foundation Fieldbus and Modbus (master device), this block may be used to exchange control data between both protocols. MBSM MODBUS SUPERVISION MASTER – When the device is working as gateway between Foundation Fieldbus and Modbus (master device), this block may be used to convert Modbus variables into Foundation Fieldbus parameters. Such parameters will be available to the supervisory with a Foundation Fieldbus driver (OPC). Block Library OUTPUT FUNCTION BLOCKS DESCRIPTION AO ANALOG OUTPUT – The AO block provides an analog value to generate an analog output signa. It provides value and rate limiting, scaling conversion, fault state mechanism and other features. DO DISCRETE OUTPUT – The DO block provides a discrete value to generate a discrete output signal. There is option to invert the discrete value, fault state mechanism and other features. MAO MULTIPLE ANALOG OUTPUT – It provides a way to send 8 analog variables to other modules or physical outputs. MDO MULTIPLE DISCRETE OUTPUT OUTPUT – It provides a way to send 8 discrete variables to other modules or physical outputs. STEP STEP OUTPUT PID – It is used when the final control element has an actuator driven by an electric motor. FLEXIBLE FUNCTION BLOCK FFB DESCRIPTION Flexible Function Block - The FFB block provides logic such as AND, OR, XOR and NOT and functions such as Timer On-Delay, Timer Off-Delay, Timer Pulse, Pulse Counter Down (CTD), Pulse Counter Up(CTU), RS Flip-Flop and SR Flip-Flop. The logic is done using the eight discrete variables available for the FF network (OUT_Dx), the eight input parameters from the FF network (IN_Dx), the sixteen input discrete variables from DC302 hardware(HIN), the eight output discrete variables from DC302 hardware(HOUT), failsafe(FSx) values and auxiliary bit variables(AUX’s). HART FUNCTION BLOCKS DESCRIPTION HCFG HART Configuration & Diagnostic – Concentrates general configuration parameters for module working, in addition to parameters on HART Communication performance and diagnostic. HIRT HART Information & Dynamic Data – This block contains the main parameters, i.e., most commonly used, besides dynamic variables. All parameters related to universal commands and some main “Common Practice” commands are found here. There should be one HIRT block for each HART device installed, up to 32 blocks. In normal operation, the HIRT block parameters show the HART device variables, since there are mechanisms to keep the HI302 database updated. See the Appendix A or the Function Blocks handbook for details. HVT HART Variable Template – This block is a large collection of variables for general use arranged in arrays. It is now possible to access any HART instrument parameter. To this effect, the module should get a configuration (HCD and HWPC blocks) to define the specific instrument one wants to access, and how these commands will relate to each parameter on the block. There is just one HVT block that should be shared among the devices when accessing them through the HART_TAG. This configuration is already configured in the Smar device’s memory. HCD HART Commands Definition – It contains the HART command description for each device type or version. This description stores information needed by the module to communicate and the data read on the HIRT or HTV blocks. The HCD blocks defining the universal and the common practice commands, as well as all commands specific to Smar instruments, are already stored in the equipment’s memory and do not require any configuration from the user. See the Appendix B for details. HWPC HART Write Parameter Configuration – This block stores information about all parameters to be written on the instrument and mapped on the HVT block. 2.3 Function Block Instruction Manual Block type availability and initial block set The table below shows how powerful and flexible the Smar devices are. For example, the user may instantiate up to 20 blocks selected from 17 block types (algorithms) in a field device as LD302. Indeed it means that almost all control strategy may be implemented using only the Smar field devices. Read carefully the notes in order to fully understand the information in this table. Block type RS (1) LD292/ LD302 1 TT302 IF302 TP302 FY302 FP302 FI302 FB700 DC302 DFI302 FR302 DT302 HI302-O HI302-N HI302-I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DIAG (1) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DSP (1) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 HC (1) 0 IDSH(1) 1 TRD-LD (1) 1 TRD-TT (2) 2 TRD-IF (3) 3 TRD-TP(1) 1 TEMP 0 TRD-FI (3) 3 TRD-FP (1) 1 TRD-FY (1) AI (*) 1 1 2 3 1 0 DI(*) 0 MAI 2 MDI 3 0 PUL PID 1 APID 0 ARTH 1 SPLT 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 INTG 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 AALM 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 ISEL 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 SPG 0 ESPG 2.4 0 0 EPID CHAR 1 1 0 TIME 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 LLAG 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 OSDL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DENS 0 0 0 CT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Block Library Block type LD292/ LD302 TT302 IF302 TP302 FY302 FP302 FI302 FB700 DC302 DFI302 FR302 DT302 HI302-O HI302-N HI302-I FFET 1 0 AEQU 0 MBCF(1) 0 MBCS(16) 0 MBSS(16) 0 MBCM(16) 0 MBSM(16) 0 MDO STEP 4 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 HCFE 1 1 1 HIRT 8 8 8 HVT 1 1 1 HCD 0 0 0 HWPC 0 0 0 Note 1 – The column “Block type” indicates which block type is available for each type of device. Note 2 – The number associated to the block type and the device type is the number of blocks instantiated during the factory initialization. Note 3 – If the function block type is not available to the device type, it will be indicated by blank space. Note 4 – Field devices and FB700 have a capability of 20 blocks, including resource, transducers and function blocks. Note 5 – DFI302 has a capability of 100 blocks, including resource, transducers and function blocks. Note 6 – The column Block type shows the mnemonics, if it is followed by a number between parenthesis, it indicates the maximum number of block instances. If it is followed by “*”, it indicates that maximum number depends on the device type. 2.5 Function Block Instruction Manual Resource RS – Resource Block Description This block contains data that is specific to the hardware that is associated with the resource. All data is modeled as Contained, so there are no links to this block. The data is not processed in the way that a function block processes data, so there is no function schematic. This parameter set is intended to be the minimum required for the Function Block Application associated with the resource in which it resides. Some parameters that could be in the set, like calibration data and ambient temperature, are more part of their respective transducer blocks. The mode is used to control major states of the resource. O/S mode stops all function block execution. The actual mode of the function blocks will be changed to O/S, but the target mode will not be changed. Auto mode allows normal operation of the resource. IMan shows that the resource is initializing or receiving a software download. Parameters MANUFAC_ID, DEV_TYPE, DEV_REV, DD_REV, and DD_RESOURCE are required to identify and locate the DD so that Device Description Services can select the correct DD for use with the resource. The parameter HARD_TYPES is a read only bitstring that indicates the types of hardware that are available to this resource. If an I/O block is configured that requires a type of hardware that is not available, the result will be a block alarm for a configuration error. The RS_STATE parameter contains the operational state of the Function Block Application for the resource containing this resource block. RESTART parameter The RESTART parameter allows degrees of initialization of the resource. They are: 1 - Run: it is the passive state of the parameter 2 - Restart resource: it is intended to clear up problems like garbage collection 3 - Restart with defaults: it is intended to wipe configuration memory; it works like a factory initialization. 4 - Restart processor: it provides a way to hit the reset button on the processor associated with the resource This parameter does not appear in a view because it returns to 1 shortly after being written. Non-volatile parameters The Smar devices do not support cyclic saving of non-volatile parameters to a non-volatile memory, therefore NV_CYCLE_T parameter will always be zero, which means not supported feature. On the other hand, the Smar devices have a mechanism to save non-volatile parameters into a nonvolatile memory during the power down, and they will be recovered in the power up. Timeout for remote cascade modes SHED_RCAS and SHED_ROUT set the time limit for loss of communication from a remote device. These constants are used by all function blocks that support a remote cascade mode. The effect of a timeout is described in Mode Calculation. Shedding from RCAS/ROUT shall not happen when SHED_RCAS or SHED_ROUT is set to zero. Alert Notification The MAX_NOTIFY parameter value is the maximum number of alert reports that this resource can have sent without getting a confirmation, corresponding to the amount of buffer space available for alert messages. A user can set the number lower than that, to control alert flooding, by adjusting the LIM_NOTIFY parameter value. If LIM_NOTIFY is set to zero, then no alerts are reported. The CONFIRM_TIME parameter is the time for the resource to wait for confirmation of receipt of a report before trying again. If the CONFIRM_TIME = 0 the device shall not retry. 2.6 Block Library FEATURES / FEATURE_SEL parameters The bit strings FEATURES and FEATURE_SEL determine optional behavior of the resource. The first defines the available features, and is read only. The second is used to turn on an available feature by configuration. If a bit is set in FEATURE_SEL that is not set in FEATURES, the result will be a block alarm for a configuration error. Smar devices support the following features: Reports supported, Fault State supported, Soft Write lock supported. Fault state for the whole resource If the user sets the SET_FSTATE parameter, the FAULT_STATE parameter will indicate active and it will cause all output function blocks in the resource to go immediately to the condition chosen by the fault state Type I/O option. It may be cleared by setting the CLR_FSTATE parameter. The set and clear parameters do not appear in a view because they are momentary. Write lock by software The WRITE_LOCK parameter, if set, will prevent any external change to the static or nonvolatile data base in the Function Block Application of the resource. Block connections and calculation results will proceed normally, but the configuration will be locked. It is set and cleared by writing to the WRITE_LOCK parameter. Clearing WRITE_LOCK will generate the discrete alert WRITE_ALM, at the WRITE_PRI priority. Setting WRITE_LOCK will clear the alert, if it exists. Before setting WRITE_LOCK parameter to Locked, it is necessary to select the “Soft Write lock supported” option in FEATURE_SEL. Features being implemented The parameter CYCLE_TYPE is a bitstring that defines the types of cycles that this resource can do. CYCLE_SEL allows the configurator chooses one of them. If CYCLE_SEL contains more than one bit, or the bit set is not set in CYCLE_TYPE, the result will be a block alarm for a configuration error. MIN_CYCLE_T is the manufacturer specified minimum time to execute a cycle. It puts a lower limit on the scheduling of the resource. MEMORY_SIZE declares the size of the resource for configuration of function blocks, in kilobytes. The parameter FREE_SPACE shows the percentage of configuration memory that is still available. FREE_TIME shows the approximate percentage of time that the resource has left for processing new function blocks, should they be configured. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the resource block will reflect the following causes: • Device Fault State Set – When FAULT_STATE is active. • Simulate Active – When the Simulate jumper is ON. • Out of Service – When the block is in O/S mode. Supported Modes O/S, IMAN and AUTO Parameters Idx Parameter DataType (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store / Mode 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 0 None S/RO 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) 7 RS_STATE 8 9 0 None S 0 None S O/S Na S E D / RO Unsigned8 E D / RO TEST_RW DS-85 None D DD_RESOURCE VisibletString (32) Na S / RO 1 to 255 Spaces Description See Mode Parameter State of the function block application state machine. Read/write test parameter conformance testing. - used only for String identifying the tag of the resource which contains the Device Description for this resource. 2.7 Function Block Instruction Manual Idx Parameter DataType (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store / Mode Description 0x0000030 2 None S / RO Manufacturer identification number - used by an interface device to locate the DD file for the resource. Enumeration; 10 MANUFAC_ID Unsigned32 controlled by FF 11 DEV_TYPE Unsigned16 Set by mfgr None S / RO Manufacturer’s model number associated with the resource - used by interface devices to locate the DD file for the resource. 12 DEV_REV Unsigned8 Set by mfgr None S / RO Manufacturer revision number associated with the resource - used by an interface device to locate the DD file for the resource. 13 DD_REV Unsigned8 Set by mfgr None S / RO Revision of the DD associated with the resource used by an interface device to locate the DD file for the resource. 14 GRANT_DENY DS-70 See Block Options Na D Options for controlling access of host computer and local control panels to operating, tuning and alarm parameters of the block. 15 HARD_TYPES Bitstring(2) Set by mfgr Na S / RO The types of hardware available as channel numbers. E D Allows a manual restart to be initiated. Several degrees of restart are possible. 0 1: Run, 2: Restart resource, 16 RESTART Unsigned8 3: Restart with defaults, 4: Restart processor 17 FEATURES Bitstring(2) 19 FEATURE_SEL Bitstring(2) 19 CYCLE_TYPE Bitstring(2) 20 CYCLE_SEL Bitstring(2) 21 MIN_CYCLE_T Unsigned32 22 MEMORY_SIZE Unsigned16 23 NV_CYCLE_T Unsigned32 24 FREE_SPACE Float 25 FREE_TIME Float 26 SHED_RCAS Unsigned32 27 SHED_ROUT Unsigned32 28 FAULT_STATE Unsigned8 Set by mfgr Na S / RO Na S Na S / RO Identifies the block execution methods available for this resource. Na S Used to select the block execution method for this resource. Set by mfgr 1/32 millisec S / RO Time duration of the shortest cycle interval of which the resource is capable. Set by mfgr kbytes S / RO Available configuration memory in the empty resource. To be checked before attempting a download. 1/32 millisec S / RO Interval between writing copies of NV parameters to non-volatile memory. Zero means never. 0 to 100 % % D / RO Percent of memory available for further configuration. Zero in a preconfigured resource. 0 to 100% % D / RO Percent of the block processing time that is free to process additional blocks. 640000 1/32millis ec S Time duration at which to give up on computer writes to function block RCas locations. 640000 1/32 millisec S Time duration at which to give up on computer writes to function block ROut locations. 0 Set by mfgr 0 1: Clear, 2: Active E D Used to show supported resource block options. Used to select resource block options. Condition set by loss of communication to an output block, failure promoted to an output block or a physical contact. When Fault State condition is set, then output function blocks will perform their FSAFE actions. 29 SET_FSTATE Unsigned8 1: Off, 2: Set 1 E D Allows the fault state condition to be manually initiated by selecting Set. 30 CLR_FSTATE Unsigned8 1: Off, 2: Clear 1 E D Writing a Clear to this parameter will clear the device fault state if the field condition, if any, has cleared. 31 MAX_NOTIFY Unsigned8 Set by mfgr None S / RO Maximum number of unconfirmed notify messages possible. 2.8 Block Library Idx Parameter DataType (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store / Mode Description 32 LIM_NOTIFY Unsigned8 0 to MAX_ NOTIFY MAX_ NOTIFY None S Maximum number of unconfirmed alert notify messages allowed. 33 CONFIRM_TIME Unsigned32 640000 1/32 millisec S The minimum time between retries of alert reports. 34 WRITE_LOCK Unsigned8 1 E S If set, no writes from anywhere are allowed, except to clear WRITE_LOCK. Block inputs will continue to be updated. 35 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 Na D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. 1:Unlocked, 2:Locked 36 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 Na D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. 37 ALARM_SUM DS-74 Na S The current alert status, unacknowledged states, unreported states, and disabled states of the alarms associated with the function block. 0 Na S Selection of whether alarms associated with the block will be automatically acknowledged. 0 None S Priority of the alarm generated by clearing the write lock. 0: Auto ACK Disable 38 ACK_OPTION Bitstring(2) 39 WRITE_PRI Unsigned8 40 WRITE_ALM DS-72 None D This alert is generated if the write lock parameter is cleared. 41 ITK_VER Unsigned16 Na S/RO This parameter informs which ITK version is the device (only for certified devices). 1: Auto ACK Enable 0 to 15 Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S – static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters 2.9 Function Block Instruction Manual Transducer Blocks DIAG – Diagnostics Transducer Block Description This transducer block provides the following features: • Online measurement of block execution time • Hardware revision • Firmware revision • Serial number of device • Serial number of main board The parameter BEHAVIOR will define which initial values for parameters will be used after a block instantiation. The option Adapted selects a more suitable initial value set, it will avoid invalid values for parameters. It is still possible to have the initial values defined by specification by selecting the option Spec. Supported modes O/S and AUTO. Parameters Idx Parameter Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store / Mode 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 0 None S/RO 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 1 to 255 0 None S 0 None S O/S Na S E D/RO Na D 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) 7 EXE_TIME_TAG Visible String (32) spaces Description See Mode Parameter. Block tag of the selected block to measure the execution time. 8 MIN_EXE_TIME Float +INF ms D / RO Minimum execution time of the selected block. 9 CUR_EXE_TIME Float 0 ms D / RO Current execution time of the selected block. 10 MAX_EXE_TIME Float 0 ms D / RO Maximum execution time of the selected block. 11 HW_REV Visible String(5) S / RO Hardware revision. 12 FIRMWARE_REV Visible String(5) S / RO Firmware revision. 13 DEV_SN Unsigned32 S / RO Device serial number. 14 MAIN_BOARD_SN Unsigned32 S / RO Main board serial number. 15 BEHAVIOR Unsigned8 16 PUB_SUB_STATUS Unsigned8 0:Adapted 1:Spec 0 0-good 1-bad E S Select the initial values for parameters, there are two options Adapted and Spec. E D / RO Indicate if all external links is good or if at least one is bad. E D 0-first 17 LINK_SELECTION Unsigned8 1-next 0 Select an external link. 2-previous 18 LINK_NUMBER Unsigned16 D / RO Number of the external link selected. 19 LINK_STATUS Unsigned8 D / RO Status of the external link selected (see table below) 20 LINK_RECOVER Unsigned8 D Command a recovery process to the external link selected. 2.10 0-no action 1-action No action E Block Library Idx Parameter Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value 21 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 22 SAVING_CONFIG UNSIGNED 8 Legend: 0 – NOT SAVING 1 - SAVING 0 Store / Mode Description Na D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. E D It indicates if the device is saving the configuration in a non-volatile memory. Units E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters Description of the values given by the LINK_STATUS parameter Publisher/ Link Status General Status Connection Status Subscriber Sending/Receiving Block Update 0X00 Good Publisher 0X40 Good Subscriber 0X84 Bad Publisher Established Sending/Receiving Not updating 0X88 Bad Publisher Established Not sending/receiving Updating 0X8C Bad Publisher Established Not sending/receiving Not updating 0X98 Bad Publisher Not established Not sending/receiving Updating 0X9C Bad Publisher Not established Not sending/receiving Not updating 0XA8 Bad Publisher Pending Not sending/receiving Updating 0XAC Bad Publisher Pending Not sending/receiving Not updating 0XBC Bad Publisher Not configured Not sending/receiving Not updating Not updating 0XC4 Bad Subscriber Established Sending/Receiving 0XCC Bad Subscriber Established Not sending/receiving Not updating 0XDC Bad Subscriber Not established Not sending/receiving Not updating 0XEC Bad Subscriber Pending Not sending/receiving Not updating 0XFC Bad Subscriber Not configured Not sending/receiving Not updating 2.11 Function Block Instruction Manual DSP - Display Transducer Description The display transducer is responsible to show on the LCD screen, one chose variable when it is in monitoring mode or a configured menu when in local adjustment mode. The display transducer is completely configured via SYSCON. It means, the user can select the best options to fit his application. Among the possibilities, the following options can be emphasized: Mode block, Outputs monitoring, Tag visualization and Tuning Parameters setting. The user, when configuring, may select up to seven parameters of any block, executing in the local device. It means that the device itself is executing that Display Transducer Block. Supported Modes OOS and AUTO. Parameters DataType Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Idx Parameter 7 BLOCK_TAG_PARAM VisibleString 8 INDEX_RELATIVE Unsigned16 9 SUB_INDEX Unsigned8 10 MNEMONIC INC_DEC Float 12 DECIMAL_POINT_NUMBER Unsigned8 ACCESS Store Description None S This is a tag of the block to which the parameter belongs to use up to a maximum of 32 character. 0-65535 None S This is the index related to the parameter to be actuated or viewed (1, 2, ..). 1-255 None S To visualize a certain tag, opt for the index relative equal to zero, and for the subindex equal to one. S This is the mnemonic for the parameter identification (maximum of 16 characters). Choose the mnemonic, preferably with no more than 5 characters because, this way, it will not necessary to rotate it on display. None S It is the increment and decrement in decimal units when the parameter is Float or Float Status time, or integer, when the parameter is in whole units. None S This is the number of digits after the decimal point (0 to 3 decimal digits) VisibleString 11 13 Units Unsigned8 None 0-4 Monit/Action None The access allows the user to read, in the case of the “Monitoring” option, and to write when “action” option is selected, then the display will show the increment and decrement arrows. These parameters include two options: value and mnemonic. In option value it is possible to display data both in the alphanumeric and in the numeric fields, this way, in the case of a data higher than 10000, it will be shown in the alphanumeric field. 14 ALPHA_NUM Unsigned8 Mnem/Value None S 63 DISPLAY_REFLESH Unsigned8 1 None D 2.12 Block Library HC – Hardware Configuration Transducer Overview It configures the module type for each slot in the DFI302. Description The following table shows the available module types. Code Description I/O Type Available slot No I/O DF51 DFI302 Processor 1x10Mbps, 4xH1 No I/O DF50 Power Supply 90-264VAC No I/O DF56 Power Supply for Backplane 20-30VDC No I/O DF52 Power Supply for Fieldbus No I/O DF49 2-channel Power Supply Impedance No I/O DF53 4-channel Power Supply Impedance DF11 2 Groups of 8 24VDC Inputs (Isolated) 16-discrete input DF12 2 Groups of 8 48VDC Inputs (Isolated) 16- discrete input DF13 2 Groups of 8 60VDC Inputs (Isolated) 16- discrete input DF14 2 Groups of 8 125VDC Inputs (Isolated) 16- discrete input DF15 2 Groups of 8 24VDC Inputs (Sink)(Isolated) 16- discrete input DF16 2 Groups of 4 120VAC Inputs (Isolated) 8- discrete input DF17 2 Groups of 4 240VAC Inputs (Isolated) 8- discrete input DF18 2 Groups of 8 120VAC Inputs (Isolated) 16- discrete input DF19 2 Groups of 8 240VAC Inputs (Isolated) 16- discrete input DF20 1 Group of 8 On/Off Switches DF21 1 Group of 16 Open Collector Outputs 16- discrete output DF22 2 Group of 8 Transistor Outputs (source) (Isolated) 16- discrete output DF23 2 Groups of 4 120/240VAC Outputs 8- discrete output DF24 2 Groups of 8 120/240VAC Outputs 16- discrete output DF25 2 Groups of 4 NO Relays Outputs 8- discrete output DF26 2 Groups of 4 NC Relays Outputs 8- discrete output DF27 1 Group of 4 NO and 4 NC Relay Outputs DF28 2 Groups of 8 NO Relays Outputs DF29 2 Groups of 4 NO Relays Outputs (W/o RC) 8- discrete output DF30 2 Groups of 4 NC Relays Outputs (W/o RC) 8- discrete output DF31 1 Group of 4 NO and 4 NC Relay Outputs (W/o RC) DF32 1 Group of 8 24VDC Inputs and 1 Group of 4 NO Relays 8- discrete input/4- discrete output DF33 1 Group of 8 48VDC Inputs and 1 Group of 4 NO Relays 8- discrete input/4- discrete output DF34 1 Group of 8 60VDC Inputs and 1 Group of 4 NO Relays 8- discrete input/4- discrete output DF35 1 Group of 8 24VDC Inputs and 1 Group of 4 NC Relays 8- discrete input/4- discrete output DF36 1 Group of 8 48VDC Inputs and 1 Group of 4 NC Relays 8- discrete input/4- discrete output DF37 1 Group of 8 60VDC Inputs and 1 Group of 4 NC Relays 8- discrete input/4- discrete output DF38 1 Group of 8 24VDC Inputs ,1 Group of 2 NO and 2 NC Relays 8- discrete input/4- discrete output DF39 1 Group of 8 48VDC Inputs , 1 Group of 2 NO and 2 NC Relays 8- discrete input/4- discrete output DF40 1 Group of 8 60VDC Inputs , 1 Group of 2 NO and 2 NC Relays 8- discrete input/4- discrete output DF41 2 Groups of 8 pulse inputs – low frequency 16-pulse input DF42 2 Groups of 8 pulse inputs – high frequency 16-pulse input DF43 1 Group of 8 analog Inputs 8-analog input DF44 1 Group of 8 analog inputs with shunt resistors 8-analog input No I/O 8- discrete input 8- discrete output 16- discrete output 8- discrete output 2.13 Function Block Instruction Manual Code Description I/O Type DF57 1 Group of 8 differential analog inputs with shunt resistors DF45 1 Group of 8 temperature Inputs DF46 1 Group of 4 analog output 8-analog input 8-temperature 4-analog output The execution method of this transducer block will write to all output modules and it will read all the input modules. If any I/O module has failed in this scan, it will be indicated in BLOCK_ERR as well in the MODULE_STATUS_x , It makes easy to find the module in failure or even the sensor. All the I/O modules in the previous table may be accessed directly using Input/Output Function Blocks without a transducer block, except for the DF-45 that requires the TEMP block. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the HC block will reflect the following causes: • Lost static data – Low battery voltage indication • Device needs maintenance now – High temperature in the CPU • Input Failure – a physical input point in failure • Output Failure – a physical output point in failure • Out of Service – When the block is in O/S mode. Supported Modes O/S and AUTO. Parameters DataType Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store / Mode None S Idx Parameter 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 0 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 0 None S 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 0 None S 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 O/S Na S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) E D / RO 0 E S / O/S Identification for master or slave remote I/O. 1 to 255 Description See Mode Parameter 0 : Master 1 : Remote I/O Slave 1 2 : Remote I/O Slave 2 7 REMOTE_IO Unsigned8 3 : Remote I/O Slave 3 4 : Remote I/O Slave 4 5 : Remote I/O Slave 5 6 : Remote I/O Slave 6 8 IO_TYPE_R0 4 Unsigned8 0 E S / O/S Select module type for the rack 0 9 IO_TYPE_R1 4 Unsigned8 0 E S / O/S Select module type for the rack 1 10 IO_TYPE_R2 4 Unsigned8 0 E S / O/S Select module type for the rack 2 11 IO_TYPE_R3 4 Unsigned8 0 E S / O/S Select module type for the rack 3 12 IO_TYPE_R4 4 Unsigned8 0 E S / O/S Select module type for the rack 4 13 IO_TYPE_R5 4 Unsigned8 0 E S / O/S Select module type for the rack 5 14 IO_TYPE_R6 4 Unsigned8 0 E S / O/S Select module type for the rack 6 15 IO_TYPE_R7 4 Unsigned8 0 E S / O/S Select module type for the rack 7 16 IO_TYPE_R8 4 Unsigned8 0 E S / O/S Select module type for the rack 8 17 IO_TYPE_R9 4 Unsigned8 0 E S / O/S Select module type for the rack 9 2.14 Block Library DataType Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store / Mode 0 E S / O/S Select module type for the rack 10 4 Unsigned8 0 E S / O/S Select module type for the rack 11 4 Unsigned8 0 E S / O/S Select module type for the rack 12 IO_TYPE_R13 4 Unsigned8 0 E S / O/S Select module type for the rack 13 IO_TYPE_R14 4 Unsigned8 0 E S / O/S Select module type for the rack 14 23 MODULE_STATUS_R0 _3 Bitstring(2) D / RO Status of modules in rack 0-3. 24 MODULE_STATUS_R4 _7 Bitstring(2) D / RO Status of modules in rack 4-7. 25 MODULE_STATUS_R8 _11 Bitstring(2) D / RO Status of modules in rack 8-11. 26 MODULE_STATUS_R1 2_14 Bitstring(2) D / RO Status of modules in rack 12-14. 27 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 Idx Parameter 18 IO_TYPE_R10 4 Unsigned8 19 IO_TYPE_R11 20 IO_TYPE_R12 21 22 28 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 Na Na Description D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters 2.15 Function Block Instruction Manual IDShell Transducer Block Description This transducer block provides the following features: - Configuration of the Initial Settings of the System - Device and Block Online Diagnostics and Configuration It is a tool that helps to achieve the interoperability with new devices into System302. Supported modes O/S and AUTO. Parameters Idx Parameter Data Type (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store/ Mode 1 ST_REV unsigned int 0 to 216 0 None S/RO FF – 891 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na RW FF – 891 0 None RW FF – 891 1 None RW FF – 891 O/S Na 3 STRATEGY unsigned int 4 ALERT_KEY unsigned char 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) 7 UPDATE_EVT EventUpdate FF – 891 8 BLOCK_ALM AlarmDiscrete FF – 891 9 TRANSDUCER_DIRECTORY unsigned int 0 to 216 RO A directory that specifies the number and the starting indices of the transducers in the transducer block. (FF – 903) 10 TRANSDUCER_TYPE unsigned int 0 to 216 RO Identifies the transducer that follows. (FF – 903) 11 XD_ERROR unsigned char 1 to 255 RO Defines one of the error code. (FF – 903) RO A directory that specifies the number, the starting indices, and DD Item IDs of data collections in each transducers in the transducer block. (FF – 903) 12 COLLECTION_DIRECTORY unsigned long 0 to 2 16 Description 1 to 255 E 0 to 232 FF – 891 D/RO FF – 891 Role for the local device in the redundancy Passive, Active, Backup and Active_Not_Link_Master are not synchronized roles, valid only for supervision and LAS redundancy. Hot Standby redundancy are set via the following roles: 1:Passive 2:Active 3:Backup 13 FUNCTION_IDS Unsigned8 4:Active_Not_Link _Master 7 E D / RW 7:Sync_Idle 8:Sync_Main Sync_Idle is the default role, after factory initialization. The 4th port is used to synchronize two different DFI302 processors. Sync_Main indicates the preferential processor to assume the tasks. 9:Sync_Backup Sync_Backup indicates the backup processor to assume the tasks. 14 15 16 2.16 UPDATE_TIME ATUAL_LINK_ADDRESS_1 CONF_LINK_ADDRESS_1 unsigned long unsigned int unsigned int 0 to 232 1000 RW Update time for supervision. 0 to 2 16 0 RO Actual link address for Port 1. 0 to 2 16 0 RW Configured link address for Port 1. Block Library Idx Parameter Data Type (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value 17 ATUAL_LINK_ADDRESS_2 unsigned int 0 to 216 292 RO Actual link address for Port 2. unsigned int 0 to 2 16 0 RW Configured link address for Port 2. 0 to 2 16 293 RO Actual link address for Port 3. 0 to 2 16 0 RW Configured link address for Port 3. 0 to 2 16 294 RO Actual link address for Port 4. 0 to 2 16 0 RW Configured link address for Port 4. 0 RW Extra functionality Application. ⎯ RO Name of the last downloaded to PCI card. RW System Operation mode (single or redundant). It will impact the calculation of SUP_UPDATE_SUGGESTED. RW Target update time configured to the system. It may be achieved or not depending on the scheduled traffic, number of MVCs, number of Views, bus parameters. See macro cycle equation (1). 18 19 20 CONF_LINK_ADDRESS_2 ATUAL_LINK_ADDRESS_3 CONF_LINK_ADDRESS_3 unsigned int unsigned int 21 ATUAL_LINK_ADDRESS_4 22 CONF_LINK_ADDRESS_4 unsigned int 23 SELECT_IDS unsigned char 24 SOFTWARE_NAME VisibleString 25 SYSTEM_OPERATION 26 27 SUP_UPDATE_CONFIGURE D_ms SUP_UPDATE_SUGGESTE D_ms unsigned int unsigned char unsigned long unsigned long 0 to 256 Redundant Single 0 to 232 0 to 232 Single 0 ⎯ Units Store/ Mode RO Description of IDShell software Suggested update time based on the programmed traffic on the bus (Scheduled traffic, MVCs, Views, bus parameters, maintenance traffic). Note: Not Available. 28 NO_DATA_CHANGE_TIMEO UT_ms unsigned long 0 to 232 29 RESOURCE_FAULT unsigned char Ok Failure Recovered Disabled R/W 2000 RW Timeout to report data even if a change is not observed. RO Indicates lack of resource on the card. 30 MVC_ENABLE unsigned char Disabled Enabled 31 SCHEDULE_UPDATE unsigned char Failed Update Req Updated Updating ⎯ R/W 32 T1_ms unsigned long 0 to 232 8,000 R/W 33 T2_ms unsigned long 0 to 232 60,000 R/W 34 T3_ms unsigned long 0 to 232 8,000 R/W 35 FIRST_UNPOLLED_ADDRE SS unsigned char 0 to 256 48 R/W 36 N_UNPOLLED_ADDRESS unsigned char 0 to 256 184 R/W Enables supervision by broadcast of MVC configured by IDSHELL. When disabled IDSHELL will use normal procedures to update the requested list of TAGs. A write to this parameter will trigger the update of the LAS schedule based on the information on the network. T1 timer used to the SM manager to timeout the confirmation of Assign Tag, Assign Address, or Enable SM Operation from the SM Agent. See equation (2). T2 timer used by the SM Agent to timeout the Assign Address process. See equation (2). T3 timer used to the SM manager to timeout before send the Enable SM Operation. See equation (2). The PCI acting as the LAS will not poll N_UNPOLLED_ADDRESS consecutive address starting on FIRST_UNPOLLED_ADDRESS. The PCI acting as the LAS will not poll N_UNPOLLED_ADDRESS consecutive address starting on FIRST_UNPOLLED_ADDRESS. 2.17 Function Block Instruction Manual Idx Parameter Data Type (length) Valid Range/ Options 37 SLOT_TIME_octet unsigned int 0 to 2 38 MAX_RESPONSE_DELAY_o ctet unsigned int 39 MIN_INTER_PDU_DELAY_o ctet 40 16 Default Value Units Store/ Mode 10 R/W 0 to 216 8 R/W unsigned char 0 to 256 12 R/W TARGET_ROTATION_TIME_ ms unsigned long 0 to 232 ⎯ R/W 41 MAX_CONFIRM_DELAY_ON _DATA_ms unsigned int 0 to 216 8260 R/W 42 LOCAL_VCR_SELECT unsigned char First Next None Previous ⎯ 43 L_VCR_ID unsigned char 44 L_VCR_TYPE_AND_ROLE unsigned char 45 L_VCR_REMOTE_ADDRESS octet string, 4 46 L_VCR_STATISTICS_RESET unsigned char 47 48 49 L_VCR_ST_N_ABORT L_VCR_ST_N_DT_PDU_SE NT L_VCR_ST_N_DT_PDU_RC V Bnu, Publisher Bnu, Subscriber Qub, Client Qub, Server Quu, Source Quu, Sink Undefined Ok Reset ⎯ R/W VCR selected. ⎯ RO VCR type and role. ⎯ RO VCR Remote address. ⎯ R/W unsigned long 0 to 2 32 ⎯ RO unsigned long 0 to 232 ⎯ RO unsigned long 0 to 232 ⎯ RO L_VCR_ST_N_DT_TIMEOUT unsigned long 0 to 232 ⎯ RO 51 L_VCR_ST_REQ_REJECTE D unsigned int 0 to 216 ⎯ RO 52 L_VCR_ST_W_REQ_REJEC TED unsigned int 0 to 216 ⎯ RO bit string Port 0 mismatch Port 1 mismatch Port 2 mismatch Port 3 mismatch Reserved NET_STATUS 54 PORT_SELECT unsigned char 55 PORT_ID unsigned char First Next None Previous RO Resets statistics of the selected VCR. Number of abort on the selected VCR. Number of DT PDU sent on the selected VCR. Number of DT PDU received on the selected VCR. Number of DT failures caused by timeout. Number of request that could not be queued to this VCR. Number of write request that could not be queued to this VCR. It will indicate any occurrence of mismatching between PORT_N_CONF_DEV and PORT_N_DEV_READY. Note: Not Available. ⎯ R/W Selects the port to be analyzed or configured in the following parameters. 0 R/W Port selected. (1, 2, 3 or 4) ⎯ R/W Updates the database of all devices on the selected port. Configured macro cycle. 56 PORT_UPDATE_PROFILE unsigned char Ready Start Update Update Processing 57 PORT_MACROCYCLE_CON FIGURED_ms unsigned long 0 to 232 0 R/W 58 PORT_MACROCYCLE_SUG GESTED_ms unsigned long 0 to 232 ⎯ RO 2.18 Devices on the network will use SLOT TIME and MAX_RESPONSE_DELAY to set a timeout to control some activity on the network. Devices on the network will use SLOT TIME and MAX_RESPONSE_DELAY to set a timeout to control some activity on the network. Minimum time that the network needs to be in silent to allow the device to be prepared to receive the next frame on the network. Target time to LAS rotates the token to all devices in the network. Maximum timeout to be configured on client/server VCRs to wait for data confirmation. Selects a local VCR in the interface device that owns this transducer block. 50 53 Description Suggested macro cycle. Note: Not Available. Block Library Idx Parameter Data Type (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value Store/ Mode Description 59 PORT_TOKEN_ROTATION_ TIME_ms unsigned long 0 to 232 ⎯ RO Actual period of time that the LAS took to rotate the token to all devices in the network. 60 PORT_N_CONF_DEV unsigned char 0 to 256 ⎯ R/W Number of expects stations on this network. 61 PORT_N_DEV unsigned char 0 to 256 ⎯ RO Number of devices on the network. 62 PORT_N_DEV_READY unsigned char 0 to 256 ⎯ RO Number of device with complete database updated. PORT_LIVE_LIST_STATUS_ 1 PORT_LIVE_LIST_STATUS_ 2 PORT_LIVE_LIST_STATUS_ 3 PORT_LIVE_LIST_STATUS_ 4 PORT_LIVE_LIST_STATUS_ 5 PORT_LIVE_LIST_STATUS_ 6 PORT_LIVE_LIST_STATUS_ 7 PORT_LIVE_LIST_STATUS_ 8 PORT_LIVE_LIST_STATUS_ 9 PORT_LIVE_LIST_STATUS_ 10 PORT_LIVE_LIST_STATUS_ 11 PORT_LIVE_LIST_STATUS_ 12 PORT_LIVE_LIST_STATUS_ 13 PORT_LIVE_LIST_STATUS_ 14 PORT_LIVE_LIST_STATUS_ 15 PORT_LIVE_LIST_STATUS_ 16 bit string , 8 bytes 256 bits bit string , 8 bytes 256 bits bit string , 8 bytes 256 bits bit string , 8 bytes 256 bits bit string , 8 bytes 256 bits bit string , 8 bytes 256 bits bit string , 8 bytes 256 bits bit string , 8 bytes 256 bits bit string , 8 bytes 256 bits bit string , 8 bytes 256 bits bit string , 8 bytes 256 bits bit string , 8 bytes 256 bits bit string , 8 bytes 256 bits bit string , 8 bytes 256 bits bit string , 8 bytes 256 bits bit string , 8 bytes 256 bits PORT_STATISTICS_RESET unsigned char Units Note: Not Available. 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 De 0 a 15 ⎯ RO Live list on the selected port. De 16 a 31 ⎯ RO Live list on the selected port. De 32 a 47 ⎯ RO Live list on the selected port. De 48 a 63 ⎯ RO Live list on the selected port. De 64 a 79 ⎯ RO Live list on the selected port. De 80 a 95 ⎯ RO Live list on the selected port. De 96 a 111 ⎯ RO Live list on the selected port. De 112 a 127 ⎯ RO Live list on the selected port. De 128 a 143 ⎯ RO Live list on the selected port. De 144 a 159 ⎯ RO Live list on the selected port. De 160 a 175 ⎯ RO Live list on the selected port. De 176 a 191 ⎯ RO Live list on the selected port. De 192 a 207 ⎯ RO Live list on the selected port. De 208 a 223 ⎯ RO Live list on the selected port. De 224 a 239 ⎯ RO Live list on the selected port. De 240 a 254 ⎯ RO Live list on the selected port. Ok Reset Ok R/W 80 PORT_ST_LIVE_LIST_REV unsigned char 0 to 256 0 RO 81 PORT_ST_N_MACROCYCL E unsigned long 0 to 232 0 RO 32 0 RO 82 PORT_ST_PDU_SENT unsigned long 0 to 2 83 PORT_ST_PDU_RECEIVED unsigned long 0 to 232 0 RO 84 PORT_ST_WRONG_FCS unsigned long 0 to 232 0 RO 85 PORT_ST_CLAIM_LAS unsigned long 0 to 232 0 RO 86 PORT_ST_AP_DATA unsigned long 0 to 232 0 RO 87 PORT_ST_CON_MAINTENA NCE unsigned long 0 to 232 0 RO 88 PORT_ST_MAINTENANCE_ DATA unsigned long 0 to 232 0 RO Resets port statistics. Number of update on the live list. It is incremented every time a device leaves or enters in the live list. Number of macro cycle executed by the selected port. Number of frames sent by the selected port. Number of frames received by the selected port. Number of frames with wrong FCS received by the selected port. Number of Claim Las process initialized by the selected port. Percent of application data on the bus. Percent of connection maintenance data on the bus. Including residual activity and connection frame. Percent of maintenance data on the bus. 2.19 Function Block Instruction Manual Idx 89 Parameter Data Type (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value DEVICE_CHANGE_PASSW visible string, 32 ORD Units Store/ Mode Description R/W Password to protect against unexpected change of the device address and device ID. Before write to device address and device ID write SYSTEM302 to this parameter. 90 DEVICE_SELECT unsigned char First Next None Previous ⎯ R/W Selects the device to be analyzed or configured in the following parameters. 91 DEV_ADDRESS unsigned char 0 to 256 ⎯ R/W Address of the selected device. Also used to select device by address. 92 DEV_ID visible string ⎯ R/W Device ID of the selected device. 93 DEV_TAG visible string ⎯ RO Device Tag. ⎯ RO Device database interface Device. Ok R/W Write to this parameter triggers interface device to force the selected device to leave the network. It will be polled afterwards. 94 DEV_STATUS unsigned char None Alive Complete DB Force Ok status 95 DEV_FORCE_OUT unsigned char 96 DEV_MANUFACTURER_ID OctetString ⎯ RO Device Manufacture ID. 97 DEV_TYPE_2 OctetString ⎯ RO Device Type. 98 DEV_FIRST_BLOCK_INDEX unsigned int 0 to 216 ⎯ RO 99 DEV_FIRST_VCR_INDEX unsigned int 0 to 216 ⎯ RO DEV_FIRST_OBJECT_LINK_ 100 INDEX unsigned int 0 to 216 ⎯ RO 101 DEV_FIRST_FBSTART_IND EX unsigned int 0 to 216 ⎯ RO 102 DEV_VFD_ID_SM unsigned long 0 to 232 ⎯ RO 103 DEV_VFD_ID_FBAP unsigned char 0 to 256 ⎯ RO 104 DEV_T1_ms unsigned long 0 to 232 ⎯ R/W 105 DEV_T2_ms unsigned long 0 to 232 ⎯ R/W 106 DEV_T3_ms unsigned long 0 to 232 ⎯ R/W 107 DEV_SLOT_TIME_octet unsigned int 0 to 216 ⎯ R/W 108 DEV_MAX_RESPONSE_DEL AY_octet unsigned int 0 to 216 ⎯ R/W 109 DEV_MIN_INTER_PDU_DEL AY_octet unsigned int 0 to 216 ⎯ R/W 110 DEV_MACROCYCLE_ms unsigned long 0 to 232 ⎯ R/W 111 DEV_BLOCK_SELECT unsigned char First Next None Previous 2.20 R/W in the Index of the first Function Block of the selected device. Index of the first VCR of the selected device. Index of the first Object Link of the selected device. Index of the first FB Start parameter of the selected device. FB Start defines the Function Block schedule. VFD ID for system management and network management. VFD ID for function block application. T1 timer used to the SM manager to timeout the confirmation of Assign Tag, Assign Address, or Enable SM Operation from the SM Agent. T2 timer used by the SM Agent to timeout the Assign Address process. T3 timer used to the SM manager to timeout before send the Enable SM Operation. Devices on the network will use SLOT TIME and MAX_RESPONSE_DELAY to set a timeout to control some activity on the network. Devices on the network will use SLOT TIME and MAX_RESPONSE_DELAY to set a timeout to control some activity on the network. Minimum time that the network needs to be silent to allow device to be ready to receive the next frame on the network. Macro cycle for the function block application. Selects the block to be analyzed or configured in the following parameters. Block Library Idx Parameter Data Type (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value 112 BLK_TYPE unsigned char No Selection Resource Transducer Function Block ⎯ RO Block Type (Resource, Transducer, or Function Block). 113 BLK_INDEX unsigned int 0 to 216 ⎯ R/W Block Index. 114 BLK_TAG visible string ⎯ R/W Block Tag. 115 BLK_DD_ITEM octet string ⎯ RO Block DD Item. 116 BLK_FIRST_VIEW_INDEX unsigned int 0 to 216 ⎯ RO Block index of first View. First Next None Previous ⎯ R/W Selects the device VCR to be analyzed or configured in the following parameters. Units Store/ Mode Description 117 DEV_VCR_SELECT unsigned char 118 VCR_INDEX unsigned char 0 to 256 ⎯ R/W Selected VCR. Bnu, Publisher Bnu, Subscriber Qub, Client Qub, Server Quu, Source Quu, Sink Undefined ⎯ R/W VCR type and role. ⎯ R/W VCR Local address. ⎯ R/W VCR Remote address. ⎯ R/W VCR priority. ⎯ R/W VCR delivery features. ⎯ R/W VCR authentication. ⎯ R/W VCR Maximum Dlsdu size. 119 VCR_TYPE_AND_ROLE unsigned char 120 VCR_LOCAL_ADDR octet string ,4 121 VCR_REMOTE_ADDR octet string, 4 Invalid Normal Time Available Urgent Classical Disordered Invalid Ordered Unordered Invalid Maximal Short Source 122 VCR_PRIOTIRY unsigned char 123 VCR_DELIVERY_FEATURE S unsigned char 124 VCR_AUTHENTICATION unsigned char 125 VCR_MAX_DLSDU_SIZE unsigned int 126 VCR_VFD_ID octet string, 4 ⎯ R/W octet string, 4 ⎯ R/W octet string, 4 ⎯ R/W ⎯ R/W ⎯ R/W Selects the device object link to be analyzed or configured in the following parameters. VCR_FEATURES_SUPPORT ED_SEND VCR_FEATURES_SUPPORT 128 ED_RCV 127 129 VCR_WRITE_CMD unsigned char 130 DEV_OBJECT_LINK_SELEC T unsigned char 131 OBJECT_LINK_ID unsigned char 0 to 216 Access Ok Read Req Write Req First Next None Previous VFD associated with the selected VCR. VCR features supported for the send direction. VCR features supported for the receive direction. A write to this parameter will trigger the write for the selected VCR with the changed values. ⎯ R/W Selected object link. 16 ⎯ R/W Local index. 0 to 256 132 LNK_LOCAL_INDEX unsigned int 0 to 2 133 LNK_VCR unsigned int 0 to 216 ⎯ R/W Index of the VCR associated with the selected object link. 134 LNK_REMOTE_INDEX unsigned int 0 to 216 ⎯ R/W Remote index. unsigned char Alert Local MVC Publisher Subscriber Trend Undefined ⎯ R/W Service performed by the selected object link. 135 LNK_SERVICE 2.21 Function Block Instruction Manual Idx Parameter Data Type (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value 136 LNK_STALE_CNT unsigned char 0 to 256 ⎯ R/W 137 LNK_WRITE_CMD unsigned char Ok R/W 138 DEV_FBSTART_SELECT unsigned char ⎯ R/W Select the device FB start parameter to be analyzed or configured in the following parameters. 139 FBSTART_ID unsigned char 0 to 256 ⎯ R/W Selected FB Start. 140 FBSTART_OFFSET_ms unsigned int 0 to 216 ⎯ R/W 141 FBSTART_FB_INDEX unsigned int 0 to 216 ⎯ R/W 142 FBSTART_VFD_ID unsigned long 0 to 232 ⎯ R/W Access Ok Read Req Write Req First Next None Previous Access Ok Read Req Write Req MIB FBAP Units Store/ Mode Access Ok R/W ⎯ R/W 0 to 216 ⎯ R/W 0 to 256 ⎯ Description The maximum number of consecutive stale input value before the status is set to BAD. A write to this parameter will trigger the write for the selected object link with the changed values. Offset time from the start of each macro cycle when the function block associated with this parameter will be executed. Index of the function block associated with this parameter. VFD associated with this parameter. A write to this parameter will trigger the write for the selected FB Start parameter with the changed values. VFD to which the parameter to be read/written belongs. Index of a parameter to be read/written. Length of a parameter to be read/written. Read data or data to be written. 143 FBSTART_WRITE_CMD unsigned char 144 WR_PARAMETER_VFD unsigned char 145 RW_PARAMETER_INDEX unsigned int 146 RW_PARAMETER_LENGTH unsigned char 147 RW_PARAMETER_DATA octet string, 100 148 RW_READ_CMD unsigned char Access Ok Read Req Write Req Access Ok R/W A write to this parameter will trigger the read for the selected parameter. 149 RW_WRITE_CMD unsigned char Access Ok Read Req Write Req Access Ok R/W A write to this parameter will trigger the write for the selected parameter with the changed values in RW_PARAMETER_DATA. 150 DEV_STATISTICS_RESET unsigned char Ok Reset ⎯ R/W DEV_ST_N_LIVE_LIST_IN_O 151 UT 152 153 DEV_ST_N_PT_RETRIES DEV_ST_N_DT_RETRIES DEV_ST_N_DLPDU_TRANS MITTED DEV_ST_N_GOOD_DLPDU_ 155 RCV DEV_ST_N_PARTIAL_RCV_ 156 PDU 154 157 DEV_ST_N_FCS_FAILURES 158 DOWNLOAD_CONF_STATU S R/W R/W unsigned int 0 to 2 16 ⎯ RO unsigned int 0 to 216 ⎯ RO unsigned int 16 ⎯ RO unsigned long 0 to 232 ⎯ RO unsigned long 0 to 232 ⎯ RO unsigned long 0 to 232 ⎯ RO unsigned long 32 ⎯ RO unsigned char 0 to 2 0 to 2 Ok No data Processing No data RO Resets Device Statistics. Number of times the device get in the interface device live list. Number of pass token retries to this device. Number of data retries to this device. Device number of DLPDU transmitted. Device number of good DLPDU received. Device number of partial DLPDU received. Device number of DLPDU with wrong FCS received. Status of maintenance procedure to download a configuration to a device based on the configuration saved previously on the interface device memory. Note: Not Available. Replaced by partial download. 159 2.22 READ_CONF unsigned char Ok Run Command to read configuration and save on interface device memory. Ok R/W Note: Not Available. Replaced by partial download. Block Library Idx 160 Parameter DOWNLOAD_CONF Data Type (length) unsigned char 161 BLK_EXECUTION_TIME unsigned long 162 APPLICATION_TIME timevalue 163 164 165 FEATURES HOT_SWAP_STATE FB_LINK_STATUS bitstring unsigned char unsigned char Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store/ Mode Description Command to download the last saved configuration to a device or set of devices. Ok Run Ok 0 to 232 0 RO Block Execution Time. This parameter belongs to the block section. ⎯ R/W Adjusts the application time, in the interface device. R/W Note: Not Available. Replaced by partial download. SM Timers optimization Automatic set tag/address FB Link status monitoring Hot Swap IDShell Disable Idle Verifying Configuring Rebuilding Enables automatic procedures of the IDShell. Check notes (3). Note: Not Available. Reports the procedure status when a device is replaced or re-configured. Note: Not Available. Indicates the status of the strategy links. Disable Ok Failure Note: Not Available. DD Database Hot Swap Database MVC Configuration Active Station MVC Configuration Backup Station None Triggers special procedures of the IDShell Application. Check notes (4). 166 REBUILD 167 DD_DATABASE_STATUS unsigned char Disable Failure Building Idle Indicates the status of the database kept by the Interface Device that contains the information of data types and function block objects. 168 MVC_STATE unsigned char Disable Configuring Idle Reports the state of the machine that configures the MVC. Note: Not Available. 1:Passive 169 RED_ROLE_L Unsigned8 2:Active 3:Backup 4:Active_Not_Link _Master 7:Sync_Idle 7 E D / RO Redundancy Role for the local device Idem FUNCTION_IDS description. 8:Sync_Main 9:Sync_Backup Redundancy State for the local device 0:Not Ready 170 RED_STATE_L Unsigned8 1:Standby 2:Active 0 E D / RO Not Ready – Not ready to run. Standby – Live but not running. Active – Running the tasks. 2.23 Function Block Instruction Manual Idx Parameter Data Type (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store/ Mode 0: Not defined Synchronism Status for the local device 1: Stand Alone 0: Initial value 1: Stand alone operation 2: Synchronizing 2: Checking configuration for synchronize 3: Updating Remote 3: Transferring all the configuration to remote 4: Maintenance 5: Synchronized 171 RED_SYNC_STATUS _L Unsigned8 Description 6: WARNING: Role Conflict 0 E D / RO 4: Receiving all the configuration from remote 5: The modules are completely updated with each other 7: WARNING: Sync Cable Fail 6: The spare module has the same Role of that is running 8: WARNING: Updating Remote Fail 7: Fail on the synchronism cable 8: Fail on the updating remote 9: Warning 1 9: Future use 10: Warning 2 10: Future use 7:Sync_Idle 172 RED_ROLE_R Unsigned8 8:Sync_Main 9:Sync_Backup 7 E D / RO Idem FUNCTION_IDS description. 0:Not Ready 173 RED_STATE_R Unsigned8 1:Standby 0 E D / RO Idem RED_STATE_L description. 0: Not defined Synchronism Status for the remote device 1: Stand Alone 0: Initial value 1: Stand alone operation 2: Checking configuration for synchronize 3: Updating Remote 3: Transferring all the configuration to remote 4: Maintenance 5: Synchronized RED_SYNC_STATUS_R Unsigned8 Redundancy State for the remote device 2:Active 2: Synchronizing 174 Redundancy Role for the remote device 6: WARNING: Role Conflict 0 E D / RO 4: Receiving all the configuration from remote 5: The modules are completely updated with each other 7: WARNING: Sync Cable Fail 6: The spare module has the same Role of that is running 8: WARNING: Updating Remote Fail 7: Fail on the synchronism cable 8: Fail on the updating remote 9: Warning 1 9: Future use 10: Warning 2 10: Future use Bad conditions for the local device 175 RED_BAD_CONDITIONS_L Bitstring(2) <None> E D / RO 176 RED_BAD_CONDITIONS_R Bitstring(2) <None> E D / RO 177 RED_RESERVED1 Unsigned8 0 ~ 255 0 NA D / RW 178 RED_RESERVED2 Unsigned8 0 ~ 255 0 NA D / RW See detailed description on users manual Bad conditions for the remote device 2.24 See detailed description on users manual Reserved for future use. Reserved for future use. Block Library Idx Parameter Data Type (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store/ Mode 179 RED_MAIN_WDG Unsigned8 0 ~ 255 0 NA D / RO 180 RED_BACKUP_WDG Description Watchdog indicating communication with Main. Watchdog indicating communication with Backup. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters Unsigned8 0 ~ 255 0 NA D / RO 2.25 Function Block Instruction Manual Notes: (1) Macro cycle Equation: T M = (NE * 30 + ND * TR) * 1.2 where TM = macrocycle (ms) NE = number of external links ND = number of devices TR = 30 ms for single operation or 60 ms for redundant operation (2) Equation: T1 < T2 > T3 T3 > cycle to poll the valid address in the network. (3) SM Timers Optimization - default: enabled. IDShell will find the value of T1, T2, T3 suitable to the system. Automatic Set Tag/Address - default: enabled. IDShell will automatically set a valid address and tag to a device added to the network. IDShell will solve any collision of address and/or tag. FB Link Status Monitoring - default: disabled. IDShell monitor all function block links and indicates the status through FB_LINK_STATUS. Hot Swap - default: disabled. IDShell hold information of the function block links for all 4 ports and automatically perform the configuration of the device if Hot Swap function is enabled. (4) DD Database – the current database is created and a new database with the data types and function block object is rebuild. Hot Swap Database – IDShell build the function block link database from the information in the network. MVC Configuration - Active Station/Backup Station – IDShell re-configure the MVC to optimize the communication performance of the network. 2.26 Block Library Input Transducer Blocks LD292 / LD302 - Pressure Transducer Description The pressure transducer makes the corrected pressure sensor reading RIMARY_VALUE available to the AI block. The engineering unit and the primary value range are selected from the XD_SCALE in the AI block. The units allowed are: Pa, KPa, MPa, bar, mbar, torr, atm, psi, g/cm², kg/cm², inH20 a 4°C, inH2O a 68°F, mmH20 a 68°F, mmH20 a 4°C, ftH20 a 68°F, inHg a 0°C, mmHg a 0°C. The XD_SCALE range must be inside the sensor range in the unit selected. Note that the XD_SCALE should be used to cancel out wet-legs etc. instead of calibration. The supported mode is OOS and AUTO. As the transducer block runs together with AI block, the transducer block goes to AUTO only if the AI mode block is already in AUTO. The sensor temperature may be read from the SECONDARY_VALUE parameter. Warning messages may appear in Primary Value status or in the Block Error in certain condition as explain below. Supported Modes OOS and AUTO. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the transducer block will reflect the following causes: • Input Failure – When sensor is disconnected from main electronic board, or the pressure is higher or lower 27.5% of the sensor limit; • Out of Service – When the block is in OOS mode. Primary_Value Status The PRIMARY_VALUE status of the transducer block will reflect the following causes: • Bad::SensorFailure:NotLimited – When sensor is disconnected from main electronic board, or the pressure is higher or lower 27.5% of the sensor limit; • Uncertain::SensorConvertionNotAccurate:NotLimited – when pressure is between 27.5% of sensor limit and the sensor limit. Parameters Idx Parameter DataType (length) 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 6 BLOCK_ERR 14 PRIMARY_VALUE Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store None D Bitstring(2) None D/RO DS-65 XD_SCALE D The measured value and available to the Function Block. XD_SCALE S The High and Low range limit values, the engineering unit code and the number of digits to the right of the decimal point to be used for Primary Value. SVU D The secondary value, related to the sensor E S The engineering units to be used with SECONDARY_VALUE. OOS, AUTO OOS 15 PRIMARY_VALUE_RANGE DS-68 29 SECONDARY_VALUE DS-65 (-40) –100°C 30 SECONDARY_VALUE_UNIT Unsigned16 °C, °F, °R,K °C Description Indicates the operation Transducer Block. mode of Indicates the status associated with hardware or software in the Transducer. status Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters 2.27 Function Blocks Instruction Manual DT302 - Concentration/Density Transmitter Description The density transducer makes the corrected reading PRIMARY_VALUE available to the AI block according to configured MEASURED_TYPE. The engineering unit and the primary value range are selected from the XD_SCALE in the AI block. The units allowed are: g/cm³, Kg/m³, lb/ft³, Kg/m³, Kg/m³, degBaum, degBrix, %Plato, INPM, GL, %Soli/wt and API. The XD_SCALE range must be inside the sensor range in the unit selected. The supported mode is OOS and AUTO. As the transducer block runs together with AI block, the transducer block goes to AUTO only if the AI mode block is already in AUTO. The sensor temperature may be read from the SECONDARY_VALUE parameter. Warning messages may appear in Primary Value status or in the Block Error in certain condition as explain below. Supported Modes OOS and AUTO. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the transducer block will reflect the following causes: • Input Failure – When sensor is disconnected from main electronic board, or the pressure is higher or lower 27.5% of the sensor limit. • Out of Service – When the block is in OOS mode. Primary_Value Status The PRIMARY_VALUE status of the transducer block will reflect the following causes: • Bad::SensorFailure:NotLimited – When sensor is disconnected from main electronic board, or the pressure is higher or lower 27.5% of the sensor limit. • Uncertain::SensorConvertionNotAccurate:NotLimited – when pressure is between 27.5% of sensor limit and the sensor limit. • Uncertain::EngUnitRangeViolation:HighLimited – when the pressure is higher or lower 27.5% of sensor limit. Parameters DataType Valid Range/ (length) Options Idx Parameter 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) 13 PRIMARY_VALUE_TYPE Unsigned16 14 PRIMARY_VALUE 15 Default Value Units Store None D None D/RO None D DS-65 XD_SCALE D PRIMARY_RANGE_RANGE DS-68 XD_SCALE S 29 SECONDARY_VALUE DS-65 (-40) –100°C SVU D 30 SECONDARY_VALUE_UNIT Unsigned16 °C, °F, °R,K E S Unsigned8 g/cm³, Kg/m³, Density 20°C, Density 4°C, Baume, Brix, Plato, INPM, GL, Solid Porcentage, lb/ft³, API 77 2.28 MEASURED_TYPE OOS, AUTO Density, Pressure OOS Density °C Kg/m³ None D Description Indicates the operation mode of Transducer Block. Indicates the status associated with hardware or software in the Transducer. Defines the Transducer Block calculation type The measured value and status available to the Function Block. The High and Low range limit values, the engineering unit code and the number of digits to the right of the decimal point to be used for Primary Value. The secondary value, related to the sensor The engineering units to be used with SECONDARY_VALUE. When PRIMARY_VAL_TYPE is density the measured type allowed are: - Density (g/cm³) - Density (Kg/m³) - Relative Density 20°C (g/cm³) - Relative Density 4°C (g/cm³) - Degree Baume - Degree Brix - Degree Plato - Degree INPM - GL - Solid Porcentage - Density (lb/ft³) - API Block Library TT302 - Temperature Transducer Description The temperature transducer makes the direct corrected input or linearized temperature sensor reading PRIMARY_VALUE available to the AI block. The sensor type, the connection and the calculation type are configured at SENSOR_TYPE, SENSOR_CONNECTION and PRIMARY_VALUE_TYPE respectively. Note that when two sensor are being used (i.e. backup, differential or double) the only sensor connection available is two wires. The engineering unit and the primary value range are selected from the XD_SCALE in the AI block. The units allowed are: Ohm for resistance sensor, mV for millivoltage sensor and °C, °F, °R, K for temperature sensor. The XD_SCALE range must be inside the sensor range in the unit selected. The selection of transducer number is done in SENSOR_TRANSDUCER_NUMBER. The second transducer will exist only when the sensor connection is double two wires. In this case two sensors will generate inputs for two transducers. When the sensor works as a backup the second sensor will generate the input if the first one fails. When the sensor works as a differential, the output is the difference of the two inputs. The AI block connected to this transducer has the CHANNEL the same selection as SENSOR_TRANSDUCER_NUMBER. The supported mode is OOS and AUTO. As the transducer block runs together with AI block, the transducer block goes to AUTO only if the AI mode block is already in AUTO. The cold-junction temperature may be read from the SECONDARY_VALUE parameter. Warning messages may appear in Primary Value status or in the Block Error in certain condition as explain below. Supported Modes OOS and AUTO. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the transducer block will reflect the following causes: • Input Failure – When the sensor is broken or the sensor reading is out of limits • Out of Service – When the block is in OOS mode. Primary_Value Status The PRIMARY_VALUE status of the transducer block will reflect the following causes: Bad::SensorFailure:NotLimited – When the sensor is broken or the sensor reading is out of limits. Parameters DataType (length) Idx Parameter 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) 13 PRIMARY_VALUE_TYPE Unsigned16 Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store OOS, AUTO OOS None D None D/RO Indicates the status associated with hardware or software in theTransducer. None S The type of measurement represented by the primary value XD_SC ALE D The measured value and status available to the Function Block. ( -200) °C XD_SC ALE S The High and Low range limit values, the engineering unit code and the number of digits to the right of the decimal point to be used for Primary Value. Backup, Differential temp., Process temp. Description Indicates the operation Transducer Block. mode of Process temp. 14 PRIMARY_VALUE DS-65 850 – 15 PRIMARY_VALUE_RANGE DS-68 20 SENSOR_TYPE Unsigned16 See table below Pt 100 IEC PVU S The type of sensor. 27 SENSOR_CONNECTION Unsigned8 See table below 3 None S The number of temperature probe. 28 SECONDARY_VALUE DS-65 (-40) –100°C SVU D The secondary value, related to the sensor wires for the 2.29 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Idx Parameter DataType (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store Description 29 SECONDARY_VALUE_UNIT Unsigned16 °C, °F, °R,K °C E S The engineering units to be used with SECONDARY_VALUE. 39 SENSOR_TRANSDUCER_N UMBER Unsigned8 1,2 0 None S Select the transducer number Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters Sensor Type Class Sensor range – 2-wire (Celsius) Sensor range – Differential (Celsius) Cu 10 GE RTD -20 to 250 -270 to 270 Ni 120 DIN -50 to 270 -320 to 320 Pt 50 IEC -200 to 850 -1050 to 1050 Pt 100 IEC -200 to 850 -1050 to 1050 Pt 500 IEC -200 to 450 -650 to 650 Pt 50 JIS -200 to 600 -800 to 800 Pt 100 JIS -200 to 600 -800 to 800 0 to 100 -100 to 100 0 to 400 0 to 400 -400 to 400 0 to 2000 0 to 2000 -2000 to 2000 100 to 1800 -1700 to 1700 E NBS -100 to 1000 -1100 to 1100 J NBS -150 to 750 -900 to 900 K NBS -200 to 1350 -1550 to 1550 N NBS -100 to 1300 -1400 to 1400 R NBS 0 to 1750 -1750 to 1750 S NBS 0 to 1750 -1750 to 1750 T NBS -200 to 400 -600 to 600 L DIN -200 to 900 -1100 to 1100 U DIN -200 to 600 -800 to 800 -6 to 22 -28 to 28 -10 to 100 -10 to 100 -110 to 110 -50 to 500 -50 to 500 -550 to 550 0 to 100 B NBS -6 to 22 2.30 Ohm TC MV Block Library IF302 - Current Fieldbus Transducer Description The current fieldbus transducer makes the current input reading PRIMARY_VALUE available to the AI block. The engineering unit and the primary value range are selected from the XD_SCALE in the AI block. The only unit allowed is this case is mA. The XD_SCALE must be inside the current range (0-21 mA). When the XD_SCALE range is set to 4 and 20, this makes the transducer follow the NAMUR standard. For different values no status is issued. The selection of the input terminal for this transducer is done in TERMINAL_NUMBER. The AI block connected to this transducer has the CHANNEL the same selection as TERMINAL_NUMBER. The supported mode is OOS and AUTO. As the transducer block runs together with AI block, the transducer block goes to AUTO only if the AI mode block is already in AUTO. Warning messages may appear in Primary Value status or in the Block Error in certain condition as explain below. Supported Modes OOS and AUTO. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the transducer block will reflect the following causes: • Input Failure – When input current higher than 20.7 and XD_SCALE EU100 = 20.0 or input current lower than 3.7 and XD_SCALE EU0 = 4.0. • Out of Service – When the block is in OOS mode. Primary_Value Status The PRIMARY_VALUE status of the transducer block will reflect the following causes: • Bad::SensorFailure:NotLimited – When input current higher than 20.7 and XD_SCALE EU100 = 20.0 or input current lower than 3.7 and XD_SCALE EU0 = 4.0; • Uncertain::EngUnitRangeViolation:LowLimited – When input current between 3.7 and 3.98 and XD_SCALE EU0 = 4.0; • Uncertain::EngUnitRangeViolation:HighLimited – When input current between 20.02 and 20.7 and XD_SCALE EU100 = 20.0. Parameters Idx Parameter DataType (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 OOS, AUTO OOS None D 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) None D/RO Indicates the status associated with hardware or software in theTransducer. 14 PRIMARY_VALUE DS-65 0-21 XD_SCALE D The measured value and status available to the Function Block. 15 PRIMARY_VALUE_RANGE DS-68 0-21 4-20 mA XD_SCALE S The High and Low range limit values, the engineering unit code and the number of digits to the right of the decimal point to be used for Primary Value. 25 TERMINAL_NUMBER Unsigned8 1,2,3 0 None S Indicates the input terminal number Description Indicates the operation Transducer Block. mode of Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters 2.31 Function Blocks Instruction Manual TP302 – Position Fieldbus Transducer Description The position fieldbus transducer makes the position input reading PRIMARY_VALUE available to the AI block. The engineering unit and the primary value range are selected from the XD_SCALE in the AI block. The only unit allowed is this case is %. The AI block connected to this transducer has the CHANNEL the same selection as TERMINAL_NUMBER. The supported mode is OOS and AUTO. As the transducer block runs together with AI block, the transducer block goes to AUTO only if the AI mode block is already in AUTO. The sensor module temperature may be read from the SECONDARY_VALUE parameter. Warning messages may appear in Primary Value status or in the Block Error in certain condition as explain below. Supported Modes OOS and AUTO. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the transducer block will reflect the following causes: • Input Failure – When mechanic module is disconnected from main electronic board. • Out of Service – When the block is in OOS mode. Primary_Value Status The PRIMARY_VALUE status of the transducer block will reflect the following causes: Bad::SensorFailure:NotLimited – When mechanic module is disconnected from main electronic board. Parameters Idx Parameter DataType (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 OOS, AUTO OOS None D 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) None D/RO 14 PRIMARY_VALUE DS-65 XD_SCALE D The measured value and available to the Function Block. XD_SCALE S The High and Low range limit values, the engineering unit code and the number of digits to the right of the decimal point to be used for Primary Value. SVU D The secondary value, related to the sensor E S The engineering units to be used with SECONDARY_VALUE. 0-100 15 PRIMARY_VALUE_RANGE DS-68 0-100 % 25 SECONDARY_VALUE DS-65 (-40) –100°C 26 SECONDARY_VALUE_UNIT Unsigned16 °C, °F, °R,K 0-100 % °C Description Indicates the operation Transducer Block. of Indicates the status associated with hardware or software in the Transducer. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters 2.32 mode status Block Library TEMP – DF-45 Temperature Transducer Overview This is the transducer block for the module DF-45, an eight low signal input module for RTD, TC, mV, Ohm. Description This transducer block has parameters to configure the eight inputs of low signal, as well an individual status and value in engineering units for each input. Therefore it is enough to configure only the TEMP block if the purpose is to monitor variables. If the application is a control loop or calculation, it is also necessary to configure an AI or MAI block to address these variables. One important difference for the TEMP block, when using an AI block to access an input : write to VALUE_RANGE_x parameter is disabled. The user must configure the scale in the XD_SCALE parameter of the AI block, that will be copied to the corresponding VALUE_RANGE_x parameter. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR will reflect the following causes: • Block Configuration Error - When it is not compatible the CHANNEL parameter and HC configuration (DFI302); • Input Failure – At least one input is in failure (DFI302); • Out of Service – When the block is in O/S mode. Supported Modes O/S and AUTO. Parameters Idx Parameter DataType (length) 1 ST_REV 2 Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store / Mode Unsigned16 0 None S/RO TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 0 None S 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 0 None S 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 O/S Na S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) E D / RO 7 CHANNEL Unsigned16 None S / O/S 8 TEMP_0 DS-65 D Temperature of point 0. 9 TEMP_1 DS-65 D Temperature of point 1. 10 TEMP_2 DS-65 D Temperature of point 2. 11 TEMP_3 DS-65 D Temperature of point 3. 12 TEMP_4 DS-65 D Temperature of point 4. 13 TEMP_5 DS-65 D Temperature of point 5. 14 TEMP_6 DS-65 D Temperature of point 6. 15 TEMP_7 DS-65 D Temperature of point 7. 16 VALUE_RANGE_0 DS-68 1 to 255 0-100% VR0 S / O/S Description See Mode Parameter The rack and slot number of the associated DF-45 module coded as RRSXX. If it is connected to AI block, it is a copy of XD_SCALE. Otherwise the user may write in this scaling parameter. 2.33 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Idx Parameter DataType (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store / Mode Description 3 E S / O/S Connection of the sensor 0. Pt 100 IEC E S / O/S Type of sensor 0. 0-100% VR1 S / O/S If it is connected to AI block, it is a copy of XD_SCALE. Otherwise the user may write in this scaling parameter. 3 E S / O/S Connection of the sensor 1. Pt 100 IEC E S / O/S Type of sensor 1. 0-100% VR2 S / O/S If it is connected to AI block, it is a copy of XD_SCALE. Otherwise the user may write in this scaling parameter. 3 E S / O/S Connection of the sensor 2. Pt 100 IEC E S / O/S Type of sensor 2. 0-100% VR3 S / O/S If it is connected to AI block, it is a copy of XD_SCALE. Otherwise the user may write in this scaling parameter. 3 E S / O/S Connection of the sensor 3. Pt 100 IEC E S / O/S Type of sensor 3. 0-100% VR4 S / O/S If it is connected to AI block, it is a copy of XD_SCALE. Otherwise the user may write in this scaling parameter. 3 E S / O/S Connection of the sensor 4. Pt 100 IEC E S / O/S Type of sensor 4. 0-100% VR5 S / O/S If it is connected to AI block, it is a copy of XD_SCALE. Otherwise the user may write in this scaling parameter. 3 E S / O/S Connection of the sensor 5. Pt 100 IEC E S / O/S Type of sensor 5. 1 : differential 17 SENSOR_CONNECTION_0 Unsigned8 2 : 2-wire 3 : 3-wire 18 SENSOR_TYPE_0 Unsigned8 19 VALUE_RANGE_1 DS-68 See table below 1 : differential 2 : 2-wire 20 SENSOR_CONNECTION_1 Unsigned8 3 : 3-wire 21 SENSOR_TYPE_1 Unsigned8 22 VALUE_RANGE_2 DS-68 See table below 1 : differential 2 : 2-wire 23 SENSOR_CONNECTION_2 Unsigned8 3 : 3-wire 24 SENSOR_TYPE_2 Unsigned8 25 VALUE_RANGE_3 DS-68 See table below 1 : differential 26 SENSOR_CONNECTION_3 Unsigned8 2 : 2-wire 3 : 3-wire 27 SENSOR_TYPE_3 Unsigned8 28 VALUE_RANGE_4 DS-68 See table below 1 : differential 2 : 2-wire 29 SENSOR_CONNECTION_4 Unsigned8 3 : 3-wire 30 SENSOR_TYPE_4 Unsigned8 31 VALUE_RANGE_5 DS-68 See table below 1 : differential 2 : 2-wire 32 SENSOR_CONNECTION_5 Unsigned8 3 : 3-wire 33 2.34 SENSOR_TYPE_5 Unsigned8 See table below Block Library Idx Parameter DataType (length) 34 VALUE_RANGE_6 DS-68 Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store / Mode Description 0-100% VR6 S / O/S If it is connected to AI block, it is a copy of XD_SCALE. Otherwise the user may write in this scaling parameter. 3 E S / O/S Connection of the sensor 6. Pt 100 IEC E S / O/S Type of sensor 6. 0-100% VR7 S / O/S If it is connected to AI block, it is a copy of XD_SCALE. Otherwise the user may write in this scaling parameter. 3 E S / O/S Connection of the sensor 7. Pt 100 IEC E S / O/S Type of sensor 7. Na D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. 1 : differential 2 : 2-wire 35 SENSOR_CONNECTION_6 Unsigned8 3 : 3-wire 36 SENSOR_TYPE_6 Unsigned8 37 VALUE_RANGE_7 DS-68 See table below 1 : differential 2 : 2-wire 38 SENSOR_CONNECTION_7 Unsigned8 3 : 3-wire 39 SENSOR_TYPE_7 Unsigned8 40 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 41 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 See table below Na Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters 2.35 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Code Sensor Type Class Sensor range – Differential (Celsius) Sensor range – 2wire (Celsius) Sensor range – 3wire (Celsius) 1 Cu 10 GE RTD -270 to 270 -20 to 250 -20 to 250 2 Ni 120 DIN -320 to 320 -50 to 270 -50 to 270 3 Pt 50 IEC -1050 to 1050 -200 to 850 -200 to 850 4 Pt 100 IEC -1050 to 1050 -200 to 850 -200 to 850 5 Pt 500 IEC -270 to 270 -200 to 450 -200 to 450 6 Pt 50 JIS -850 to 850 -200 to 600 -200 to 600 7 Pt 100 JIS -800 to 800 -200 to 600 -200 to 600 51 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 52 0 to 400 0 to 400 0 to 400 53 0 to 2000 0 to 2000 0 to 2000 151 B NBS 152 Ohm TC -1600 to 1600 100 to 1800 E NBS -1100 to 1100 -100 to 1000 153 J NBS 900 to 900 -150 to 750 154 K NBS -1550 to 1550 -200 to 1350 155 N NBS -1400 to 1400 -100 to 1300 156 R NBS -1750 to 1750 0 to 1750 157 S NBS -1750 to 1750 0 to 1750 158 T NBS -600 to 600 -200 to 400 159 L DIN -1100 to 1100 -200 to 900 160 U DIN -800 to 800 -200 to 600 201 -6 to 22 202 -10 to 100 MV -10 to 100 -6 to 22 203 -50 to 500 -50 to 500 If BEHAVIOR parameter is “Adapted”: • When the configuration of sensor type means a different class, the connection is automatically changed to default (RTD and Ohm – 3-wire, TC and mV – 2-wire). 2.36 Block Library Input Function Blocks AI - Analog Input Overview The Analog Input block takes the input data from the Transducer block, selected by channel number, and makes it available to other function blocks at its output. Schematic Description The AI block is connected to the transducer block through the CHANNEL parameter that must match with the following parameter in the transducer block: • SENSOR_TRANSDUCER_NUMBER parameter for the TT302 • TERMINAL_NUMBER parameter for the IF302 The CHANNEL parameter must be set to 1 (one) if the AI block is running in the LD302, and no configuration is necessary in the transducer block to connect it to the AI block. Transducer scaling (XD_SCALE) is applied to the value from the channel to produce the FIELD_VAL in percent. The XD_SCALE engineering units code and range must be suitable to the sensor of transducer block connected to the AI block, otherwise a block alarm indicating configuration error will be generated. The L_TYPE parameter determines how the values passed by the transducer block will be used into the block. The options are: Direct - the transducer value is passed directly to the PV. Therefore OUT_SCALE is useless. Indirect - the PV value is the FIELD_VAL value converted to the OUT_SCALE. Indirect with Square Root - the PV value is square root of the FIELD_VAL converted to the OUT_SCALE. PV and OUT always have identical scaling based on OUT_SCALE. The LOW_CUT parameter is an optional characteristic that may be used to eliminate noise near zero for a flow sensor. The LOW_CUT parameter has a corresponding “Low cutoff” option in the IO_OPTS bit string. If the option bit is true, any calculated output below the low cutoff value (LOW_CUT) will be changed to zero. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the AI block will reflect the following causes: • Block Configuration Error – the configuration error occurs when one or more of the following situations occur: o When the CHANNEL or L_TYPE parameters have an invalid value; o When the XD_SCALE does not have a suitable engineering unit or range for the sensor of transducer block. o When it is not compatible the CHANNEL parameter and HC configuration (DFI302). 2.37 Function Blocks Instruction Manual • • • Simulate Active – When the Simulate is active. Input Failure – I/O module failure (DFI302) Out of Service – When the block is in O/S mode. Supported Modes O/S, MAN and AUTO. Status Handling The AI block does not support cascade path. Then, The output status has not a cascade sub-status. When the OUT value exceeds the OUT_SCALE range and no worse condition exists in the block then the OUT status will be “uncertain, EU Range Violation”. The following options from STATUS_OPTS apply, where Limited refers to the sensor limits: (see in the Function block options to more details about each option) • Propagate Fault Forward • Uncertain if Limited • BAD if Limited • Uncertain if Man mode Parameters DataType Valid Range/ (length) Options Default Value Units Store / Mode Unsigned16 0 None S/RO TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 0 None S 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 0 None S 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 O/S Na S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) E D / RO 7 PV DS-65 PV D / RO Process analog value for use in executing the function. 8 OUT DS-65 OUT D / Man The analog value calculated as a result of executing the function. D Allows the input value to be manually supplied when simulate is enabled. In this case, the simulate value and status will be the PV value. Idx Parameter 1 ST_REV 2 1 to 255 OUT_SCALE +/10% Description See Mode Parameter 1: Disable ; 2: Active 9 SIMULATE DS-82 are the Enable/Disable options. Disable The high and low scale values, to transducer for a specified channel. 10 XD_SCALE DS-68 11 OUT_SCALE DS-68 12 GRANT_DENY DS-70 Depends on the Depends on device type. See the device the manual. See type. See the corresponding description manual for details. for details. The Default value for each Smar device is showed below: XD S / Man 0-100% OUT S / Man 0 na D LD292/302: IF302: TT302: TP302: DT302: DFI302: 100,0,1342 0 to5080 [mmH2O] 4 to 20 [mA] -200 to 850 [ºC] 0 to 100 [%] 1000 to 2500 [kg / m3] 0 to 100 [%] The high and low scale values to the OUT parameter. 13 IO_OPTS Bitstring(2) See Block Options 0 na S / O/S See Block Options 14 STATUS_OPTS Bitstring(2) See Block Options 0 Na S / O/S See Block Options 15 CHANNEL Unsigned16 0 None S / O/S For more details about the configuration of this parameter, see Chapter 1 “CHANNEL Configuration”. 2.38 Block Library Idx Parameter DataType (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store / Mode 1: Direct 16 L_TYPE Unsigned8 2: Indirect Description Determines how the values passed by the transducer block may be used: 0 E S / Man Directly (Direct); with a percent (Indirect) ; or with a percent and with square root (Ind Sqr Root). 3: Indirect Square Root 17 LOW_CUT Float Non-Negative 0 OUT S A value of zero percent of scale is used in block processing if the transducer value falls below this limit, in % of scale. This feature may be used to eliminate noise near zero for a flow sensor. 18 PV_FTIME Float Non-Negative 0 Sec S Time constant of a single exponential filter for the PV, in seconds. 19 FIELD_VAL DS-65 % D / RO Raw value of the field device in percent of the PV range, with a status reflecting the Transducer condition, before signal characterization (L_TYPE) or filtering (PV_FTIME). 20 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 Na D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. Na D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. Na S The current alert status, unacknowledged states, unreported states, and disabled states of the alarms associated with the function block. 0 Na S Selection of whether alarms associated with the block will be automatically acknowledged 0.5% % S Alarm hysteresis parameter. In order to clear the alarm the amount the PV must return within the alarm limit plus hysteresis. S Priority of the high high alarm. S The setting for high high alarm in engineering units. S Priority of the high alarm. S The setting for high alarm in engineering units. S Priority of the low alarm. S The setting for low alarm in engineering units. S Priority of the low low alarm. OUT S The setting for low low alarm in engineering units. 21 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 22 ALARM_SUM DS-74 See Block Options 0: Auto ACK Disable 23 ACK_OPTION Bitstring(2) 1: Auto ACK Enable 24 ALARM_HYS Float 0 to 50 % 25 HI_HI_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 26 HI_HI_LIM Float OUT_SCALE, +INF 27 HI_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 28 HI_LIM Float OUT_SCALE, +INF 29 LO_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 30 LO_LIM Float OUT_SCALE, -INF 31 LO_LO_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 32 LO_LO_LIM Float OUT_SCALE, -INF 33 HI_HI_ALM DS-71 OUT D The status for high high alarm and its associated time stamp. 34 HI_ALM DS-71 OUT D The status for high alarm and its associated time stamp. 35 LO_ALM DS-71 OUT D The status for low alarm and its associated time stamp. 36 LO_LO_ALM DS-71 OUT D The status for low low alarm and its associated time stamp. +INF +INF -INF -INF OUT OUT OUT 2.39 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters If BEHAVIOR parameter is “Adapted”: The default value of CHANNEL is the lowest available number. The default value of L_TYPE is direct. The required mode for writing is the actual mode, regardless the target mode : OUT 2.40 Block Library DI - Discrete Input Overview The DI block takes the manufacturer’s discrete input data, selected by channel number, and makes it available to other function blocks at its output. Schematic Description The FIELD_VAL_D shows the true on/off state of the hardware, using XD_STATE. The Invert I/O option can be used to do a BooleanNOT function between the field value and the output. A discrete value of zero(0) will be considered to be a logical zero(0) and an non-zerodiscrete value will be considered to be a logical (1) e.g. if invert is selected, the logical NOT of a non-zero field value would result in azero(0) discrete output, the logical NOT of a zero field value would result in a discrete output vlaue of one(1). PV_FTIME may be used to set the time that the hardware must be in one state before it gets passed to the PV_D. The PV_D is always the value that the block willplace in OUT_D if the mode is Auto. If Man is allowed, someone may write a value to OUT_D. The PV_D and the OUT_D always have identical scaling. OUT_STATE provides scaling for PV_D. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the DI block will reflect the following causes: • Block Configuration Error – the configuration error occurs when one or more of the following situations occur: o When the CHANNEL parameter has an invalid value; o When it is not compatible the CHANNEL parameter and HC configuration (DFI302). • Simulate Active – When the Simulate is active; • Input Failure – I/O module failure (DFI302); • Out of Service – When the block is in O/S mode. Supported Modes O/S, Man, and Auto. Status Handling The DI block does not support cascade path. Then, the output status has not a cascade sub-status. The following options from STATUS_OPTS apply: Propagate Fault Forward 2.41 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Idx Parameter Parameters DataType Valid Range/ (length) Default Options Units Store/ Mode Value Description 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 0 None S/RO 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 0 None S 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 0 None S 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 O/S Na S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) E D / RO 7 PV_D DS-66 PV D / RO The primary discrete value for use in executing the function, or a process value associated with it. 8 OUT_D DS-66 OUT D / Man The primary discrete value calculated as a result of executing the function. D Allows the transducer discrete input or output to the block to be manually supplied when simulate is enabled. When simulation is disabled, the simulate value and status track the actual value and status. 1 to 255 OUT_STATE 1: Disable ; 2: Active SIMULATE_D 9 DS-83 Disable are the Enable/Disable options. See Mode Parameter 10 XD_STATE Unsigned16 0 XD S Index to the text describing the states of a discrete for the value obtained from the transducer. 11 OUT_STATE Unsigned16 0 OUT S Index to the text describing the states of a discrete output. 12 GRANT_DENY DS-70 0 na D 0 na S / O/S See Block Options 0 Na S / O/S See Block Options 0 None S / O/S For more details about the configuration of this parameter, see Chapter 1 “CHANNEL Configuration”. 0 Sec S Time constant of a single exponential filter for the PV, in seconds. 13 IO_OPTS Bitstring(2) See Block Options 14 STATUS_OPTS Bitstring(2) See Block Options 15 CHANNEL Unsigned16 16 PV_FTIME Float 17 FIELD_VAL_D DS-66 On/Off 18 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 Na 19 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 20 ALARM_SUM DS-74 2.42 Non-Negative See Block Options D / RO Raw value of the field device discrete input, with a status reflecting the Transducer condition. D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. Na D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. Na S The current alert status, unacknowledged states, unreported states, and disabled states of the alarms associated with the function block. Block Library Idx 21 Parameter ACK_OPTION DataType Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Bitstring(2) 0: Auto ACK Disable 0 Units Na Store/ Mode Selection of whether alarms associated with the block will be automatically acknowledged S 1: Auto ACK Enable 22 DISC_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 0 23 DISC_LIM Unsigned8 PV_STATE 0 24 DISC_ALM DS-72 Description S Priority of the discrete alarm. PV S State of discrete input which will generate an alarm. PV D The status and time stamp associated with the discrete alarm. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters 2.43 Function Blocks Instruction Manual MAI - Multiple Analog Input Description The MAI block makes available for the FF network eight analog variables of the I/O subsystem through its eight output parameters OUT_1 through OUT_8. Status indication in the output parameters OUT_x depends on the I/O subsystem and the transducer block, that is manufacturer specific. For example, if there is individual detection of sensor failure, it will be indicated in the status of related OUT_x parameter. Problem in the interface to the I/O subsystem will be indicated in the status of all OUT_x as BAD – Device Failure. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the MAI block will reflect the following causes: • Other – the number of MDI, MDO, MAI and MAO blocks or the device tag in FB700 is different from LC700; • Block Configuration Error – the configuration error occurs when the OCURRENCE/CHANNEL has an invalid value (FB700) or it is not compatible the CHANNEL parameter and HC configuration (DFI302); • Input failure – the CPU of LC700 stopped working (FB700) or I/O module failure (DFI302); • Power up – there is no CPU of LC700 in the rack or the hardware configuration of LC700 has an error; • Out of Service – When the block is in O/S mode. Status Handling The status of OUT_x will be the following if the BLOCK_ERR indicates: • Other – Bad : Configuration Error • Input failure – Bad : Device Failure • Power up – Bad : Device Failure Supported Modes O/S, MAN and AUTO. Schematic 2.44 Block Library Idx Parameter Parameters DataType Valid Range/ (length) Options Default Value Units Store / Mode 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 0 None S/RO 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 0 None S 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 0 None S 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 O/S Na S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) E D / RO 1 to 255 / Unsigned16 0 None See Mode Parameter S / O/S For more details about the configuration of this parameter, see Chapter 1 “CHANNEL Configuration”. It defines the transducer to be used going to or from the physical world. It addresses a group of eight points. OCCURRENCE 7 Description CHANNEL 8 OUT_1 DS-65 D / Man Numbered analog input 1. 9 OUT_2 DS-65 D / Man Numbered analog input 2. 10 OUT_3 DS-65 D / Man Numbered analog input 3. 11 OUT_4 DS-65 D / Man Numbered analog input 4. 12 OUT_5 DS-65 D / Man Numbered analog input 5. 13 OUT_6 DS-65 D / Man Numbered analog input 6. 14 OUT_7 DS-65 D / Man Numbered analog input 7. 15 OUT_8 DS-65 D / Man Numbered analog input 8. 16 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 Na D 17 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 Na D Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters If BEHAVIOR parameter is “Adapted”: The default value of OCCURRENCE is the number of MAI blocks instantiated for the FB700. The required mode for writing is the actual mode, regardless the target mode : OUT_1, OUT_2, …, OUT_8. Device type Description FB700 Block has OCCURRENCE parameter DFI302 Block has CHANNEL parameter 2.45 Function Blocks Instruction Manual MDI - Multiple Discrete Input Description The MDI block makes available for the FF network eight discrete variables of the I/O subsystem through its eight output parameters OUT_D1 through OUT_D8. Status indication in the output parameters OUT_Dx depends on the I/O subsystem and the transducer block, that is manufacturer specific. For example, if there is individual detection of sensor failure, it will be indicated in the status of related OUT_Dx parameter. Problem in the interface to the I/O subsystem will be indicated in the status of all OUT_Dx as BAD – Device Failure. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the MDI block will reflect the following causes: • Other – the number of MDI, MDO, MAI and MAO blocks or the device tag in FB700 is different from LC700; • Block Configuration Error – the configuration error occurs when the OCCURRENCE has an invalid value (FB700) or it is not compatible the CHANNEL parameter and HC configuration (DFI302); • Input failure – the CPU of LC700 stopped working (FB700) or I/O module failure (DFI302); • Power up – there is no CPU of LC700 in the rack or the hardware configuration of LC700 has an error; • Out of Service – When the block is in O/S mode. Status Handling The status of OUT_Dx will be the following if the BLOCK_ERR indicates: • Other – Bad : Configuration Error • Input failure – Bad : Device Failure • Power up – Bad : Device Failure Supported Modes O/S, MAN and AUTO. Schematic 2.46 Block Library Parameters DataType Valid Range/ (length) Options Default Value Units Store / Mode Unsigned16 0 None S/RO TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 0 None S 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 0 None S 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 O/S Na S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) E D / RO Idx Parameter 1 ST_REV 2 1 to 255 OCCURRENCE 7 / Unsigned16 0 None S / O/S CHANNEL Description See Mode Parameter For more details about the configuration of this parameter, see Chapter 1 “CHANNEL Configuration”. It defines the transducer to be used going to or from the physical world. It addresses a group of eight points. 8 OUT_D1 DS-66 D / Man Numbered discrete input 1. 9 OUT_D2 DS-66 D / Man Numbered discrete input 2. 10 OUT_D3 DS-66 D / Man Numbered discrete input 3. 11 OUT_D4 DS-66 D / Man Numbered discrete input 4. 12 OUT_D5 DS-66 D / Man Numbered discrete input 5. 13 OUT_D6 DS-66 D / Man Numbered discrete input 6. 14 OUT_D7 DS-66 D / Man Numbered discrete input 7. 15 OUT_D8 DS-66 D / Man Numbered discrete input 8. 16 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 Na D 17 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 Na D Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static If BEHAVIOR parameter is “Adapted”: The default value of OCCURRENCE is the number of MAI blocks instantiated for the FB700. Device type FB700 DFI302 AND DC302 Description Block has OCCURRENCE parameter Block has CHANNEL parameter 2.47 Function Blocks Instruction Manual PUL – Pulse Input Overview The Pulse Input Block provides analog values based on a pulse (counter) transducer input. There are two primary outputs available. An accumulation output is intended to be connected to an integrator block for differencing, conversion, and integration. This is most useful when the count rate is low relative to the block execution rate. For high count rates, the accumulated count of pulses per block execution can be interpreted as an analog rate (vs. accumulation) value and can be alarmed. (Alarm conditions include high, high-high, low, and low-low alarms.) pulse input OUT OUT_ACCUM Schematic Description OUT is a connectable bipolar (signed) analog value output of the PI block. It is determined by taking the number of counts accumulated since the last execution of the block, multiplying by the value of each pulse (PULSE_VAL), dividing by the block's execution rate in seconds, converting to units/minute, units/hour, or units/day in accordance with the TIME_UNITS enumeration, and filtering using PV_FTIME. PV_FTIME is the time constant for a filter. Alarming is performed on this filtered value. Reverse flow may be detected from the transducer and indicated via a negative value of OUT. Pre-filtered value = (change_in_counts * PULSE_VAL / exec_period) * time_unit_factor Where, CHANGE_IN_COUNTS is the number of counts received since last execution PULSE_VAL is the value in engineering units of each pulse EXEC_PERIOD is the execution period of the block in seconds Time_Unit_Factor is 1 sec/sec, 60 sec/min, 3600 sec/hour, or 86400 sec/day, per the TIME_UNITS index. 2.48 Block Library For example, 70 pulse counts are received by the transducer in the 0.5 second execution period of the PI block. The metering device manufacturer specifies that each pulse represents 0.1 gallons of flow. The user wants the flow rate expressed in "gallons per minute". PULSE_VAL should be set to 0.1. TIME_UNITS should be set to "units/minute". The related time_unit_factor will be "60 sec/min". Using the above equation, the pre-filtered rate value will then be computed as: ((70 pulses * 0.1 gallons/pulse) / 0.5 sec) * 60 sec/min = (7.0 gallons/ 0.5 sec) * 60 sec/min = (14.0 gallons/sec) * 60 sec/min = 840 gallons/min OUT_ACCUM is a connectable float output of the PI block. It is intended to be connected to the Integrator block for totalization, so it only accumulates enough to avoid rollover between executions of the Integrator block. It represents a continuous accumulation of counts from the transducer, limited to the range of values from 0 to 999,999. It can count either up or down. An increment of the accumulation 999,999 by 1 will result in the accumulation 0 and a decrement of the accumulation 0 by 1 will result in the accumulation 999,999. A maximum change to the accumulation of ±499,999 counts is permitted to be reflected in OUT_ACCUM in a single execution of the block. If a change of counts greater in magnitude than 499,999 occurs at the transducer: • The change in OUT_ACCUM is limited to 499,999 of the proper sign, • The OUT_ACCUM status's quality is set to uncertain, • The OUT_ACCUM status's sub-status is set to "Engr. Units Range Violation", • The OUT_ACCUM status's limits = low (if negative) or limits = high (if positive) indicator is set • A BLOCK_ALM must be issued. CHANNEL is used to associate the block with the hardware that is connected to this block. It defines the transducer to be used coming from the physical world. Supported Modes O/S, Manual and Auto modes are supported. Mode Handling Manual mode "disconnects" the input from the output and permits manual substitution of the value. OUT is the alarmed value and the value which normally would be substituted, but OUT_ACCUM may also be substituted. On transition from Manual to Auto, the PV filter will be initialized to the value of OUT, and the accumulated total will be set to the value of OUT_ACCUM. Status Handling This block has no inputs from other blocks and therefore does not react to status of other blocks. Both the OUT and the OUT_ACCUM outputs have status and will reflect the status of the transducer (e.g. hardware failure) and the mode of the block (e.g., out-of-service, manual, etc.) using the conventional rules of status. An unusable status (bad) for OUT will cause the alarm processing to be suspended. Current alarms will not be cleared and new alarms will not be generated until the status returns to a usable status. Simulation The SIMULATE_P parameter is provided to simulate pulse input as a rate in pulses/second, rather than the actual transducer value. The value entered in the SIMULATE_P record is considered to be the signed change in accumulation per second. The quality of the status entered is passed to the status of OUT and OUT_ACCUM. 2.49 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Parameters DataType Valid Range/ (length) Options Default Value Units Store / Mode Unsigned16 0 None S/RO TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 0 None S 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 0 None S 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 O/S Na S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) E D / RO 7 PV DS-65 PV D / RO Process analog value for use in executing the function. 8 OUT DS-65 OUT D / Man The analog value calculated as a result of executing the function. N / Man This parameter is the number of counts accumulated in an on-going basis. It is not normally reset except that it wraps around to zero after reaching 999,999 counts. The value is based on the transducer input in Auto mode and is the last transducer value of the value specified by the operator/engineer in Man mode. (Its meaning is most useful when the number of counts received between executions of the block is small.) It is intended to be connected to the counter input of an integrator block. The OUT_ACCUM value may increase or decrease by a maximum of 499,999 counts per execution. D Allows the transducer input to the Pulse Input block to be manually supplied when simulate is enabled. When simulation is disabled, the simulate value and status track the actual value and status. The value is the rate of change of the transducer count in counts per second, not the accumulation. Idx Parameter 1 ST_REV 2 9 OUT_ACCUM 1 to 255 OUT_SCALE +/- 10% DS-65 None 1: Disable ; 2: Active SIMULATE_P 10 11 DS-82 PULSE_VAL are the Enable/Disable options. Float Disable Description See Mode Parameter Value of each metered pulse in engineering units. Used only to calculate PV and OUT. Not used for OUT_ACCUM calculation. 0 None 0 E S 1: seconds 2: minutes 12 TIME_UNITS Unsigned8 3: hours 4: days Time units factor to be used in the conversion of the output. 5: [day[hr:[min[:sec]]]] The high and low scale values to the OUT parameter. 13 OUT_SCALE DS-68 0-100% OUT S / Man 14 GRANT_DENY DS-70 0 na D 15 IO_OPTS Bitstring(2) See Block Options 0 na S / O/S See Block Options 16 STATUS_OPTS Bitstring(2) See Block Options 0 Na S / O/S See Block Options 17 CHANNEL Unsigned16 0 None S / O/S For more details about the configuration of this parameter, see Chapter 1 “CHANNEL Configuration”. 18 PV_FTIME Float 0 Sec S 2.50 Non-Negative Time constant of a single exponential filter for the PV, in seconds. Block Library Idx Parameter DataType (length) 19 FIELD_VAL 20 UPDATE_EVT Units Store / Mode DS-65 % D / RO DS-73 Na D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. Na D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. Na S The current alert status, unacknowledged states, unreported states, and disabled states of the alarms associated with the function block. 0 Na S Selection of whether alarms associated with the block will be automatically acknowledged 0.5% % S Alarm hysteresis parameter. In order to clear the alarm the amount the PV must return within the alarm limit plus hysteresis (percentage of OUT_SCALE). S Priority of the high high alarm. S The setting for high high alarm in engineering units. S Priority of the high alarm. S The setting for high alarm in engineering units. S Priority of the low alarm. S The setting for low alarm in engineering units. S Priority of the low low alarm. OUT S The setting for low low alarm in engineering units. 21 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 22 ALARM_SUM DS-74 Valid Range/ Options Default Value See Block Options 0: Auto ACK Disable 23 ACK_OPTION Bitstring(2) 1: Auto ACK Enable Description Raw value of the field device with a status reflecting the Transducer condition, before filtering (PV_FTIME). 24 ALARM_HYS Float 0 to 50 % 25 HI_HI_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 26 HI_HI_LIM Float OUT_SCALE, +INF 27 HI_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 28 HI_LIM Float OUT_SCALE, +INF 29 LO_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 30 LO_LIM Float OUT_SCALE, INF 31 LO_LO_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 32 LO_LO_LIM Float OUT_SCALE, INF 33 HI_HI_ALM DS-71 OUT D The status for high high alarm and its associated time stamp. 34 HI_ALM DS-71 OUT D The status for high alarm and its associated time stamp. 35 LO_ALM DS-71 OUT D The status for low alarm and its associated time stamp. 36 LO_LO_ALM DS-71 OUT D The status for low low alarm and its associated time stamp. +INF +INF -INF -INF OUT OUT OUT Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters If BEHAVIOR parameter is “Adapted”: The default value of CHANNEL is the lowest available number. The required mode for writing is the actual mode, regardless the target mode : OUT 2.51 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Control and Calculation Function Blocks PID/EPID - PID Control/Enhanced PID Control Overview The PID block offers a lot of control algorithms that use the Proportional, integral and derivative terms. Schematic Description The algorithm of the PID is the non-iterative or ISA. In this algorithm, the GAIN is applied to all terms of the PID, and the Proportional and the Integral actuate over the error, and the derivative actuates over the PV value. Therefore user changes of SP will not cause bump in the output due to the derivative term when the block is in Auto. As long as an error exists, the PID function will integrate the error, which moves the output in a direction to correct the error. PID blocks may be cascaded when the difference in process time constants of a primary and secondary process measurement makes it necessary or desirable. See the PV calculation and SP calculation section for details. Direct and Reverse Acting It is possible to choose the direct or reverse action of control that is made through the “Direct Acting” bit in the CONTROL_OPTS parameter: • • If the “Direct acting” bit is true then the error is obtained subtracting the SP from the PV: Error = (PV – SP) If the “Direct acting” bit is false (clear), the choice is “Reverse acting” then the error is obtained subtracting the PV from the SP: Error = (SP – PV) The Default value of the “Direct acting” bit is false, it means “reverse action”. 2.52 Block Library Feedforward Control The PID block supports the feedforward algorithm. The FF_VAL input is supplied by an external value, which is proportional to some disturbance in the control loop. The value is converted to output scale using the FF_SCALE and OUT_SCALE parameters. This value is multiplied by the FF_GAIN and added to the output of the PID algorithm. If the status of FF_VAL is Bad, the last usable value will be used. When the status returns to good, the difference of FF_VAL values will be subtracted from BIAS_A/M in order to avoid bump in the output. PID Constants GAIN (Kp), RESET (Tr), and RATE (Td) are the tuning constants for the P, I and D terms, respectively. Gain is a dimensionless number. RESET and RATE are time constants expressed in seconds. There are existing controllers that are tuned by the inverse value of some or all of them, such as proportional band and repeats per minute. The human interface to these parameters should be able to display the user’s preference. Bypass When bypass is active the SP value will be transferred to the OUT without the calculation of PID terms. Bypass is used in secondary cascade controller when the PV is bad. Conditions to turn the Bypass on: The “Bypass Enable” bit in the CONTROL_OPTS must be true. BYPASS parameter is changed to ON. The BYPASS parameter is the ON/OFF switch that activates the bypass. By default, it can be changed only when the block mode is Man or O/S. Optionally, when the “Change of Bypass in an automatic mode” bit in the FEATURES_SEL parameter in Resource block is true, then the block permits that the BYPASS switch changes in automatic modes too. There is special treatment when the Bypass parameter changes ON/OFF in order to avoid bump in the output. When the bypass is switched to ON, the SP receives the OUT value in percent of the OUT_SCALE. And when the bypass is switched to OFF, the SP receives the PV value. Transition in BYPASS Action OFF -> ON OUT -> SP with scaling conversion ON -> OFF PV -> SP Below, there is an example of the bypass in the PID block working as a PID slave in cascade control. Step 1 – the status of IN is bad, therefore the actual mode of PID is Man Step 2 - the target mode is changed to Man in order to write BYPASS Step 3 – the user sets BYPASS to ON, and OUT is transferred to SP with scaling conversion Step 4 – the user changes the target mode to Cas Step 5 – the PID block reaches the Cas mode, despite of IN.Status. Step 7 – the status of IN becomes good Step 8 - the target mode is changed to Man in order to write BYPASS Step 9 – the user sets BYPASS to OFF, and PV is transferred to SP 2.53 Function Blocks Instruction Manual CONTROL_OPTS = “Bypass Enable” Steps 1 Target Cas Bypass Off IN Bad 2 3 Man 4 5 6 7 Cas 8 Man On Bad Bad 9 10 11 Cas Off Bad Bad GNC GNC GNC GNC GNC 80 80 80 80 80 Bad GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC 50 50 20 20 20 20 20 20 80 80 80 Man Man Man Man Cas Cas Cas Man Man Man Cas NI NI NI IR GC GC GC NI NI IR GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC GC 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 SP Actual BKCAL_OUT OUT Legend: GNC-Good Non Cascade status; GC-Good Cascade status Output Tracking The PID block supports the output track algorithm, which allows the output to be forced to a tracking value when the tracking switch is on. In order to activate the output tracking, the block should attend the following conditions: • The “Track Enable” bit in the CONTROL_OPTS must be true. • The target mode is an “automatic” mode (Auto, Cas and Rcas) or Rout. • The TRK_VAL and TRK_IN_D status are usable, it means that the status is good or uncertain with the STATUS_OPTS.”Use Uncertain as good” bit true. • The TRK_IN_D value is active. If the target mode is Man, it is necessary besides the above conditions: • The “Track in Manual” bit in CONTROL_OPTS must be true; • When the output tracking is active, the output OUT will be replaced by the TRK_VAL converted to OUT_SCALE. The output limit status becomes constant and the actual mode goes to LO; • If the TRK_IN_D or TRK_VAL status is unusable, the Output tracking will be off and the PID will return to the normal operation. Additional features for the Enhanced PID block (EPID) The EPID function block provides the following additional features: 1- Different type of transfer from a “manual” mode to an “automatic” mode. The BUMPLESS_TYPE parameter provides four types of transfer from a “manual” mode to an “automatic” mode: a.bumpless : This is the default value and the behavior of the standard PID block. The block starts to calculate from the last value in the “manual “ mode. b.Last + proportional: The block starts to calculate from the last value in the “manual “ mode plus the proportional term c. Bias: The block starts to calculate from the BIAS parameter. d. Bias + proportional: The block starts to calculate from the BIAS parameter plus the proportional term. 2.54 Block Library MANUAL AUTOM. MANUAL AUTOM. 50 SP 50 SP 40 PV 40 PV t t OUT OUT 50 50 20 t t a) BUMPLESS_TYPE = "BUMPLESS" c) BUMPLESS_TYPE = "BIAS"; BIAS = 20 OUT OUT 60 50 50 t b) BUMPLESS_TYPE = "LAST + PROPORCIONAL" 30 t d) BUMPLESS_TYPE = "BIAS + PROPORCIONAL"; BIAS = 20 2-.Special treatment to Output Tracking Special treatment is made when the output tracking is enabled: The algorithm generates an IFS status in the output in the following situations: • When TRK_IN_D has an unusable status and the “IFS if Bad TRK_IN_D” bit in PID_OPTS is true. • When TRK_VAL has an unusable status and the “IFS if Bad TRK_VAL” bit in PID_OPTS is true. The mode is changed to Man when the tracking inputs are not usable in the following ways: • When the TRK_IN_D is not usable and the “Man if Bad TRK_IN_D” bit in PID_OPTS is true then the mode will be Man and the OUT will be the last value. Optionally, if the “target to Man if Bad TRK_IN_D” bit in the PID_OPTS is true, then the target mode will be changed to Man too. • When the TRK_VAL is not usable and the “Man if Bad TRK_VAL” bit in PID_OPTS is true, then the mode will be Man and the OUT will be the last usable value. Optionally, if the “target to Man if Bad TRK_VAL” bit in the PID_OPTS is true, then the target mode will be changed to Man too. Optionally, the target mode of the output block will be changed to Manual by the block algorithm when the “tracking” is active. To set this feature, the “Target to Man if tracking active” bit in the PID_OPTS parameter needs to be true. 2.55 Function Blocks Instruction Manual The required actions are summarized in the following table: Situation PID_OPTS Mode Target 0x00 Actual “auto” Algorithm Action . Output tracking is not active. . The algorithm continues the normal calculation. . Output tracking is not active. “auto” -> Iman IFS if Bad TRK_IN_D . The algorithm continues the normal calculation. . OUT.Status is GoodC-IFS. . When the output block goes to fault state, the upper blocks go to Iman. TRK_IN_D is not usable Man if Bad TRK_IN_D “Target to Man if Bad TRK_IN_D” ; “Man if Bad TRK_IN_D” Man Man 0x00 Man “auto” . Output tracking is not active. . The algorithm stops the calculation. . Output tracking is not active. The target mode is changed to Man. . Output tracking is not active. . The algorithm continues the normal calculation. . Output tracking is not active. “auto” -> Iman IFS if Bad TRK_VAL . The algorithm continues the normal calculation. OUT.Status is GoodC-IFS. . When the output block goes to fault state, the upper blocks go to Iman. TRK_VAL is not usable Man if Bad TRK_VAL “Target to Man if Bad TRK_VAL” ; “Man if Bad TRK_VAL” TRK_IN_D and TRK_VAL is usable, TRK_IN_D is active, output tracking is enabled Man Man . Output tracking is not active. . The algorithm stops the calculation. Man . Output tracking is not active. the target mode is changed to Man. LO Output Tracking is active. If the additional parameters of EPID block is configured with the default values, the block works as the standard PID block. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the PID block will reflect the following causes: • Block Configuration Error – the configuration error occurs when the BYPASS and SHED_OPT parameters have an invalid value; • Out of Service – it occurs when the block is in O/S mode. Supported Modes O/S,IMAN, LO, MAN, AUTO, CAS, RCAS and ROUT. Control Algorithm E RATE ∗ S ⎡ ⎤ OUT = GAIN ∗ ⎢ E + ∗ PV + + BIAS _ A / M + FEEDFORWARD RESET ∗ S ⎥⎦ 1 + α ∗ RATE ∗ S ⎣ NOTE: c BIAS_A/M: Internal BIAS Calculated on changing to automatic modes (RCAS, CAS, AUTO). • α: Pseudo - Derivative Gain Equals to 0.13 2.56 Block Library Parameters Data Type Valid Range/ (length) Options Default Value Units Store / Mode Unsigned16 0 None S/RO TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S STRATEGY Unsigned16 0 None S ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 0 None S O/S Idx Parameter 1 ST_REV 2 3 4 1 to 255 Description 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 Na S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) E D / RO 7 PV DS-65 PV D / RO Process analog value. This is the IN value after pass over the PV filter. 8 SP DS-65 PV_SCALE +/10% PV N / Auto The analog set point. Can be set manually, automatically through the interface device or another field device. 9 OUT DS-65 OUT_SCALE +/10% OUT N / Man The output value result of the PID calculation. 10 PV_SCALE DS-68 0-100% PV S / Man The high and low scale values to the PV and SP parameter. 11 OUT_SCALE DS-68 0-100% OUT S / Man The high and low scale values to the OUT parameter. See Mode Parameter 0 na D Options for controlling access of host computer and local control panels to operating, tuning and alarm parameters of the block. See Block Options 0 na S / O/S See Block Options See Block Options 0 Na S / O/S See Block Options PV D The primary input value of the block, or PV value. 0 Sec S Time constant of a single exponential filter for the PV, in seconds. 0 E S / Man When bypass is set, the setpoint value (in percent) will be directly transferred to the output. D This parameter is the remote setpoint value, which must come from another Fieldbus block, or a DCS block through a defined link. PV/Sec S Ramp rate at which upward setpoint changes in PV units per second. It is disable if is zero or +INF. Rate limiting will apply only in AUTO mode. +INF PV/Sec S Ramp rate at which downward setpoint changes in PV units per second. It is disable if is zero or +INF. Rate limiting will apply only in AUTO mode. PV_SCALE +/10% 100 PV S The setpoint high limit is the highest setpoint operator entry that can be used for the block. PV_SCALE +/10% 0 PV S The setpoint low limit is the lowest setpoint operator entry that can be used for the block. 0 None S Proportional term of the PID. It is the Kp value. sec S Integral term of the PID. It is the Tr value. 12 GRANT_DENY DS-70 13 CONTROL_OPTS Bitstring(2) 14 STATUS_OPTS Bitstring(2) 15 IN DS-65 16 PV_FTIME Float 17 BYPASS Unsigned8 18 CAS_IN DS-65 19 SP_RATE_DN Float Positive +INF 20 SP_RATE_UP Float Positive 21 SP_HI_LIM Float 22 SP_LO_LIM Float 23 GAIN Float 24 RESET Float Non-Negative 1:Off 2:On Positive +INF This specifies the time for the internal working value of bias or ratio to return to the operator set bias or ratio, in seconds. 25 BAL_TIME Float Positive 0 sec S In the PID block, it may be used to specify the time constant at which the integral term will move to obtain balance when the output is limited and the mode is Auto, Cas, or Rcas. 2.57 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Idx Parameter Data Type (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store / Mode 26 RATE Float Positive 0 sec S Derivative term of the PID. It is the Td value. 27 BKCAL_IN DS-65 OUT N The value and status from a lower block's BKCAL_OUT that is used to prevent reset windup and to initialize the control loop. 28 OUT_HI_LIM Float 100 OUT S Limits the maximum output value. 29 OUT_LO_LIM Float 0 OUT S Limits the minimum output value. 30 BKCAL_HYS Float 0.5% % S 31 BKCAL_OUT DS-65 PV D / RO 32 RCAS_IN DS-65 PV D 33 ROUT_IN DS-65 OUT D OUT_SCALE +/10% OUT_SCALE +/10% 0 to 50% 1: NormalShed, NormalReturn 2: NormalShed, NoReturn 3: ShedToAuto, NormalReturn 4: ShedToAuto, NoReturn 5: ShedToMan, NormalReturn 6: ShedToMan, NoReturn 7: ShedToRetainedT arget, NormalReturn 8: ShedToRetainedT arget, NoReturn 34 SHED_OPT Unsigned8 35 RCAS_OUT DS-65 PV D / RO 36 ROUT_OUT DS-65 OUT D / RO 37 TRK_SCALE DS-68 TRK S / Man 38 TRK_IN_D DS-66 On/Off D 39 TRK_VAL DS-65 TRK D 40 FF_VAL DS-65 FF D 41 FF_SCALE DS-68 0-100% FF S 42 FF_GAIN Float 0 none S/Man 43 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 Na D 2.58 0 0-100% S Description The amount that the output must change away from its output limit before the limit status is turned off, expressed as a percent of the span of the output. The value and status required by an upper block’s BKCAL_IN so that the upper block may prevent reset windup and provide bumpless transfer to closed loop control. Target setpoint and status provided by a supervisory Host to a analog control or output block. Target output and status provided by a Host to the control block for use as the output (Rout mode). Defines action to be taken on remote control device timeout. Block setpoint and status after ramping provided to a supervisory Host for back calculation and to allow action to be taken under limiting conditions or mode change. Block output and status - provided to a Host for back calculation in ROut mode and to allow action to be taken under limited conditions or mode change The high and low scale values, engineering units code, and number of digits to the right of the decimal point, associated with TRK_VAL. This discrete input is used to initiate external tracking of the block output to the value specified by TRK_VAL. This input is used as the track value when external tracking is enabled by TRK_IN_D. The feed forward value and status. The feedforward input high and low scale values, engineering units code, and number of digits to the right of the decimal point. The gain that the feed forward input is multiplied by before it is added to the calculated control output. This alert is generated by any change to the static data. Block Library Idx Parameter Data Type (length) Valid Range/ Options 44 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 45 ALARM_SUM DS-74 See Block Options 46 ACK_OPTION Bitstring(2) 0: Auto ACK Disable 1: Auto ACK Enable 47 ALARM_HYS Float 48 HI_HI_PRI 49 50 Default Value Units Store / Mode Na D Na S 0 Na S 0 to 50 % 0.5% % S Unsigned8 0 to 15 0 HI_HI_LIM Float PV_SCALE, +INF +INF HI_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 0 51 HI_LIM Float PV_SCALE, +INF +INF PV S 52 53 54 LO_PRI LO_LIM LO_LO_PRI Unsigned8 Float Unsigned8 0 to 15 PV_SCALE, +INF 0 to 15 0 -INF 0 PV S S S 55 LO_LO_LIM Float PV_SCALE, +INF -INF PV S 56 DV_HI_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 0 57 DV_HI_LIM Float 0 to PV span, +INF +INF 58 DV_LO_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 0 59 DV_LO_LIM Float -INF, -PV span to 0 -INF 60 HI_HI_ALM 61 S PV S S S PV S S PV S DS-71 PV D HI_ALM DS-71 PV D 62 LO_ALM DS-71 PV D 63 LO_LO_ALM DS-71 PV D 64 DV_HI_ALM DS-71 PV D 65 DV_LO_ALM DS-71 PV D Description The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. The current alert status, unacknowledged states, unreported states, and disabled states of the alarms associated with the function block. Selection of whether alarms associated with the block will be automatically acknowledged Alarm hysteresis parameter. In order to clear the alarm the amount the PV must return within the alarm limit plus hysteresis. Priority of the high high alarm. The setting for high high alarm in engineering units. Priority of the high alarm. The setting for high alarm in engineering units. Priority of the low alarm. The setting for low alarm in engineering units. Priority of the low low alarm. The setting for low low alarm in engineering units. Priority of the deviation high alarm. The setting for deviation high alarm in engineering units. Priority of the deviation low alarm. The setting for deviation low alarm in engineering units. The status for high high alarm and its associated time stamp. The status for high alarm and its associated time stamp. The status for low alarm and its associated time stamp. The status for low low alarm and its associated time stamp. The status for deviation high alarm and its associated time stamp. The status for deviation low alarm and its associated time stamp. 2.59 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Enhanced PID - Additional Parameters Idx Parameter Type Valid Range/ Default Options Value Units Mode To Change 0: Bumpless 66 BUMPLESS_TYPE Unsigned8 1: Last+Proportional 2: Bias 0 E S / Man Options that defines the algorithm action to start the output when the block transfer from a “manual” to an “automatic” mode. 0 OUT S The bias value to use in the PID algorithm when the BUMPLESS type is “Bias” or “Bias+Proportional”. S / O/S The options for handling the additional features of the output tracking. 3: Bias+Proportional 67 BIAS Float 68 PID_OPTS Bitstring(2) See block options Description 0 Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters If BEHAVIOR parameter is “Adapted”: The default value of BYPASS is OFF. The default value of SHED_OPT is NormalShed/NormalReturn. The required mode for writing is the actual mode, regardless the target mode: SP and OUT. 2.60 Block Library APID – Advanced Pid Overview The advanced PID function block provides the following additional features comparing to the standard PID algorithm and the enhanced PID: • Selection of the terms (proportional, integral, derivative) calculated on error or process variable • PI Sampling algorithm • Adaptive gain • Configurable Limits of anti reset wind-up • Special treatment for the error • Discrete output to indicate the actual mode The standard features as well the enhanced ones are described in the PID block, therefore they will not be repeated here. Schematic Description Selection of the terms (proportional, integral, derivative) calculated on error or process variable. The control algorithm can be ideal parallel or not iterative (ISA). For each algorithm can choose the terms (proportional, integral, and derivative) calculated on error or process variable by setting the PID_TYPE parameter. Where: • PI.D - The P and I terms are calculated based on the error and the D term on the PV. • PID - The P, I and D terms are calculated based on the error. • I.PD - The I is calculated based on the error and the P and D terms on the PV. 2.61 Function Blocks Instruction Manual PI Sampling algorithm The output is calculated based on the PI algorithm during time to. After that, the algorithm stops calculating and it holds the last value during time t1, The time to is adjusted by SAMPLE_ON, and t1 by (SAMPLE_PER – SAMPLE_ON). If the SAMPLE_PER is less than SAMP_ON or SAMP_ON is zero, then the algorithm works as an ordinary PI controller. Adaptive gain The adaptive gain permits to change the algorithm PID terms by a factor obtained in a curve established by CURVE_X and CURVE_Y parameters. This curve is based in SP, PV, Error, OUT or another value set in AD_GAIN_IN parameter. The algorithm actions that will be changed are defined by the AD_GAIN_ACTION parameter. The AD_GAIN_IN_SEL parameter selects the input value to enter into the curve in order to get the adaptive gain. The CURVE_X points of the curve are in the same engineering units of the selected variable. The CURVE_Y points are the adaptive gain. The adaptive gain (G) changes the PID constants GAIN, RESET and RATE to: GAIN’= G * GAIN RESET’ = RESET / G RATE’ = G * RATE If the curve has less than 20 configured points, the non-configured points shall be set with +INF. If the curve has a configuration error, then the BLOCK_ALM indicates it, and the adaptive gain value will be the CURVE_Y corresponding to the highest CURVE_X point. If the AD_GAIN_IN is selected and it has a bad status, the algorithm uses the last usable value to provide bumpless transfer. 2.62 Block Library STEAM LT LIC WATER The volume variations are nonlinear with the level variations. The dotted line of figure below shows the volume gain with the level. Note that the volume varies slowly (low gain), around 50% level and varies very fast (high gain) around the level extremes. The control action must have a gain that is the inverse of the process gain. This is shown by the continuous line of the figure below. GAIN CONTROLLER GAIN PROCESS GAIN 0 50% 100% LEVEL Process and Controller Gain The adaptative gain characteristic can be configured as shown in Fig 4.9.7. This curve can be represented by the following points of Curve 1: (X1 = 0; Y1 = 0.2; X2 = 20; Y2 = 0.8; X3 = 40; Y3 = 0.96; etc.). FACTOR G 1.0 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 50% 100% LEVEL Gain Curve as a Function of PV 2.63 Function Blocks Instruction Manual While planning the configuration, observe the following: 1. It is not necessary to use all 13 points of the curve. 2. It is fundamental to use the 0% and the 100% of the determining variable (-100 and +100% for the Error). 3. It is recommendable to program the variable up to 102%, since the variable may be above 100%. 4. Tuning is normally done for G = 1. In the example, the control becomes slower above or below 50% of the level. Adaptative Gain is also very useful for pH control. Configurable Limits of anti reset wind-up The saturation limits to integral term can be changed by the ARW_LOW and ARW_UP parameters. Then the control algorithm stops the integral calculation when the output signal reaches the antireset wind-up limits. The proportional and derivative calculations are not affected. The Anti Reset Wind-up will not be stopped to the output limits, i.e., when the ARW_UP limit is greater than OUT_HI_LIM, the OUT is clamped in the OUT_HI_LIM value, but internally the algorithm continue the integral calculation until the ARW_UP limit. The user can avoid this case configuring the ARW_UP less or equal to OUT_HI_LIM. The same idea applies to the low limit. Special treatment for the error The treatment of the error in the control process can be chosen by the ERROR_TYPE parameter. The quadratic error can be applied on only integral term or on all PID terms. In the quadratic error, the considered error for the calculation will be: ê= e* e 100 In order to use the GAP control to consider the cases where the control is unstable over a band around SP due the dead band of the actuator or due the noise or other things, there is a special gain in the error type. In order to use the ERROR_TYPE as special gain it is necessary to define the ERROR_BAND where it will be applied the special gain GAIN_BAND parameter on the error. If the ERROR_BAND is zero the algorithm will not apply the special gain. 2.64 Block Library ê[%] ê[%] ê[%] 20% 10% 10% -10% -30 -20 -10% -10 -10 10 20 30 -10% e[%] e[%] 10% 10% e[%] -10% ERROR_BAND ERROR_BAND ERROR_BAND -20 ERROR_BAND = 10% GAIN_BAND = 0 ERROR_BAND = 10% GAIN_BAND = 0,5 ERROR _BAND = 10% GAIN_BAND = 2,0 Mode indication The MODE_IND parameter is used to configure which mode(s) types in the actual mode will be indicated by a TRUE value in the discrete output MODE_OUT. If more than one mode type is chosen, then it will be used an OR logic. Working as a standard PID If the additional parameters of APID block is configured with the default values, then it works as the standard PID block. Supported modes O/S, IMAN, LO, MAN, AUTO, CAS, RCAS and ROUT. Parameters Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Idx Parameter 66 MODE_OUT DS-66 67 MODE_IND Bitstring Actual mode bitstring Units 0 Store / Mode Description D / RO This output parameter indicates if one of selected modes in the parameter “MODE_IND” is the actual mode D Selection of mode(s) to be indicated in the output parameter “MODE_OUT”. 0: Disable 1: PID 68 AD_GAIN_ACTION Unsigned8 2: PI 3: P 0 E It chooses the term(s) of PID algorithm multiplied S / Man by the adaptive gain. 0 E It selects the input to enter into the curve in order S / Man to get the adaptive gain. The option Error may be selected if ERROR_TYPE is Normal. 4: I 5: D 0: SP 1: PV 69 AD_GAIN_IN_SEL Unsigned8 2: Error 3: OUT 4: AD_GAIN_IN 70 AD_GAIN_IN DS-65 71 CURVE_X 20 Floats 0’s EU of variable selected by AD_GAI N_IN_S EL 72 CURVE_Y 20 Floats 0’s Na D Input parameter to enter into the curve in order to get the adaptive gain. S Curve input points. The xi points of the curve are defined by an array of twenty points. S Curve output points. The yi points of the curve are defined by an array of twenty points. 2.65 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Idx Parameter Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store / Mode Description 0: Normal 73 ERROR_TYPE Unsigned8 1: Quadratic (Integral) 2: Quadratic (all terms) 0 E Type of error used by the PID algorithm. The S / Man options Quadratic and Special gain may be selected if AD_GAIN_IN_SEL is different of Error. 3: Special gain 74 75 ERROR_BAND Float 0-300% 0 % S It is applied a special treatment for error within the “ERROR_BAND”. GAIN_BAND Float 0-10 0 Na S Special gain applied to the error, if it is selected in the ERROR_BAND. 0 E S Type of PID algorithm. 0-10800 0 Sec S Time interval of the PID algorithm activity, therefore (SAMP_PER – SAMP_ON) means the hold time. 0-10800 0 Sec S Period of the PI sampling algorithm. 0 E S / Man This parameter defines the type of transfer from a “manual” mode to an “automatic” mode. 0:PI.D + ISA 1:PID + ISA 2:I.PD + ISA 3:PI Sampling + ISA 76 PID_TYPE Unsigned8 4:PI.D + Parallel 5:PID + Parallel 6:I.PD + Parallel 7:PI Sampling+Paral lel 77 SAMP_ON Float 78 SAMP_PER Float 0: Bumpless 79 BUMPLESS_TYPE Unsigned8 1: Last+Proportion al 2: Bias 3: Bias+Proportion al BIAS Float 0 OUT S The bias value to use in the PID algorithm when the BUMPLESS type is “Bias” or “Bias+Proportional”. 81 ARW_UP Float + INF OUT S High limit for anti reset windup. 82 ARW_LOW Float - INF OUT S Low limit for anti reset windup. 83 PID_OPTS Bitstring(2) 0 80 S / O/S A bit string for handling the characteristics of the output tracking. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S – static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters 2.66 additional Block Library ARTH - Arithmetic Description The ARTH block is intended for use in calculating measurements from combinations of signals from sensors. It is not intended to be used in a control path, so it does not support cascades or back calculation. It does no conversions to percent, so scaling is not supported. It has no process alarms. The block has 5 inputs. The first two are dedicated to a range extension function that results in a PV, with status reflecting the input in use. The remaining three inputs are combined with the PV in a selection of four term math functions that have been found useful in a variety of measurements. The inputs used to form the PV must come from devices with the desired engineering units, so that the PV enters the equation with the right units. Each of the additional inputs has a bias and gain constant. The bias can be used to correct for absolute temperature or pressure. The gain can be used to normalize terms within a square root function. The output also has gain and bias constants for any further adjustment required. The range extension function has a graduated transfer, controlled by two constants referenced to IN. An internal value, g, is zero for IN less than RANGE_LO. It is one when IN is greater than RANGE_HI. It is interpolated from zero to one over the range of RANGE_LO to RANGE_HI. The equation for PV follows: PV = g∗ IN + (1 − g)∗ IN _ LO if : IN < RANGE_LO or IN_LO < RANGE_HI and status of IN is unusable and status of IN_LO is usable: g=0 IN > RANGE_HI or IN > RANGE_LO and status of IN is usable and status of IN_LO is unusable: g=1 RANGE_LO ≤ IN ≤ RANGE_HI: g= IN − RANGE _ LO RANGE _ HI − RANGE _ LO If the status of IN_LO is unusable and IN is usable and greater than RANGE_LO, then g will be set to one. If the status of IN is unusable, and IN_LO is usable and less than RANGE_HI, then g will be set to zero. In each case the PV will have a status of Good until the condition no longer applies. Otherwise, the status of IN_LO is used for the PV if g is less than 0.5, while IN is used for g greater than or equal to 0.5. 2.67 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Six constants are used for the three auxiliary inputs. Each has a BIAS_IN_i and a GAIN_IN_i. The output has a BIAS and GAIN static constant. For the inputs, the bias is added and the gain is applied to the sum. The result is an internal value called t_i in the function equations. t_i = (IN_i + BIAS_IN_i) ∗ GAIN_IN_i The flow compensation functions have limits on the amount of compensation applied to the PV, to assure graceful degradation if an auxiliary input is unstable. The following equations have the compensation factor limited to COMP_HI_LIM and COMP_LO_LIM: • flow compensation , linear • flow compensation, square root • flow compensation, approximate • BTU flow • Traditional multiply divide Arithmetic exceptions : a) Division by zero will produce a value equals to OUT_HI_LIM or OUT_LO_LIM, it depends on the sign of PV. b) Roots of negative numbers will produce the root of the absolute value, with a negative sign. Although the output is not scaled, it still has absolute high and low limits, to keep the values reasonable. MINIMUM CONFIGURATION RANGE_HI and RANGE_LO: If the range extension function is not used, these two parameters must be set to INF. Therefore the PV will be a copy of IN. If the ARITH_TYPE is one of five first equations, the COMP_HI_LIM and COMP_LO_LIM parameters must be set properly. The default value of COMP_HI_LIM parameter is zero. As the default value of GAIN parameter is zero, it is necessary to set a suitable value. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the Arithmetic block will reflect the following causes: • Block Configuration Error – the configuration error occurs when the ARITH_TYPE has an invalid value; • Out of Service – When the block is in O/S mode. Supported Modes O/S, MAN and AUTO. Status Handling The status of PV depends on the factor “g”, if it is less than 0.5, then it will be used the status of IN_LO, and otherwise it will be the status of IN. The INPUT_OPTS parameter allows the usage of auxiliary inputs with less than good status. The status of unused inputs is ignored. The status of the output will be that of the PV, except for when the status of PV is good and the status of a used auxiliary input is not good and INPUT_OPTS is not configured to use it. In this case, the status of OUT will be Uncertain. 2.68 Block Library Schematic Parameters Idx Parameter DataType Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store / Mode 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 0 None S/RO 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) 7 PV DS-65 8 OUT DS-65 9 PRE_OUT DS-65 10 PV_UNITS Unsigned16 11 OUT_UNITS 12 Description 0 None S 0 None S O/S Na S E D / RO PV D / RO Process analog value for use in executing the function. OUT D / Man The analog value calculated as a result of executing the function. OUT D / RO Displays what would be the OUT value and status if the mode was Auto or lower. 0 PV S The engineering units index for display. See Arithmetic block. Unsigned16 0 OUT S The engineering units of the output for display. GRANT_DENY DS-70 0 na D Options for controlling access of host computer and local control panels to operating, tuning and alarm parameters of the block. 13 INPUT_OPTS Bitstring(2) 0 na S / O/S Option bit string for handling the status of the auxiliary inputs. 14 IN DS-65 PV D The primary input of the block 15 IN_LO DS-65 PV D Input for the low range transmitter, in a range extension application. 16 IN_1 DS-65 None D Numbered input 1. 17 IN_2 DS-65 None D Numbered input 2. 18 IN_3 DS-65 None D Numbered input 3. 19 RANGE_HI Float 0 PV S Constant value above which the range extension has switched to the high range transmitter. 20 RANGE_LO Float 0 PV S Constant value below which the range extension has switched to the low range transmitter. 21 BIAS_IN_1 Float 0 None S The constant to be added to IN_1. 1 to 255 OUT_SCALE +/10% See Mode Parameter 2.69 Function Blocks Instruction Manual DataType Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store / Mode 0 None S The constant to be multiplied times (IN_1 + bias). Float 0 None S The constant to be added to IN_2. GAIN_IN_2 Float 0 None S The constant to be multiplied times (IN_2 + bias). 25 BIAS_IN_3 Float None S The constant to be added to IN_3. 26 GAIN_IN_3 Float 0 None S The constant to be multiplied times (IN_3 + bias). 27 COMP_HI_LIM Float 0 None S The high limit imposed on the PV compensation term. 28 COMP_LO_LIM Float 0 None S The low limit imposed on the PV compensation term. 0 E S The identification number of the arithmetic algorithm. Idx Parameter 22 GAIN_IN_1 Float 23 BIAS_IN_2 24 Description 1= Flow comp. linear 2= Flow comp. square root 3= Flow comp. approx. 4= BTU flow 29 ARITH_TYPE Unsigned8 5= Traditional mult. div. 6= Average 7= Traditional summer 8= Fourth order polynomial 9= HTG comp. level This specifies the time for the internal working value of bias or ratio to return to the operator set bias or ratio, in seconds. 30 BAL_TIME Float 31 BIAS 32 0 Sec S Float 0 OUT S The bias value used in computing the function block output, expressed in engineering units. GAIN Float 0 None S Dimensionless value used by the algorithm in calculating the block output. 33 OUT_HI_LIM Float 100 OUT S Limits the maximum output value. 34 OUT_LO_LIM Float 0 OUT S Limits the minimum output value D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. 35 36 2.70 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 Positive Na In the PID block, it may be used to specify the time constant at which the integral term will move to obtain balance when the output is limited and the mode is Auto, Cas, or RCas. block The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the BLOCK_ALM DS-72 Na D Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters Block Library If BEHAVIOR parameter is “Adapted”: The default value of ARITH_TYPE is the Gas flow compensation for linear transmitters, equation type 1. The required mode for writing is the actual mode, regardless the target mode : OUT Equation Types ARITH_ TYPE 1 Flow comp. Linear 2 Flow comp. Square root 3 Flow comp. Approx. 4 BTU flow Equation OUT = PV ∗ f ∗ GAIN + BIAS ⎡ T1 ⎤ where f = ⎢ ⎥ is limited ⎣T 2 ⎦ OUT = PV ∗ f ∗ GAIN + BIAS ⎡ T1 ⎤ where f = ⎢ ⎥ is limited 2 ⎣ T *T3 ⎦ OUT = PV ∗ f ∗ GAIN + BIAS where f = [ T 1 * T 2 * T 3 ]is limited 2 OUT = PV * f * GAIN + BIAS where f = [T1 − T 2] is limited 5 OUT = PV * f * GAIN + BIAS Traditional mult. div. ⎡ T1 ⎤ where f = ⎢ + T 3⎥ is limited ⎣T 2 ⎦ 6 Average OUT = PV + T1+ T2 + T 3 ∗GAIN + BIAS f Where f is number of inputs used in computation (unusable inputs are not used). 7 OUT = ( PV + T1 + T 2 + T3)∗GAIN + BIAS Traditional summer 8 Fourth order polynomial OUT = ( PV + T12 + T 2 3 + T 34 ) ∗ GAIN + BIAS 9 HTG comp. Level OUT = PV − T 1 ∗ G AIN + BIAS PV − T 2 2.71 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Examples ARITH_ TYPE Example 1 Gas flow compensation for linear transmitters (e.g. turbine) 2 3 4 5 6 Gas flow compensation For DP transmitters. Approx. liquid & steam flow comp. BTU meter (heat flow) Simple “hard” (noncascade) ratio Average of four temperature measurement s 7 Difference in pressure (or level) 9 Simple HTG compensated level Example equation Qb = Q f ∗ K∗ Qb = Q f ∗ K ∗ Note P T P T∗ Z Z may be constant or an input from other block (AGA3) Qb = Q f ∗ K ∗ ( K + K∗ T + K ∗ T 2 ) Temperature connected to 3 and 4 Qb = Q f ∗ K ∗ ( K + K∗ P ) QHEAT = K ∗ QVOL ∗ (t1 − t2 ) QSP = QWILD∗ RATIO ta = t1 + t2 + t3 + t 4 f output is setpoint to PID block . Pbm = Pb − Pm h BT = PB − PT ∗ h BM PB − PM NOTE: Square root of the third power may be achieved by selecting ARITH_TYPE = 3 and connecting input to IN and IN_1. Square root of the fifth power may likewise be achieved by connecting the input to IN, IN_1 and IN_3. 2.72 Block Library SPLT-Splitter Description The splitter block provides the capability to drive multiple outputs from a single input, usually a PID. This block would normally be used in split ranging or sequencing of multiple valve applications. Included in the block features are the capability to open valves as part of a predetermined schedule and leave open or closed a given valve after the controller has transitioned off the valve. The splitter supports two outputs. Since this block will participate in the control path after a PID block, back calculation support is included. The application(s) targeted for the splitter block would be a single output from a controller which is used to control up to two valves in either split ranging fashion or as sequenced operation. Split ranging is that application where two valves are used such as a reactor where heating and cooling must be applied by the same controller. The controller action , direct or reversing, is implicitly reversed owing to the change in slope of the function as the input increases or decreases. Sequencing as applied to this document is when two or more valves are used to manipulate the flow of some material and the controller action is not reversed implicitly or otherwise. An example is pH control where added valves are required to increase the loop rangeability. A graphical representation of the splitter vs. controller output is shown below. Both a Split range and Sequencing application are shown. Split Ranging OUT_1 OUT_2 0-----------50----------100% Controller Output Sequencing OUT_1 OUT_2 0-----------50------------100% Controller Output The following parameters are used to specify the signal splitter operation: X11, Y11 X12, Y12 X21, Y21 X22, Y22 Where XnJ is the value of CAS_IN associated with OUT_n and Xn1 and Xn2 refers to the 1st and 2nd coordinates respectively. The Y values are defined in the same way. 2.73 Function Blocks Instruction Manual IN_ARRAY OUT_ARRAY X11 Y11 X12 Y12 X21 Y21 X22 Y22 By specifying the coordinates as shown above the endpoints of the lines are defined. The contents of the respective X’s and Y’s are held in IN_ARRAY and OUT_ARRAY parameters. If a set of points is specified such that a region of the input range is not specified then the block will interpolate to the endpoint of the input value, either high or low. The parameter LOCKVAL provides an option to specify whether OUT_1 remains at its ending level when control is switched to OUT_2, or goes to zero. If LOCKVAL is true, OUT_1 remains at its current value when OUT_2 is non-zero. If LOCKVAL is false then as soon as the OUT_2 becomes non-zero then OUT_1 goes to zero. Additionally, the parameter LOCKVAL = “SP on Cas Restart” does the return output BKCAL_OUT for the upper block uses the SP value instead of the BKCAL_IN in the cascade initialization. Supported Modes O/S, IMAN, Auto and Cas. Status Handling Sub-status values received at CAS_IN will be passed to both outputs, except for those used in the cascade handshake. An IFS will go to both the active and the inactive outputs. The back calculation status will only come from the active output. An output held by LOCKVAL is not active. Limit status must be inverted if the slope of the active output is negative. No limits are sent back on BKCAL_OUT if neither output is active. Actual mode BKCAL_IN_1 BKCAL_IN_2 BKCAL_OUT NI NI NI BKCAL_OUT limited high and low to (X12 + X21)/2 Auto or Cas NI OK OK BKCAL_OUT limited to X21 low and X22 high Auto or Cas OK NI OK BKCAL_OUT limited to X11 low and X12 high Iman IR NI IR Initialize cascade to value given by curve X1 vs Y1 Auto or Cas IR OK OK Initialize OUT_1 using internal offset from Y1 Iman NI IR IR Initialize cascade to value given by curve X2 vs Y2 Auto or Cas OK IR OK Initialize OUT_2 using internal offset from Y2 Iman ACTION Legend: NI-not invited; IR-initialization request; OK-working in cascade 2.74 Block Library Schematic Parameters Idx Parameter Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store / Mode Description 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 0 None S/RO 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 0 None S 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 0 None S 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 O/S Na S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) E D/RO 7 SP DS-65 8 OUT_1 DS-65 OUT1 D / RO Numbered output parameter 1. 9 OUT_2 DS-65 OUT2 D / RO Numbered output parameter 2. 10 OUT_1_UNITS Unsigned16 0 E S The units code for the corresponding output. 11 OUT_2_UNITS Unsigned16 0 E S The units code for the corresponding output. 12 GRANT_DENY DS-70 0 Na S / O/S Options for controlling access of host computer and local control panels to operating, tuning and alarm parameters of the block. 13 STATUS_OPTS Bitstring(2) 0 Na S Options which the user may select in the block processing of status. 14 CAS_IN DS-65 D This parameter is the remote setpoint value, which must come from another Fieldbus block, or a DCS block through a defined link. 15 BKCAL_OUT DS-65 D / RO The value and status required by an upper block’s BKCAL_IN so that the upper block may prevent reset windup and provide bumpless transfer to closed loop control. 16 IN_ARRAY 4 Floats 0’s S An array which contains the values of the input or X variables. 17 OUT_ARRAY 4 Floats 0’s S An array which contains the values of the output or Y variables. 1 to 255 N / Auto See Mode Parameter The analog set point. 0:FALSE 1:TRUE 18 LOCKVAL Unsigned8 2- SP on Cas restart 3- Lock & SP On cas restart FALSE E S Flag for holding the first output at current value when the other output is non-zero. It also allowed BKCAL_OUT receives SP or BKCAL_IN in the cascade initialization. 2.75 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Store / Mode Description DS-65 N The back calculated input required to initialize a lower cascade 1. BKCAL_IN_2 DS-65 N The back calculated input required to initialize a lower cascade 2. 21 BAL_TIME Float Sec S This specifies the time for the internal working value of bias or ratio to return to the operator set bias or ratio, in seconds. 22 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 na D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. Idx Parameter 19 BKCAL_IN_1 20 23 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 0 Units na Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters If BEHAVIOR parameter is “Adapted”: The required mode for writing is the actual mode, regardless the target mode: SP 2.76 Block Library CHAR - Signal Characterizer Description The signal characterizer block has two sections, each with an output that is a non-linear function of the respective inputs. The function is determined by a single look-up table with x-y coordinates of twenty points each. The status of input is copied to the corresponding output, so the block may be used in the control or process signal path. An option can swap the axes of the function for section 2, so that it can be used in the backward control path. The block interpolates correlates the input IN_1 to the output OUT_1 and the input IN_2 to the output OUT_2 according to a curve given by the points: [x1 ;y1 ], [x2 ; y2 ]..............[x20 ; y20 ] where x corresponds to the Input and y to the Output. The x-coordinates are given in engineering units of the input. The y-coordinates are given in engineering units of the output. How to configure not used points If the curve has m points, m<20, the non-configured points, [xm+1; ym+1], [xm+2; ym+2],…. [x20; y20] shall be set with +INFINITY. Working with more than One Characterizer Block in Series When the application needs more than the limit of a CHAR block (more than 20 points in the curve), it can use many CHAR blocks in series. To do this, it is necessary to configure in the SWAP_2 parameter: • Indicate which is the first, the intermediate blocks and the last block of the CHAR series. Thus, the input parameters will be limited by the lower X value of the curve indicated by FIRST (Low Limit) and the upper X value of the curve indicated by LAST (High Limit). • If the SWAP was used, thus all the curve blocks must be defined with “Swap & xxxx” (SWAP & FIRST, SWAP & INTERMEDIATE, SWAP & LAST). • The first, intermediate and last values are for the two inputs: IN_1 and IN_2. • When the SWAP_2 value is equal 0 – No Swap or 1 – Swap, the block will work as “Alone”, that is, as not supporting CHAR blocks in series. To work in series, the CURVE_X parameter must be always crescent in relation to the points inside the block and also in relation to the other blocks of the CHAR cascade. For example, the order of the block configuration of the example below must be followed: 1. CHAR1 – Swap_2 = “First”. 2. CHAR2 – Swap_2 = “Intermediate” 3. CHAR3 – Swap_2 = “Intermediate” 4. CHAR4 – Swap_2 = “Last” If the order was not followed correctly, the blocks will not indicate configuration error, but the algorithm will not work correctly. The status limit “Constant” will be used between the CHAR blocks to indicate the value was “Resolved” by the block. At the end, the Status Limit will be “Not Limited” (even the curve was limited the status limit will not used). In the following example, the application needs 80 points to be configured. In this case is necessary to use four CHAR blocks. It considers the input value for the first block (CHAR_1) is 25. The value is repassed for the CHAR_1 and CHAR_2 blocks because the input value is out of the curve limits of these blocks. The value is “resolved” by the CHAR_3 block that repasses the Y correspondent value for the following block, as well the “Constant” Status Limit. Thus, the following blocks (CHAR_4 in the example), when check the input with “Constant” limit, know the value was already “resolved” and repass it for the output. 2.77 Function Blocks Instruction Manual The Cascade Swap is supported, since the curve was monotonic in the whole extension. The check if the curve is monotonic for all cascade blocks does not exist, thus if the curve was not monotonic, the result will be the first Y value found. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR will reflect the following causes: • Block Configuration Error – the configuration error occurs when the BYPASS parameter has an invalid value or the curve has any of the following problems: o CURVE_X[i] > CURVE_X[I+1] o If the curve is not using effectively 20 points and any non-configured point is different from +INFINITY. o If SWAP_2 is true and the curve is not monotonic. • Out of Service – it occurs when the block is in O/S mode. Supported Modes O/S and AUTO. Status Handling The quality and sub-status of OUT_1 and OUT_2 reflect the status of IN_1 and IN_2, respectively. If one of the curve limits is reached, the appropriate limit is indicated. Limits are reversed if the curve slope is negative. The status of output will be Bad – Configuration Error if there is an error as indicated in the BLOCK_ERR parameter. 2.78 Block Library Schematic Parameters Idx Parameter Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store / Mode 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 0 None S/RO 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 1 to 255 0 None S 0 None S O/S Description 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 Na S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) E D/RO 7 OUT1 DS-65 Y D / RO 8 OUT2 DS-65 X or Y D / RO 9 X_UNITS Unsigned16 E S The engineering unit of the variables corresponding to the x-axis for display. 10 Y_UNITS Unsigned16 E S The engineering unit of the variables corresponding to the y-axis for display. 11 GRANT_DENY DS-70 0 Na D Options for controlling access of host computer and local control panels to operating, tuning and alarm parameters of the block. 12 CONTROL_OPTS Bitstring(2) 0 Na S / O/S 13 IN_1 DS-65 14 IN_2 DS-65 15 BYPASS Unsigned8 See Block Options 1:Off 2:On 0 E See Mode Parameter Numbered output parameter 1. The interpolation result of IN_1. Numbered output parameter 2. The interpolation result of IN_2. See Block Options D Numbered input parameter 1. D Numbered input parameter 2. S / Man When bypass is set, the input value will be directly transferred to the output. 2.79 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Idx Parameter Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store / Mode Description 0 – False – No Swap e not support cascade of char. 1 – Swap – Swap the curve for OUT_2 e not support cascade of char. 0 – False 2 – First – No swap and the block is the first block of the curve. 1 – Swap 2 – First 3 – Intermediate – No swap and the block is an intermediate block in the curve 3 – Intermediate 16 SWAP_2 Unsigned8 4 – Last 0 E S/O/S 5 – Swap & First 4 – Last - No swap and the block is the last block in the curve. 5 – Swap & First – Swap the curve for OUT_2 and is the first block of the curve. 6 – Swap & Intermediate 6 – Swap & Intermediate- Swap the curve for OUT_2 and an intermediate block of the curve. 7 – Swap & Last 7 – Swap & Last - Swap the curve for OUT_2 and the block is the last block in the curve. 17 CURVE_X 20 Floats 0’s X S Curve input points. The xi points of the curve are defined by an array of twenty points. 18 CURVE_Y 20 Floats 0’s Y S Curve output points. The yi points of the curve are defined by an array of twenty points. 19 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 na D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. 20 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 na Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters If BEHAVIOR parameter is “Adapted”: The default value of BYPASS is Off. The default value of all elements of CURVE_X is +INF. The default value of all elements of CURVE_Y is +INF. 2.80 Block Library INTG - Integrator Description The Integrator Function Block integrates a variable in function of the time or accumulates the counting of a Pulse Input block. The integrated or accumulated value is compared to pre-trip and trip limits, generating discrete signals when these limits are reached. The integrated value may go up, starting from zero, or down, starting from the trip value (parameter SP). In order to determine the amount of uncertain or bad readings, the block integrates the variables with bad or bad and uncertain status separately (parameter RTOTAL). The values used in this second integration are the values with good status just before they went from good to bad or uncertain. Featuring two flow inputs, the block can calculate and integrate net flow. This can be used to calculate volume or mass variation in vessels or as an optimizing tool for flow ratio control. The basic function of the Integrator block is to integrate an analog value over time. It can also accumulate the count pulses coming from Pulse Input blocks or from another Integrator Block. This block is normally used to totalize flow, giving total mass or volume over a certain time, or totalize power, giving the total energy. The algorithm shall comply with the following points: 1) The block has two dual purpose inputs, IN_1 and IN_2. Each input can receive a measurement per unit of time (rate) or an accumulated number of pulses. Each input can receive one of the following types of variables: RATE - When the variable connected to the input is a rate, i.e., kg/s, W, Gal/hour, etc. This input can come from, or is derived from the output OUT of a Pulse Input block or from the output of an Analog Input block. ACCUM - When the input comes from the OUT_ACCUM of a Pulse Input block, which represents a continuous accumulation of pulse counts from a transducer. 2) The input type is configured in the bit string parameter INTEG_OPTS. The bits corresponding to IN_1 and IN_2 can be set as follows: false = RATE true = ACCUM 3) Rate inputs: • Each input needs a parameter to define the rate time unit: [TIME_UNIT1] or [TIME_UNIT2]. The time units are used to convert the two rates in units of mass, volume or energy per second. • The second analog input may have to be converted into the same units of the first input. This is achieved by a unit conversion factor, given by the parameter [UNIT_CONV]. Each rate, multiplied by the block execution time, gives the mass, volume or energy increment per block execution. This increment will be added or subtracted in a register, according to some rules defined ahead. TIME_UNIT1: input1 Kg / hour sec: × 1 min: × 60 hour: × 3600 day: × 86 400 input2 lb /min sec: × 1 min: × 60 hour: × 3 600 day: × 86 400 Kg / s TIME_UNIT2: ×[block execution time] increment1 Kg ×[block execution time] increment2 Kg UNIT_CONV: lb / s ×[conversion factor*] Kg /s 0.453 lb / Kg Fig. 1 - Increment calculation with rate input 2.81 Function Blocks Instruction Manual 4) Counter inputs: • The counter inputs are originated in Pulse Input blocks. It can also be connected to any floating point variable, as the output of another integrator block. The output ACCUM_OUT of the Pulse Input block represents a continuous accumulation of pulses from the flow transducer, while the output OUT of an Integrator represents an integration or accumulation of analog inputs. The Integrator block shall determine the variation of the counter input readings since the last execution. • As the output ACCUM_OUT of the Pulse Input block wraps up when the counting reaches 999,999 and does not increment or decrement by more than 499,999 per cycle, the variation is determined as follows: a) If the difference between the reading in one cycle and the reading in the preceding cycle is smaller than 500,000 or larger than (-500,000), the difference will be taken as variation. • If the difference between the reading in one cycle and the reading in the preceding cycle is larger or equal to (+500,000), add (-1.000,000) and use the result as the variation. c) If the difference between the reading in one cycle and the reading in the preceding cycle is smaller or equal to (-500,000), add (+1.000,000) and use the result as the variation. • If the output OUT of another integrator block is used, that block should be programmed to have only increasing counting. • The variation of each input must be multiplied by the value, in engineering units, of each pulse given by: PULSE_VAL1 and PULSE_VAL2. The result is the increment in engineering units of, for example, mass, volume or energy per block execution. input 1 counts [Reading (i)] PULSE_VAL1 [Reading (i-1)]* number of pulses × [pulse value 1] increment 2 Kg Kg / pulse input 2 counts [Reading (i)] PULSE_VAL2 [Reading (i-1)]* number of pulses × [pulse value 2] lb UNIT_CONV ×[conversion factor*] increment 2 Kg lb / pulse Fig. 2- Increment calculation with counter input 5) In order to distinguish forward and reverse flows, the Integrator block considers a negative sign as an indication of reverse flow. Some flow meters already indicate forward and reverse flows by adding a sign to the measurement value. Others use a separate binary signal. This signal can be connected to the inputs REV_FLOW1 and REV_FLOW2, with the following options: 0 = False (not invert signal) 1 = True (invert signal) where True will invert the signal of the IN_i signal. 6) The net flow is obtained by adding the two increments. The net increment will have a positive or negative signal to indicate the net flow direction. In order to integrate the difference between the inflow and outflow of a tank, for example, the second one can be assigned to be negative. 7) The net flow direction to be considered in the totalization is defined in INTEG_OPTS. The following options are available: FORWARD = only positive flows (after application of REV_FLOWi ) are totalized. The negative values will be treated as zero. FORWARD is selected when the bit corresponding to Forward is set to true. REVERSE = only negative flows are totalized. The positive values will be treated as zero. The option bit Reverse must be set to true. 2.82 Block Library TOTAL= both positive and negative values will be totalized. Both option bits Forward and Reverse must be set to true or to false. 8) There are two values for the totalization: TOTAL (OUT) = Where the increments are added every cycle when the inputs have the status good, good or uncertain, or last usable value if bad. The status to be considered as usable are defined in INTEG_OPTS. RTOTAL = The rejected increments with status not selected by INTEG_OPTS are added according to some rules described below. 9) The main totalization TOTAL may use inputs with different status, according to a selection established by INTEG_OPTS: USE_UNCERTAIN = Use good and uncertain inputs when this bit is set to true. USE_BAD = Use the last good or uncertain input before it went to bad when this bit is set to true. USE_GOOD = Use good inputs when both former bits are set to false. If both bits are set to true, the option USE_ANY is selected. 10) The increments with status not selected by INTEG_OPTS are totalized in RTOTAL, according to the following rules: a) If INTEG_OPTS has no selection for status, the increments with uncertain or bad status must be added to RTOTAL. The last value with good status is used in place of the input value with bad status. b) If INTEG_OPTS has the USE_UNCERTAIN bit set, only the increments originated by inputs with bad input status shall be added to RTOTAL. The last usable value is used in the totalization. • If INTEG_OPTS has the USE_BAD bit set, the last usable value goes to TOTAL and nothing to RTOTAL.. 11) TOTAL can be read in the output OUT. The engineering units used in the indication is defined in OUT_UNITS. 12) The block has a discrete input to reset the integration - RESET_IN. While this input parameter has value TRUE, the block will be old reset, therefore it will start to integrate only after it goes to FALSE. The operator can send an operator command to reset the counting by making OP_CMD_INT = RESET. The mechanism to reset using this parameter is different from that one used in the RESET_IN, because a write operation in the OP_CMD parameter with RESET value will cause a reset, but the block will start to integrate soon after it, despite of the OP_CMD_INT remains with RESET. The integration can start from zero and go up or it can start from a Setpoint value (SP) and go down. The totalization may be reset in different ways. This is defined by the parameter INTEG_TYPE: • UP_AUTO Counts up starting from zero with automatic reset when SP is reached • UP_DEM Counts up starting from zero with demand reset • DN_AUTO Counts down starting from SP with auto reset when zero is reached • DN_DEM Counts down starting from SP with demand reset • PERIODIC: Counts up and is reset periodically according to CLOCK_PER • DEMAND: Counts up and is reset on demand • PER&DEM: Counts up and is reset periodically or on demand 15) Block takes a snapshot of TOTAL(OUT), RTOTAL and SP prior the reset and keep the information in the registers STOTAL, SRTOTAL and SSP, respectively. The information is kept at least until the next reset. 16) The integrator shall reject reset requests for 5 seconds after a reset. This is to guarantee that the snapshots values are exposed to FIELDBUS before they can be overwritten. 17) When the integration is counting up and it reaches a limit given by the parameter Setpoint - SP , the discrete output OUT_TRIP is set. When the integration is counting down, it starts from a value given by SP. When the counting reaches zero, the discrete output OUT_TRIP is set. 18) When the integration is counting up and it reaches a limit given by: 2.83 Function Blocks Instruction Manual SP - [PRE_TRIP] 19) The discrete output OUT_PTRIP is set, when the integration is counting down and it reaches [PRE_TRIP], the discrete output OUT_PTRIP is set. OUT_PTRIP is set until SP or zero is reached. When the options UP_AUTO or DN_AUTO are selected, a residue beyond the trip value may be considered in the next batch if the option CARRY, of INTEG_OPTS is set. This residue will be “carried” to the next batch by: a) Start counting from the residue value, instead of zero, when UP_AUTO is selected. b) Start counting from (SP-Residue) when DN_AUTO is selected. 20) The number of resets is counted in the register N_RESET. This counter can not be written or reset. 21) The percentage of rejected counts (RTOTAL) in the whole totalization (TOTAL+RTOTAL) may be determined by calculating the parameter PCT_INCL as it follows: PCT_INCL = TOTAL / (TOTAL+RTOTAL) The acceptable limit for good status is established by GOOD_LIM. The acceptable limit for uncertain status is established by UNCERT_LIM. If PCT_INCL ≥ GOOD_LIM, the status of OUT will be good, else, if PCT_INCL ≥ UNCERT_LIM the status will be uncertain, else, the status will be bad. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the INTG block will reflect the following causes: • Block Configuration Error – the configuration error occurs when TIME_UNIT1, TIME_UNIT2 or INTEG_TYPE parameters have an invalid value; • Out of Service – it occurs when the block is in O/S mode. Supported Modes O/S, MAN and AUTO. Status If IN-1 or IN-2 is not connected, it will be ignored. The configuration of INTEG_OPTS (Use Bad / Uncertain) will be applied to the worst status between IN_1 and IN_2. Based on it, the increment will be done in OUT or RTOTAL. OUT will receive the status determinaded by GOOD_LIM and UNCERT_LIM. 2.84 Block Library Schematic Parameters Idx Parameter Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store/ Mode Description 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 0 None S/RO 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 0 None S 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 0 None S 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 O/S Na S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) E D / RO 7 SP DS-65 OUT N / Auto The analog set point for trip detection. 8 OUT DS-65 OUT N / Man The primary analog value calculated as a result of executing the function. It is the result of integration. 9 OUT_UNITS Unsigned16 0 OUT S The engineering units of the output for display. 10 GRANT_DENY DS-70 0 Na D Options for controlling access of host computer and local control panels to operating, tuning and alarm parameters of the block. 11 IN_1 DS-65 0 D Input parameter for flow 1. 12 IN_2 DS-65 0 D Input parameter for flow 2. 13 OUT_TRIP DS-66 0 On/Off D Output parameter for trip indication. 14 OUT_PTRIP DS-66 0 On/Off D Output parameter for pre-trip indication. 0 E S Converts the rate time units in seconds. 0 E S Converts the rate time units in seconds. 1 none S Factor to convert the engineering units of input 2 into the engineering units of input 1. 1 to 255 See Mode Parameter 1:seconds 15 TIME_UNIT1 Unsigned8 2:minutes 3:hours 4:days 1:seconds 16 TIME_UNIT2 Unsigned8 2:minutes 3:hours 4:days 17 UNIT_CONV Float 2.85 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Idx Parameter 18 PULSE_VAL1 Float 19 PULSE_VAL2 Float 20 REV_FLOW1 DS-66 Units Store/ Mode Description 0 none S Determines the mass, volume or energy per pulse. It is used only in accum mode. 0 none S Determines the mass, volume or energy per pulse. It is used only in accum mode. E D It indicates reverse flow in IN_1 when true. E D It indicates reverse flow in IN_2 when true. E D Resets the totalizer - OUT parameter. 0=FORWARD 1=REVERSE 21 REV_FLOW2 DS-66 0=FORWARD 1=REVERSE 22 RESET_IN DS-66 0:Off 1:Reset 23 STOTAL Float 0 OUT D Indicates the snapshot of the totalizer - OUT parameter just before a reset. 24 RTOTAL Float 0 OUT D Indicates the totalization of bad or bad and uncertain inputs, according to INTEG_OPTS. 25 SRTOTAL Float 0 OUT D The snapshot of RTOTAL just before a reset. 26 SSP Float 0 OUT D The snapshot of SP. 0 E S Defines the type of counting (up or down) and the type of resetting (demand or periodic) none S A bit string to configure the type of input (rate or accum.) used in each input, the flow direction to be considered in the totalization, the status to de considered in TOTAL and if the totalization residue shall be used in the next batch (only when INTEG_TYPE = UP_AUTO or DN_AUTO). 1=UP_AUTO 2=UP_DEM 3=DN_AUTO 27 INTEG_TYPE Unsigned8 4=DN_DEM 5=PERIODIC 6=DEMAND 7=PER&DEM 28 INTEG_OPTS Bitstring(2) 29 CLOCK_PER Float 0 Sec S Establishes the period for periodic reset, in seconds. 30 PRE_TRIP Float 0 OUT S Adjusts the amount of mass, volume or energy that will set OUT_PTRIP when the integration reaches (SP-PRE_TRIP) when counting up or PRE_TRIP when counting down. 31 N_RESET DS-65 none N / RO Counts the number of resets. It can not be written on nor reset. 32 PCT_INCL Float % D / RO Indicates the percentage of inputs with good stati compared to the ones with bad or uncertain and bad stati. 33 GOOD_LIM Float 0 to 100% 0.1 % S Sets the limit for PCT_INCL. Below this limit OUT receives the status good. 34 UNCERT_LIM Float 0 to 100% 0.2 % S Sets the limit for PCT_INCL. Below this limit OUT receives the status uncertain. 35 OP_CMD_INT Unsigned8 E D Operator command. RESET. Resets the totalizer. 36 OUTAGE_LIM Float Sec S 37 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 na D 2.86 0=Undefined 1=Reset Positive 0 The maximum tolerated duration for power failure. This feature is not supported. This alert is generated by any change to the static data. Block Library Idx 38 Parameter BLOCK_ALM Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value DS-72 Units na Store/ Mode Description D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters If BEHAVIOR parameter is “Adapted”: The default value of TIME_UNIT1 is seconds. The default value of TIME_UNIT2 is seconds. The default value of INTEG_TYPE is UP_DEM. The required mode for writing is the actual mode, regardless the target mode: SP and OUT. 2.87 Function Blocks Instruction Manual AALM - Analog Alarm Description The Analog Alarm Block provides alarm condition reporting on an analog output of any block. Alarm conditions include high, high-high, low, and low-low alarms. These limits are computed based on gains and biases from a process setpoint input, thus providing dynamic deviation alarming. An option to temporarily expand alarm limits after a setpoint change is provided. Also, an alarm condition may be ignored for a specified period of time to avoid nuisance alarm reporting. The input value, IN, is filtered according to the PV_FTIME time-constant, to become PV. PV is then alarmed in the auto mode. Alarm limits may be dynamically calculated from process setpoint (PSP). The operating limits (same parameter names as limits, but suffixed with an “X”) are calculated from specified gains and biases as follows: HI_HI_LIMX = PSP * HI_GAIN + HI_HI_BIAS + EXPAND_UP (or default to HI_HI_LIM if any used parameter is undefined) HI_LIMX = PSP * HI_GAIN + HI_BIAS + EXPAND_UP (or default to HI_LIM if any used parameter is undefined) LO_LIMX = PSP * LO_GAIN - LO_BIAS - EXPAND_DN (or default to LO_LIM if any used parameter is undefined) LO_LO_LIMX = PSP * LO_GAIN - LO_LO_BIAS - EXPAND_DN (or default to LO_LO_LIM if any used parameter is undefined) Undefined means: - HI_GAIN/HI_HI_BIAS = ± INF - PSP_STATUS = BAD O/S Effective alarm limits may be temporarily expanded on step setpoint changes to avoid nuisance alarms. The operating high alarm limits are increased by a calculated term, EXPAND_UP. The operating low alarm limits are decreased by a calculated term, EXPAND_DN. See the example in the following time chart: Both the level 1 (advisory) and level 2 (critical) effective alarm limits are expanded after a setpoint change by the absolute value of the change to PSP. The expansions then decay toward the base limits at a rate determined by ALM_RATE_UP and ALM_RATE_DN parameters. This permits normal and over-damped process responses to avoid alarms on the initial change and permits under-damped process responses to avoid alarms on overshooting or ringing. The following properties and rules apply: - The four limits initially expand by the same value, the setpoint change. The two high limits always expand by the same value, EXPAND_UP, and decay by the same rate, ALM_RATE_DN (which may differ from the low limits). 2.88 Block Library - The two low limits always expand by the same value, EXPAND_DN, and decay by the same rate, ALM_RATE_UP (which may differ from the high limits). - The expansion feature may be suppressed in the upward direction by setting ALM_RATE_DN to zero. The expansion feature may be suppressed in the downward direction by setting ALM_RATE_UP to zero. - Additional step setpoint changes prior to complete decay of a previous expansion will expand the alarm limits in each direction to the maximum of the remaining expansion value or new expansion value. The existence of a new alarm condition may be temporarily ignored by setting the IGNORE_TIME parameter to the number of seconds to disregard the alarm. Both the reporting of the alarm and the possible change to PRE_OUT_ALM will be ignored during this time. This parameter does not delay the clearing of the existence of the alarm on return-to-normal. If the alarm condition does not persist for IGNORE_TIME seconds, it will not be reported. PRE_OUT_ALM and OUT_ALM indicate the existence of one or more selected alarm conditions per the specification of the OUT_ALM_SUM parameter. Enumerated choices of the OUT_ALM_SUM parameter and their included alarm conditions are listed below: OUT_ALM_ INCLUDED ALARM CONDITIONS SUM ANY HI_HI_ALM HI_ALM LO_ALM LO_LO_ALM 9 9 9 9 9 9 LOWs HIGHs 9 LEVEL2 9 9 LEVEL1 9 9 9 9 LO_LO 9 LO 9 HI HI_HI 9 NONE For example, if LOWs is chosen for OUT_ALM_SUM, either a LO_ALM or LO_LO_ALM being true will cause OUT_ALM to be set to true. If LEVEL1 is chosen for OUT_ALM_SUM, either a LO_ALM or HI_ALM being true will cause OUT_ALM to be set to true. The OUT_ALM parameter can be used for control purposes, for example , as an interlock signal, besides the basic function of alarm monitoring. Simple alarm calculation: static alarm limits, no expansion and no delay to detection The alarm limits will be static (HI_HI_LIM, HI_LIM, LO_LIM and LO_LO_LIM are the effective operating alarm limits) if the corresponding gain or bias is +/- INF, or the input PSP is left unconnected with status Bad – O/S. The alarm limit expansion will be disabled by setting ALM_RATE_DN and ALM_RATE_UP to zero, The detection of an alarm will be without delay setting IGNORE_TIME to zero. Additional Features of the Analogical Alarm Block The OUT_D output signalize when the IN input is not usable. When the IN.Status is Bad or (Uncertain and the STATUS_OPTS does not have the bit option “Use Uncertain as Good” set), the OUT_D value will be 1.When the IN.Status is usable the value will be zero Optionally, the OUT_D and OUT_ALM outputs will be able to inverted, when the respective bits in the INVERT_OPTS parameter were set. 2.89 Function Blocks Instruction Manual BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the Analog Alarm block will reflect the following causes: • Out of Service – When the block is in O/S mode. Supported Modes O/S, MAN and AUTO. Status Handling The block will not filter an IN value with a bad status or uncertain status (and "Use Uncertain" option in STATUS_OPTS is not set), but will instead, filter to the last usable value of PV and assign it the unusable status from IN. When the status of IN returns to a usable value (good or uncertain [and "Use Uncertain" option in STATUS_OPTS is set]), the value of PV will again be filtered toward the value of IN with the status of IN. The status of OUT is set to the status of PV (and IN) when in auto mode. If the worst quality of the stati of PV and PSP is bad, or uncertain (and "Use Uncertain" option in STATUS_OPTS is not set) the alarm test will not be performed and the status of PRE_OUT_ALM will be set to bad (non-specific). Otherwise, the alarm test will be performed and the quality of the status of PRE_OUT_ALM will be set to the worst quality of the stati of PV and PSP (good or uncertain). While the alarm condition is not being evaluated due to unusable stati, existing alarms will not be cleared and new alarms will not be generated. Prior alarm conditions may still be acknowledged. In auto mode, the status of OUT_ALM will be set to the status of PRE_OUT_ALM. In man mode, the limits status of OUT_ALM is set to double-limited. Schematic Parameters Idx Parameter Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store / Mode 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 0 None S/RO 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) 7 PV DS-65 2.90 1 to 255 0 None S 0 None S O/S Na S E D / RO PV D / RO Description See Mode Parameter Process analog value. This is the IN value after pass over the PV filter. Block Library Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value OUT DS-65 OUT_SCALE +/10% 9 OUT_SCALE DS-68 10 GRANT_DENY DS-70 11 STATUS_OPTS Bitstring(2) 12 PV_FTIME Float 13 IN 14 Units Store / Mode OUT N / Man The output value result of the block calculation. 0-100% OUT S / Man The high and low scale values to the OUT parameter. 0 na D Options for controlling access of host computer and local control panels to operating, tuning and alarm parameters of the block. See Block Options 0 Na S / O/S Non-Negative 0 Sec S Time constant of a single exponential filter for the PV, in seconds. DS-65 PV D The primary input value of the block, or PV value. PSP DS-65 PV D This is the process setpoint, which may be used for alarm limit determination. 15 HI_GAIN Float 1.1 S This gain multiplies PSP before addition of biases for HI_LIM and HI_HI_LIM. 16 LO_GAIN Float 0.9 Na S This gain multiplies PSP before subtraction of biases for LO_LIM and LO_LO_LIM. 17 HI_HI_BIAS Float Positive 1.0 Out S This bias is added to PSP*HI_GAIN to determine HI_HI_LIM. 18 HI_BIAS Float Positive 0.0 Out S This bias is added to PSP*HI_GAIN to determine HI_LIM. 19 LO_BIAS Float Positive 0.0 Out S This bias is subtracted from PSP*LO_GAIN to determine LO_LIM. 20 LO_LO_BIAS Float Positive 1.0 Out S This bias is subtracted from PSP*LO_GAIN to determine LO_LO_LIM. 21 PRE_OUT_AL M DS-66 E D/RO This parameter is the alarm summary variable of the analog alarm block. E D This parameter is the alarm summary variable of the analog alarm block when in Auto mode and is the value specified by the operator/engineer in Man mode. 0 E S Specifies the alarms conditions which must be true in order for OUT_ALM to be set to true: ANY, LOWs, HIGHs, LEVEL1, LEVEL2, LO_LO, LO, HI, or HI_HI. 0.0 OUT/se c S Ramp rate at which downward alarm expansion due to step PSP changes is decayed in the upward direction. Expressed in engineering units per second. Expansion feature disabled in the downward direction if set to zero. (Positive) 0.0 OUT/se c S Ramp rate at which upward alarm expansion due to step PSP changes is decayed in the downward direction. Expressed in engineering units per second. Expansion feature disabled in the upward direction if set to zero. (Positive) D/RO Amount, in engineering units, that base HI and HI_HI limits are expanded after a setpoint change. Dynamically calculated by block. Initially expanded by the amount of a setpoint change and decayed at the rate of ALM_RATE_UP. (Positive) Idx Parameter 8 22 OUT_ALM DS-66 Description See Block Options 0:NONE 1:LO_LO 2:LO 3:LOWs 23 OUT_ALM_SU M Unsigned8 4:HI 6:LEVEL1 8:HI_HI 9:LEVEL2 12:HIGHs 15:ANY 24 ALM_RATE_UP 25 ALM_RATE_D N 26 EXPAND_UP Float Float Float Positive Positive OUT 2.91 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Idx 27 Parameter EXPAND_DN Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Store / Mode Description D/RO Amount, in engineering units, that base LO and LO_LO limits are expanded after a setpoint change. Dynamically calculated by block. Initially expanded by the amount of a setpoint change and decayed at the rate of ALM_RATE_DN. (Positive) Sec S The time, in seconds, to ignore the existence of a new alarm condition. There is no delay on clearing the existence of the alarm on return to normal. If the alarm does not persist for IGNORE_TIME seconds, it will not be reported. Does not apply to self-clearing (transient) type alarms. Na D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. Na D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. Na S The current alert status, unacknowledged states, unreported states, and disabled states of the alarms associated with the function block. 0 Na S Selection of whether alarms associated with the block will be automatically acknowledged 0 to 50 % 0.5% % S Alarm hysteresis parameter. In order to clear the alarm the amount the PV must return within the alarm limit plus hysteresis. S Priority of the high high alarm. Float 28 IGNORE_TIME Float 29 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 30 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 31 ALARM_SUM DS-74 Units OUT Positive 0.0 See Block Options 0: Auto ACK Disable 32 ACK_OPTION Bitstring(2) 33 ALARM_HYS Float 34 HI_HI_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 0 +INF PV S The setting for high high alarm in engineering units. PV D/RO The setting for high high alarm in engineering units. 1: Auto ACK Enable 35 HI_HI_LIM Float OUT_SCALE, +INF 36 HI_HI_LIMX Float OUT_SCALE, +INF +INF 37 HI_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 0 +INF 38 HI_LIM Float OUT_SCALE, +INF 39 HI_LIMX Float OUT_SCALE, +INF +INF 40 LO_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 0 -INF 41 LO_LIM Float OUT_SCALE, INF 42 LO_LIMX Float OUT_SCALE, INF -INF 43 LO_LO_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 0 -INF -INF S Priority of the high alarm. PV S The setting for high alarm in engineering units. PV D/RO The setting for high alarm in engineering units. S Priority of the low alarm. PV S The setting for low alarm in engineering units. PV D/RO The setting for low alarm in engineering units. S Priority of the low alarm. PV S The setting for low alarm in engineering units. PV D/RO The setting for low alarm in engineering units. 44 LO_LO_LIM Float OUT_SCALE, INF 45 LO_LO_LIMX Float OUT_SCALE, INF 46 HI_HI_ALM DS-71 PV D The status for high alarm and its associated time stamp. 47 HI_ALM DS-71 PV D The status for high alarm and its associated time stamp. 48 LO_ALM DS-71 PV D The status for low alarm and its associated time stamp. 2.92 Block Library Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store / Mode Description PV D The status for low low alarm and its associated time stamp. DS_66 D/RO True: Indicate if the IN input is unusable with bad or uncertain status. Bitstring(2) S/O/S Parameter for inversion of the block discrete outputs. Idx Parameter 49 LO_LO_ALM DS-71 50 OUT_D 51 INVERT_OPTS Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters If BEHAVIOR parameter is “Adapted”: The required mode for writing is the actual mode, regardless the target mode : OUT 2.93 Function Blocks Instruction Manual ISEL - Input Selector Description The signal selector block provides selection of up to four inputs and generates an output based on the configured action. This block would normally receive it’s input from an AI or another block and not directly from a transducer. In addition to signal selection the block can also perform max, min, mid, avg and first good selection. With the combination of parameter configuration options the block can function as a rotary position switch, or a validated priority selection based on the use of the first good parameter and the DISABLE_n parameter. As a switch the block can receive switch toggle information from both the connected inputs or from an operator input. The block also supports the concept of a middle selection. Logic is provided for handling of dubious and bad signals in conjunction with configured actions. The intended application of this block is to provide control signal selection in the forward path only and is not intended to receive signals from the output of a controller, therefore, no back calculation support is provided. The algorithm has the following actions, choose by the SELECT_TYPE parameter: • Max = select the max from all the connected and good inputs • Min = select the min from all the connected and good inputs • Mid = select the middle value from all the connected and good inputs, if less than MIN_GOOD inputs are connected then an error code is generated. An error code is also generated if less than MIN_GOOD values have good status. Not intended for use with 2 or 4 inputs. Although the normal configuration for this feature would be with three signals the block will generate an average of the middle two if four signals are configured or the average of two if three are configured and a bad status is passed on one of the inputs. • First Good = determine the first good input encountered based on ascending evaluation of the inputs, see text for further discussion • Avg = compute the average for all the connected and good inputs, if less than two inputs are connected then set the output equal to the input an generate an error code. An error code is also generated if less than MIN_GOOD inputs have good status. The processing of the block is as follows: If DISABLE_n is true then the respective input IN_n is not used. Inputs whose status is bad are ignored. Process the dubious option. MIN_GOOD specifies the minimum available signals for OUT status to be good. If there are no inputs left, or fewer that MIN_GOOD inputs then set the status of OUT to Bad and the value of SELECTED to zero. Do not do selection processing. For Average (“Avg”) the status of OUT is set to worst of inputs considered, then average of the useable inputs is calculated, if none are useable then the output status is bad. When SELECT_TYPE is “Mid”, “First Good”, “Max”, or “Min”, set the status of OUT to the status of the selected input. The “First Good” option starts at the first input then the second until it encounters an input whose DISABLE_n is not set and its status is Good, and then transfers this value to the output of the block. If OP_SELECT is non-zero, the OP_SELECT value will override the SELECT_TYPE selection. SELECTED is a second output which will indicate which input has been selected by the algorithm for all SELECT_TYPE except “Avg”, when it reflects the number of inputs used in the average. The SELECTED output always has a good status, unless the block is out of service. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the ISEL block will reflect the following causes: • Block Configuration Error – the configuration error occurs when the SELECT_TYPE parameter has an invalid value; • Out of Service – it occurs when the block is in O/S mode. Supported Modes O/S, MAN and AUTO. Status Handling The status of OUT will be a copy of the selected input, but if the output is an average of inputs the status will be Good Non-cascade – Non-specific. 2.94 Block Library Schematic Parameters Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store / Mode 0 None S/RO OctString(32) Spaces Na S STRATEGY Unsigned16 0 None S 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 0 None S 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 O/S Na S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) E D/RO 7 OUT DS-65 8 OUT_UNITS Unsigned16 0 E S The engineering units of the output for display. 9 GRANT_DENY DS-70 0 Na D Options for controlling access of host computer and local control panels to operating, tuning and alarm parameters of the block. 10 STATUS_OPTS Bitstring(2) 0 Na S / O/S 11 IN_1 DS-65 D Numbered input parameter 1. 12 IN_2 DS-65 D Numbered input parameter 2. 13 IN_3 DS-65 D Numbered input parameter 3. 14 IN_4 DS-65 D Numbered input parameter 4. 15 DISABLE_1 DS-66 D Parameter to switch off the input from being used. If this parameter is true then don’t use this input IN_1 determining the output. 16 DISABLE_2 DS-66 D Parameter to switch off the input from being used. If this parameter is true then don’t use this input IN_2 determining the output. 17 DISABLE_3 DS-66 D Parameter to switch off the input from being used. If this parameter is true then don’t use this input IN_3 determining the output. Idx Parameter 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 2 TAG_DESC 3 1 to 255 XD_SCALE See Block Options OUT Description See Mode Parameter D / Man The primary analog value calculated as a result of executing the function. See Block Options 2.95 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Idx Parameter 18 DISABLE_4 Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units DS-66 Store / Mode Description D Parameter to switch off the input from being used. If this parameter is true then don’t use this input IN_4 determining the output. selector action max = select the max from all the connected and good inputs min = select the min from all the connected and good inputs 1=First good 2=MIN 19 SELECT_TYPE Unsigned8 3=MAX 0 E S 4=MID mid = select the mid value from all the connected and good inputs, if less than min_good inputs are connected then an error code is generated. An error code is also generated if less than min_good values have good status. Not intended for use with 2 or 4 inputs. First Good = determine the first good input encountered based on ascending evaluation of the inputs, see text for further discussion 5=AVG avg = compute the average for all the connected and good inputs, if less than two inputs are connected then set the output equal to the input an generate an error code. An error code is also generated if less than min_good inputs have good status 20 MIN_GOOD Unsigned8 0 through 4 0 S If the number of inputs which are good is less than the value of MIN_GOOD then set the out status to bad. None, 1= 1 21 SELECTED DS-66 2= 2 D / RO An integer indicating which input has been selected. 3= 3 4= 4 0 = Normal Operation None D An operator adjustable parameter to force a given input to be used. Selecting 0 will indicate normal operation while choosing 1 to 4 will indicate the input to be used. na D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. 1= Selects IN1 22 OP_SELECT DS-66 2= Selects IN2 3= Selects IN3 4= Selects IN4 23 24 UPDATE_EVT BLOCK_ALM DS-73 DS-72 na Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters If BEHAVIOR parameter is “Adapted”: The default value of SELECT_TYPE is First good. The required mode for writing is the actual mode, regardless the target mode : OUT 2.96 Block Library SPG/ESPG - Setpoint Ramp Generator/Enhanced Setpoint Ramp Generator Description The Setpoint generator block is normally used to generate a Setpoint to a PID block in applications like temperature control, batch reactors, etc. In those applications, the Setpoint shall follow a certain profile in function of the time. BKCAL_ IN OUT Setpoint START STEP_POSN PAUSE TIME_POSN RESET_IN Time TIME_POSN_T The block algorithm shall comply with the following: 1) The profile is determined by up to ten segments or steps. Each segment is defined by a starting value [START_VAL] and a time duration [DURATION].The starting value of the next segment determines if the previous segment ramps up, down or remains constant. The profile is given by two parallel arrays and a parameter for the time unit: START_VAL (Starting value) - Eleven floating point values defining the initial value of each step, in engineering units. DURATION (Time duration) - Ten floating point values defining the duration, in seconds, of each step. A null value defines the last step. TIME_UNITS - A contained unsigned-eight display. parameter used to specify the time units used for 2) The two arrays define the Setpoint value (y-axis) in function of the time (t-axis). Between two given points, the Setpoint is calculated by interpolation. As each segment is defined by [START_VAL]i , [DURATION]i and [START_VAL]i+1 , a profile with “n” segments will need n+1 starting values and n time durations. As example, the two following arrays define the profile shown on Fig. 1: 1 2 3 4 5 6 START_VAL 25 50 50 100 100 25 DURATION 60 60 120 60 60 0 SP (°C) 100 50 25 60 step1 60 step2 120 step3 60 step4 60 step5 t (seconds) Fig.1 - Setpoint profile 3) The timer is started by a transition from false to true at input START. 4) The timer may be interrupted at any time by changing the discrete signal PAUSE from false to true. It will resume running when PAUSE is set to false. The PAUSE will not force manual mode. 2.97 Function Blocks Instruction Manual 5) The timer is also interrupted by a PAUSE caused by the deviation between BKCAL_IN and the generated Setpoint. If the deviation exceeds DV_HI_LIM or DV_LO_LIM, an alarm is indicated in DV_HI_ALM or DV_LO_ALM, respectively. Both alarms stop the timer and resume normal operation when the deviation is within the prescribed limits. 6) The Setpoint is in the “y” axis, while the time is in the “t” axis. The Setpoint value is available at output OUT. It is also available in PRE_OUT even when the block is in Man mode. For display purpose, the engineering unit of OUT is given by OUT_SCALE. 7) Three outputs inform the current point of the profile: STEP_POSN - Informs the current segment or step. TIME_POSN - Informs the time elapsed since the beginning of the current step. TIME_POSN_T - Informs the time elapsed since the beginning of the profile. 8) With the block in manual, the operator can write on the outputs STEP_POSN, TIME_POSN and TIME_POSN_T in order to select a particular point of the profile. When the block is switched back to auto, the profile will start from that point. The timer is restarted by activating the input START. 9) With the block in manual, the operator can also modify OUT. As the adjusted value may correspond to more than one point on the profile or to none, if the operator adjusts a value beyond the profile limits, the OUT value goes from the last adjusted value to the point before mode switching following a ramp defined by BAL_TIME. 10) Another operation that can be done with the block in manual, is to advance or return the time through the following operator commands (OP_CMD_SPG): ADVANCE - sets the time to the beginning of the next step. REPEAT - sets the time to the beginning of the current step. 11) The outputs can only be modified with the block is in manual mode. 12) The operator can give a RESET command using OP_CMD_SPG with the block in any mode. The timer is set to zero, i.e., to the beginning of the profile. In this case the operator must give a new start, by switching the input START from false to true. Therefore the block may be started even though the OP_CMD_SPG remains with RESET value. 13) The input RESET_IN allows a discrete signal coming from another block to set the timer to zero. While this input parameter has value TRUE, the block will remain in reset, therefore it will be able to start only after this input parameter goes to FALSE. 14) When the time reaches the last point of the profile, it will automatically return to zero (RESET) and restart (START) automatically, if the parameter AUTO_CYCLE is set to true. 15) The operation status is given by the parameter SPG_STATE READY - When the profile is at the beginning, waiting for the starting signal. ACTIVE - When the timer is “on”. PAUSE - When the PAUSE signal stopped the timer. AT_END - When the time reaches the last point of the profile. 16) The parameter PAUSE_CAUSE enumerates the cause of the PAUSE state: 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= Operator Pause Logic Pause Operator & Logic Deviation pause Operator & Deviation Logic & Deviation Operator & Logic & Deviation Logic Pause happens when the deviation limits are exceeded or the PID block is not in Cascade mode. 2.98 Block Library 17) Sometimes there is a large deviation between the controlled variable (available in BKCAL_IN) and the profile initial value. In this situation, the timer may not be started or the control will start with a large upset. In order to avoid these problems, the parameter START_TYPE offers the following options: a - USE_CURVE- The curve starts as specified by START_VAL and DURATION. b - USE_DUR- The curve starts at BKCAL_IN value and use the duration specified. c - USE_RATE- The curve starts at BKCAL_IN value and use the rate specified by the first two START_VAL values and the first DURATION value. 18) The input BKCAL_IN can be connected to the output of an Analog Input block or to the BKCAL_OUT of a PID control block. If a PID is connected, the CONTROL_OPTS of the PID should be configured to use PV for BKCAL_OUT. If the PID is not in Cas mode when the operation status is READY (see 15), initialization will occur as described in 17. If the operation status is ACTIVE, the block will go to IMan mode and behave as described in 9 to make the value of OUT equal the value OF BKCAL_IN. Schematic BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the SPG block will reflect the following causes: • Block Configuration Error – the configuration error occurs when the START_TYPE parameter has an invalid value; • Out of Service – it occurs when the block is in O/S mode. Supported Modes O/S, IMAN, MAN and AUTO. Status Handling The input BKCAL_IN provides status. If the status of BKCAL_IN is bad and the option Use uncertain of STATUS_OPTS is set to true, the deviation alarms are not considered. If the status of any used input becomes bad or uncertain and the respective option Use bad or Use uncertain of STATUS_OPTS is not set, the block actual mode will be forced to manual. 2.99 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Parameters Idx Parameter DataType Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store / Mode 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 0 None S/RO 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 1 to 255 Description 0 None S 0 None S O/S Na S E D / RO OUT N / Man The analog value calculated as a result of executing the function. 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) 7 OUT DS-65 8 OUT_SCALE DS-68 0-100% OUT S / Man The high and low scale values to the OUT parameter. 9 GRANT_DENY DS-70 0 na D Options for controlling access of host computer and local control panels to operating, tuning and alarm parameters of the block. 10 STATUS_OPTS Bitstring(2) 0 Na S / O/S 11 START_VAL 11 Floats 12 DURATION 10 Floats OUT_SCALE +/10% See Block Options See Mode Parameter See Block Options An array of up to eleven points defines the starting point of each segment of the Setpoint profile, in engineering units. 0’s Sec S An array of up to ten points defines the duration of each segment of the Setpoint profile, in seconds. E Display Time Units for TIME_POSN and TIME_POSN_T. 1=seconds 2=minutes 13 TIME_UNITS Unsigned8 3=hours 0 4=days 5=[day[hr:[min[:sec]]]] 14 BKCAL_IN DS-65 OUT N The value and status from a lower block's BKCAL_OUT that is used to prevent reset windup and to initialize the control loop. 15 START DS-66 On/Off D A leading edge at this input or a transition from false to true starts the timer. 16 START_TYPE Unsigned8 E S This parameter selects the starting point option. D Stops the timer when set to true . Resume time running when set back to false. E This parameter enumerates the causes of PAUSE. 1=Use Curve 2=Use Duration 0 3=Use Rate 17 PAUSE DS-66 0=Not paused 1=Operator Pause 2=Logic Pause 4=Deviation Pause 18 PAUSE_CAUSE Unsigned8 3=Operator & Logic 5=Operator & Deviation 6=Logic & Deviation 7=Operator & Logic & Deviation 2.100 Block Library Idx Parameter 19 AUTO_CYCLE DataType Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Unsigned8 1:Auto cycle Units Store / Mode Description 0 E S When set to true, automatically resets the time to the beginning of the first step and restarts the timer. 0 E D / Man Determine the current step or segment of the profile in auto mode. Direct the timer to the step specified by the operator when in manual mode. Sec D / Man Determine the time elapsed since the beginning of the step in auto mode. The operator can set the time since the beginning of the current step when operating in manual. Sec Determine the time elapsed since the beginning of the curve in auto mode. The N / Man operator can set the time since the beginning of the curve when operating in manual. 0=none 20 STEP_POSN DS-66 1=step1 2=step 2 n=step n 21 22 TIME_POSN TIME_POSN_T DS-65 DS-65 0=UNDEFINED 23 OP_CMD_SPG Unsigned8 1=RESET_IN 2=ADVANCE 0 E D Enable the positioning in the profile. Enumerations are:, RESET, ADVANCE*, REPEAT*. (*only valid with the block in manual). E N Define the operating state of the block. Enumerations are: READY, ACTIVE, PAUSE and AT_END. D Displays what would be the OUT value and status if the mode was Auto or lower. D Resets the timer. 3=REPEAT 0=UNDEFINED 1=READY 24 SPG_STATE Unsigned8 2=ACTIVE 3=PAUSE 4=AT_END 25 PRE_OUT DS-65 26 RESET_IN DS-66 0:Off E 1:Reset 27 BAL_TIME Float Positive 0 sec S This specifies the time for the internal working value of bias or ratio to return to the operator set bias or ratio, in seconds. 28 OUTAGE_LIM Float Positive 0 Sec S The maximum tolerated duration for power failure. This feature is not supported. 29 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 30 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 31 ALARM_SUM DS-74 32 ACK_OPTION Bitstring(2) D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. Na D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. Na S The current alert status, unacknowledged states, unreported states, and disabled states of the alarms associated with the function block. Na S Selection of whether alarms associated with the block will be automatically acknowledged Na See Block Options 0: Auto ACK Disable 1: Auto ACK Enable 0 2.101 Function Blocks Instruction Manual DataType Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value ALARM_HYS Float 0 to 50 % 0.5% DV_HI_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 +(OUT_SCALE) or +(INF) Idx Parameter 33 34 35 DV_HI_LIM Float 36 DV_LO_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 -(OUT_SCALE) or –(INF) +INF Units Store / Mode Description % S Alarm hysteresis parameter. In order to clear the alarm the amount the PV must return within the alarm limit plus hysteresis. S Priority of the high deviation alarm. S The setting for high deviation alarm in engineering units. S Priority of the low deviation alarm. OUT S The setting for engineering units. OUT low deviation alarm in 37 DV_LO_LIM Float 38 DV_HI_ALM DS-71 OUT D The status for high deviation alarm and its associated time stamp. 39 DV_LO_ALM DS-71 OUT D The status for low deviation alarm and its associated time stamp. -INF Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters If BEHAVIOR parameter is “Adapted”: The default value of START_TYPE is “Use Curve”. The required mode for writing is the actual mode, regardless the target mode: OUT, TIME_POSN,TIME_POSN_T and STEP_POSN 2.102 Block Library Additional Features of the Enhanced Setpoint Ramp Generator Schematic Description The Enhance Setpoint Ramp Generator has an additional output parameter as it is possible to see in the schematic above. The OUT_1 output indicates the current step or segment of profile like the SPG parameter STEP_POSN. But the OUT_1 format is float. Parameters It has all parameters of the SPG block added of the Idx Parameter DataType Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store / Mode Description E D/RO This parameter identifies the current step or segment of profile. Similar to the STEP_POSN parameter but the format in this case is float. 0=None 1= Step1 40 OUT_1 DS-65 2= Step2 3= Step 3 0 4= Step 4 2.103 Function Blocks Instruction Manual TIME – Timer and Logic Description The Timer and Logic function block provides logic combination and timing functions including the following: • • • • • • • • • Combine multiple inputs as OR, AND, vote, or EXACTLY count. Measure the duration of the combined discrete input signal Accumulate, until reset, the duration of the combined input signal Count changes of the combined discrete input signal Set a discrete output if the duration of the combined input signal exceeds a limit Extend, Delay, Pulse, or Debounce the combined input as an output Provide outputs indicating amount of time expired and amount of time remaining Selectively invert any connected discrete input or output Reset timer Up to four inputs may be combined logically (ANDed, ORed), voted (any 2 or more true, any 3 or more true), or counted (exactly 1 true, exactly 2 true, exactly 3, odd count, or even count). The combined input value is specified by the combination type (COMB_TYPE) enumeration. Choices are indicated in the table below. Connected inputs may have the values of true, false, or undefined. Undefined connected inputs are treated with status bad(out-of-service). Non-connected inputs may have the values of true, false, or undefined. Undefined non-connected inputs (operator/engineer enterable) are ignored. COMB_TYPE Enumeration PV_D value OR true if one or more used inputs are true ANY2 true if two or more used inputs are true ANY3 true if three or more used inputs are true AND true if all used inputs are true EXACTLY1 true if exactly 1 used input is true EXACTLY2 true if exactly 2 used inputs are true EXACTLY3 true if exactly 3 used inputs are true EVEN true if exactly 0, 2 or 4 used inputs are true ODD true if exactly 1 or 3 used inputs are true The timer processing type is specified by TIMER_TYPE. It may operate to produce a measurement, delay, extension, pulse (non-re-triggerable or re-triggerable) or debounce, of the combined input signal. TIMER_SP is the specification for the time duration of delay, extension, pulse, debounce filter, or comparison limit. It may either be configured as an operator/engineer-entered constant or may be connected as an input, determined by another block. In either case the block will, on each execution, check to see if the current duration of the delay, extension, pulse, debounce, or time comparison exceeds the current TIMER_SP. OUT_EXP indicates the amount of time expired in the measurement, comparison, delay, extension, debounce, or pulse. See TIMER_TYPE for details. OUT_REM indicates the amount of time remaining in the comparison, delay, extension, debounce, or pulse. See TIMER_TYPE for details. QUIES_OPT allows the configurer to select the behavior for OUT_EXP and OUT_REM when the timer is quiescent-- that is, not timing and not in a triggered condition. The following table lists the definition of quiescent state for each TIMER_TYPE enumeration: 2.104 Block Library Definition of quiescent state start and end as a function of TIMER_TYPE TIMER_TYPE Quiescence state starts Quiescence state ends when combined input (PV_D): when combined input (PV_D): MEASURE returns to false changes from false-to-true ACCUM [QUIES_OPT does not apply] [QUIES_OPT does not apply] COMPARE returns to false changes from false-to-true DELAY returns to false changes from false-to-true EXTEND returns to true changes from true-to-false DEBOUNCE has changed and timer has expired changes PULSE has returned to false and timer has expired changes from false-to-true RT_PULSE has returned to false and timer has expired changes from false-to-true The CLEAR enumeration of QUIES_OPT will cause both OUT_EXP and OUT_REM to be set to zero during quiescence. The LAST enumeration of QUIES_OPT will cause both OUT_EXP and OUT_REM to be held to their values when the block becomes quiescent. That is, the time expired and time remaining will remain available until the quiescence ends with the start of the next activation. Note that a false-to-true transition on RESET_IN will also reset OUT_EXP and OUT_REM. N_START is a count of the number of starts (false-to-true) transitions of the combined input, PV_D, since the last false-to-true change seen on RESET_IN. TIMER_TYPE may be one of the following, operating on the combined input signal: • MEASURE • ACCUM • COMPARE • DELAY • EXTEND • DEBOUNCE • PULSE • RT_PULSE Indicate the duration of the most recent true signal Accumulate the durations of a true signal Compare a true signal duration to specified duration Delay a false-to-true transition, eliminating it if short Extend a true-to-false transition, eliminating it if short Delay any transition, eliminating it if short Generate a true pulse on a false-to-true transition, non-retriggerable Generate a true pulse on a false-to-true transition, retriggerable • If TIMER_TYPE is MEASURE, PRE_OUT_D will be the same as the combined input, PV_D. OUT_EXP indicates the length of time, in seconds, that the combined signal is true. OUT_REM is set to 0. true PV_D false true PRE_OUT_D false * See note 1 * See note 1 OUT_EXP 0 * See note 1 OUT_REM 0 Time * Note 1: Returns to zero if QUIES_OPT = CLEAR Timer Example when TIMER_TYPE = MEASURE 2.105 Function Blocks Instruction Manual • If TIMER_TYPE is ACCUM, PRE_OUT_D will be the same as the combined input, PV_D. OUT_EXP indicates the accumulated length of time, in seconds, that the combined signal has been true. Unlike TIMER_TYPE = MEAS, it will not be automatically reset by the time of the next occurrence of a false-to-true change of PV_D. Instead, it will continue to accumulate "on" time or "run" time until reset to 0 by a false-to-true change on RESET_IN. OUT_REM is unused (set to 0.0) for this timer type. true PV_D false true PRE_OUT_D false accumulated time (sec.) OUT_EXP 0 OUT_REM 0 Time Timer Example when TIMER_TYPE = ACCUM • If TIMER_TYPE is COMPARE, the block will measure the time since a false-to-true change on the combined input, PV_D. The current duration will be indicated by OUT_EXP. OUT_REM will indicate the time remaining between the current expired duration, OUT_EXP, and current limit, TIMER_SP. If OUT_EXP does not exceed TIMER_SP, PRE_OUT_D will be set to false. If OUT_EXP equals or exceeds TIMER_SP, PRE_OUT_D will be set to true and OUT_REM will be set to zero. When the combined input returns to false, either with or without exceeding the limits specified by TIMER_SP, OUT_D will be set to false. [Note that this type of behavior is the same as TIMER_TYPE = DELAY. The difference is merely in the application perspective true PV_D false true PRE_OUT_D false * See note 1 TIMER_SP OUT_EXP * See note 1 0 TIMER_SP * See note 1 OUT_REM 0 Time TIMER_SP TIMER_SP * Note 1: Returns to zero if QUIES_OPT = CLEAR Timer Example when TIMER_TYPE = COMPARE • 2.106 If TIMER_TYPE is DELAY, a false-to-true change on the combined input, PV_D, will be delayed at the output, PRE_OUT_D, until the amount of time specified by TIMER_SP has been expired. If the combined input returns to false before the time expires, the output will remain as false, concealing the input transitions. If the PRE_OUT_D output has been set to true because the time has expired, a true-to-false transition in the combined input will be presented to PRE_OUT_D immediately. [Note that this type of behavior is the same as TIMER_TYPE = COMPARE. The difference is merely in the application perspective.] Block Library true PV_D false true PRE_OUT_D false * See note 1 TIMER_SP * See note 1 OUT_EXP 0 TIMER_SP OUT_REM * See note 1 0 TIMER_SP TIMER_SP Time * Note 1: Returns to zero if QUIES_OPT = CLEAR Timer Example when TIMER_TYPE = DELAY • If TIMER_TYPE is EXTEND, a true-to-false change on the combined input, PV_D, will be delayed at the output, PRE_OUT_D, until the amount of time specified by TIMER_SP has been expired. If the combined input returns to true before the time expires, the output will remain as true, concealing the input transitions. If the PRE_OUT_D output has been set to false because the time has expired, a false-to-true transition in the combined input will be presented to PRE_OUT_D immediately. true PV_D false true PRE_OUT_D false * See note 1 TIMER_SP * See note 1 OUT_EXP 0 TIMER_SP OUT_REM * See note 1 0 TIMER_SP * Note 1: Returns to zero if QUIES_OPT = CLEAR TIMER_SP Time Timer Example when TIMER_TYPE = EXTEND • If TIMER_TYPE is DEBOUNCE, and if PRE_OUT_D is false, a false-to-true change on the combined input, PV_D, will be delayed at the output, PRE_OUT_D, until the amount of time specified by TIMER_SP has been expired. If the combined input returns to false before the time expires, the output will remain as false, concealing the input transitions. If PRE_OUT_D is true, a true-to-false change on the combined input, PV_D, will be delayed at the output, PRE_OUT_D, until the amount of time specified by TIMER_SP has been expired. If the combined input returns to true before the time expires, the output will remain as true, concealing the input transitions. This both delays true initiations and extends true terminations, acting as a filter for intermittent state changes. 2.107 Function Blocks Instruction Manual true PV_D false true PRE_OUT_D false * See note 1 * See note 1 TIMER_SP OUT_EXP 0 TIMER_SP OUT_REM * 0 * * Time TIMER_SP TIMER_SP TIMER_SP TIMER_SP TIMER_SP * Note 1: Returns to zero if QUIES_OPT = CLEAR Timer Example when TIMER_TYPE = DEBOUNCE • If TIMER_TYPE is PULSE, a false-to-true change on the combined input, PV_D, will initiate a true pulse at PRE_OUT_D whose duration is determined by the TIMER_SP value. At the end of the time duration, the output, will return to false. Further false-to-true transitions of the combined input while PRE_OUT_D is true will be ignored. true PV_D false true PRE_OUT_D false * See note 1 * See note 1 TIMER_SP OUT_EXP 0 TIMER_SP OUT_REM 0 TIMER_SP TIMER_SP Time * Note 1: Returns to zero if QUIES_OPT = CLEA Timer Example when TIMER_TYPE = PULSE • If TIMER_TYPE is RT_PULSE, (Re-Triggerable pulse type) a false-to-true change on the combined input, PV_D, will initiate a true pulse at PRE_OUT_D whose duration is determined by the TIMER_SP value. At the end of that time duration PRE_OUT_D will return to false. If the combined input returns to false and presents a subsequent false-to-true transition while the timer is timing, the timer shall be reinitialized and PRE_OUT_D shall continue to be true. true PV_D false true PRE_OUT_D false * See note 1 * See note 1 TIMER_SP OUT_EXP 0 TIMER_SP OUT_REM 0 TIMER_SP TIMER_SP TIMER_SP * Note 1: Returns to zero if QUIES_OPT = CLEAR Time Timer Example when TIMER_TYPE = RT_PULSE 2.108 Block Library RESET_IN is a discrete input which, on a false-to-true transition, resets the timer. OUT_EXP is set to 0.0, and then the timer follows processing described under "Initial Value Handling" regarding the value of PRE_OUT_D and OUT_REM. If RESET_IN is not connected, an operator/engineer may set it to true. In this case, the block logic will reset it to false on its next execution. TIME_UNITS allows the user to specify to the HMI the units of time in which TIMER_SP, OUT_EXP and OUT_REM are to be displayed. Each bit in INVERT_OPTS, if set, indicates that the corresponding discrete-with-status input or output parameter is inverted. That is, input values are inverted prior to use by the block and outputs are inverted after the value is determined by the block. Inicialization The following table summarizes the values of PRE_OUT_D, OUT_EXP and OUT_REM after the initial execution, as a function of TIMER_TYPE and the initial value of the combinated input, PV_D: TIMER_TYPE MEASURE MEASURE ACCUM ACCUM COMPARE COMPARE DELAY DELAY EXTEND EXTEND DEBOUNCE DEBOUNCE PULSE PULSE RT_PULSE RT_PULSE PV_D False True False True False True False True False True False True False True False True PRE_OUT_D False True False True False False False False True True False True False False False False OUT_EXP 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 TIMER_SP † 0.0 TIMER_SP † 0.0 0.0 TIMER_SP † TIMER_SP † TIMER_SP † 0.0 TIMER_SP † 0.0 TIMER_SP † OUT_REM 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 TIMER_SP † 0.0 TIMER_SP † TIMER_SP † 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Timer Status Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Active Inactive Active Active Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive † Initialize to TIMER_SP value if QUIES_OPT = LAST, initialize to 0.0 if QUIES_OPT = CLEAR. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the TIME block will reflect the following causes: • Block Configuration Error – the configuration error occurs when the TIME_UNITS or QUIES_OPT parameters have an invalid value; • Out of Service – it occurs when the block is in O/S mode. Modes Supported O/S, MAN and AUTO. Schematic 2.109 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Parameters Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store / Mode 0 None S/RO OctString(32) Spaces Na S STRATEGY Unsigned16 0 None S 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 0 None S 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 O/S Na S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) E D/RO This is the timer duration used by the timer block for delay, extension, debouncing, and pulse timeprocessing. 7 PV_D DS-66 RO Either the primary discrete value for use in executing the function, or a process value associated with it. 8 OUT_D DS-66 D The primary discrete value calculated as a result of executing the function. 9 TIMER_SP Float 10 PV_STATE Unsigned16 0 S Index to the text describing the states of a discrete PV. 11 OUT_STATE Unsigned16 0 S Index to the text describing the states of a discrete output. 12 GRANT_DENY DS-70 0 Na D Options for controlling access of host computer and local control panels to operating, tuning and alarm parameters of the block. 13 INVERT_OPTS Bitstring(2) See Block Options 0 Na S / O/S See Block Options 14 STATUS_OPTS Bitstring(2) See Block Options 0 Na S / O/S See Block Options 15 IN_D1 DS-66 D Numbered discrete input parameter 1. 16 IN_D2 DS-66 D Numbered discrete input parameter 2. 17 IN_D3 DS-66 D Numbered discrete input parameter 3. 18 IN_D4 DS-66 D Numbered discrete input parameter 4. Idx Parameter 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 2 TAG_DESC 3 1 to 255 Positive 0 Sec Description See Mode Parameter S 0=AND 1=OR 2=ANY2 3=ANY3 19 COMB_TYPE Unsigned8 21=EXACTLY1 1 E S Determines how the multiple IN_D[i] values are combined. 0 E S Type of time-processing applied determine the PRE_OUT_D. 22=EXACTLY2 23=EXACTLY3 40=EVEN 41=ODD 0=MEASURE 1=ACCUM 2=COMPARE 20 TIMER_TYPE Unsigned8 3=DELAY 4=EXTEND to PV_D to 5=DEBOUNCE 6=PULSE 7=RT_PULSE 21 PRE_OUT_D DS-66 22 N_START Unsigned16 2.110 None RO This parameter is the combined and time-processed output of the timer block. D/RO Count of false-to-true transitions of the combined input, PV_D. Reset by false-to-true transition of RESET_IN. Block Library Idx 23 Parameter OUT_EXP Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value DS-65 24 OUT_REM DS-65 25 RESET_IN DS-66 26 QUIES_OPT Unsigned8 Units Sec Sec Store / Mode Description N / RO This is the time expired. Stops when TIMER_SP is reached. Reset to zero (1) by RESET_IN, (2) at start of next timer event if QUIES_OPT = LAST, or (3) when block becomes quiescent if QUIES_OPT = CLEAR. N / RO This is the time remaining if the timer is active. Stops when event ceases (block becomes quiescent). Reset to 0.0 if QUIES_OPT = CLEAR, and the timer is inactive. 0=Off Resets the timer. 1=Reset 1=CLEAR 2=LAST 0 E S / O/S Behavior option for OUT_EXP and OUT_REM during quiescence. CLEAR resets them to zero. LAST causes last values to be held. 0 E S Display Time Units for TIMER_SP, OUT_EXP, and OUT_REM: na D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. 1=seconds 2=minutes 27 TIME_UNITS Unsigned8 3=hours 4=days 5=[day[hr:[min[:sec]]]] 28 29 UPDATE_EVT BLOCK_ALM DS-73 DS-72 na Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters If BEHAVIOR parameter is “Adapted”: The default value of TIME_UNITS is “Seconds”. The default value of QUIES_OPT is “CLEAR”. 2.111 Function Blocks Instruction Manual LLAG - Lead Lag Description The LLAG block provides dynamic compensation of the IN parameter. The block can function as a lead or lag device. The user would configure the LEAD_TIME and LAG_TIME parameters to obtain the desired input/output relationship. This block would normally be used in a feedforward portion of a control scheme or used to implement some special initialization functions required by a control scheme. This block will normally participate in a feedforward path. The FOLLOW parameter is used to cause the block to perform tracking functions whereby the output is forced to track the input whenever the FOLLOW parameter is set true. The LAG_TIME parameter specifies the time constant for the block. Based on a step change to the input this is the time to reach 63.2% of the final value. Normally, it requires five time constants to reach the final value based on a first order function applied to the input. The LEAD_TIME parameter specifies the gain or impulse applied to the input parameter. The generalized form of the equation describing the action is as follows: (T1s+1)/(T2s+1) where: T 1 = Lead time Constant T 2 = Lag Time Constant Supported Modes O/S, MAN and AUTO. Schematic Parameters Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store / Mode 0 None S/RO OctString(32) Spaces Na S STRATEGY Unsigned16 0 None S 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 0 None S 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 O/S Na S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) E D/RO 7 OUT DS-65 OUT D Idx Parameter 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 2 TAG_DESC 3 2.112 1 to 255 Description See Mode Parameter The primary analog value calculated as a result of executing the function. Block Library Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Idx Parameter 8 OUT_UNITS Unsigned16 9 GRANT_DENY DS-70 10 STATUS_OPTS Bitstring(2) 11 IN DS-65 12 FOLLOW DS-66 13 LAG_TIME 14 See Block Options Units Store / Mode Description 0 E S The maximum tolerated duration for power failure. 0 Na D Options for controlling access of host computer and local control panels to operating, tuning and alarm parameters of the block. 0 Na S / O/S See Block Options D The primary input value of the block, required for blocks that filter the input to get the PV. Na D Tracking input, when true causes the output to track the input. DS-65 Sec D Specifies the lag time constant for the block. Based on a step change to the input this is the time to reach 63.2% of the final value. LEAD_TIME DS-65 Sec D Specifies the lead time constant applied to the input parameter. 15 BAL_TIME Float Positive 0 Sec S This specifies the time for the internal working value of bias or ratio to return to the operator set bias or ratio, in seconds. 16 OUTAGE_LIM Float Positive 0 Sec S 17 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 na D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. 18 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 True=follow na The maximum tolerated duration for power failure. This feature is not supported. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters If BEHAVIOR parameter is “Adapted”: The required mode for writing is the actual mode, regardless the target mode: OUT. 2.113 Function Blocks Instruction Manual OSDL - Output Signal Selector and Dynamic Limiter Description The output signal selector and dynamic limiter block (OSDL) provides two different algorithms types: As Output Selector the cascade input may be routed for one of two outputs based on the value of the OP_SELECT input parameter. The output not selected may have two ways: keeping the last value when not selected, or receive a internal value. As Dynamic Limiter the cascade input is transferred to both output, but it is limited by the secondary inputs multiplied by a gain, plus a bias. The Dinamic LIMITER is extremely useful in one of its most important applications: combustion control with double cross limits. The OSDL_TYPE parameter determines the algorithm used by the OSDL block. In order to change the OSDL_TYPE the block must be in Out of Service mode. Output Signal Selector The SP value may be controlled by an operator (Auto mode) or through a cascade control (Cas mode). In the cascade control the SP is supplied by another function block through the CAS_IN parameter. The inputs IN and IN_1 do not apply in this algorithm. It means that the block ignores the status and values of IN and IN_1 when the OSDL_TYPE is Output Selector. The OP_SELECT is a discrete input parameter that selects one of two outputs to receive SP parameter. When the OP_SELECT is zero, the OUT parameter receives the SP parameter. Otherwise the OUT_1 parameter receives the SP parameter. When the OP_SELECT status is not usable, the block changes to Auto, but the algorithm goes on working with the unusable value. Most of the times, the SP is transferred to the selected output whatever is the status. Therefore, an unusable value and status in the CAS_IN will be reflected to the selected output. Only the status of upper cascade initialization will not be copied to the selected output. Handling the non-selected output There are two ways to handle the non-selected output, if the “Keep last value if not selected” bit in OSDL_OPTS parameter is true, the non-selected output will keep the last value. Otherwise it will receive the value contained in the NOT_SEL_VAL or NOT_SEL_VAL_1, the outputs OUT and OUT_1 respectively. The non-selected output receives the uncertain status indicating to the downstream block that it is not selected any more. The configuration of the STATUS_OPTS in the downstream block will define how to deal with it. IFS status propagation If the “IFS only for selected output” bit in OSDL_OPTS parameter is true, the fault state status will be propagated only to selected output. Otherwise the status GoodCascade -IFS is propagated to both outputs, that is the default configuration. Downstream block is not in cascade If the downstream block of the selected output is not in cascade mode, the OSDL block goes to Iman mode. And the status of BKCAL_OUT will be GoodCascade – Not Invited, it will force the upstream block to Iman mode too. If the downstream block of the non-selected output is not in cascade mode, the OSDL block will ignore it. Dynamic Limiter As a dynamic limiter algorithm, the outputs are the value of the “CAS_IN” parameter limited by the following values: OUT: High limit = HI_GAIN_1 * IN_1 + HI_BIAS_1 Low limit = LO_GAIN_1 * IN_1 - LO_BIAS_1 OUT_1: 2.114 Block Library High limit = HI_GAIN * IN + HI_BIAS Low limit = LO_GAIN * IN - LO_BIAS After the limitation, the parameters GAIN and GAIN_1 are applied as gain for the outputs OUT and OUT_1, respectively. The normal mode of operation for the OSDL block is Cas, as well the two downstream blocks. If one downstream block is not in cascade mode, indicated by not invited status (NI) on its BKCAL_OUT, the OSDL block still continues in cascade mode. Only if both downstream blocks are not in cascade, then the OSDL changes to Iman mode and its BKCAL_OUT output changes to NI. If the OSDL block is in Iman mode, when the cascade is initialized with a IR by a downstream block, the respective output (OUT or OUT_1) sends a IA for the downstream block and the BKCAL_OUT of the OSDL block receive the value of the respective BKCAL_IN. The OSDL block remains in IMAN mode until the downstream cascade is initialized. Then OSDL block goes to Auto mode and it sends an IR to upstream block to initialize the cascade. After a downstream cascade initialization, the corresponding output must ramp from the last BKCAL_IN to the calculated value in BAL_TIME seconds. The required actions as a dynamic limiter algorithm are summarized in the following table: Mode target/actual BKCAL_ IN BKCAL_ IN1 BKCAL_ OUT Cas/Iman NI or IR NI or IR NI Cas/Cas NI or IR OK OK BKCAL_OUT receive the CAS_IN value Cas/Cas OK NI or IR OK BKCAL_OUT receive the CAS_IN value. Cas/Cas ACTION OK OK OK BKCAL_OUT receive the CAS_IN value. Legend: NI-not invited; IR-initialization request; OK-working in cascade Optionally, when the block is working as “Dynamic Limiter, it can choose if the return value for the upper block through the BKCAL_OUT output will be SP, Out or OUT_1, as showed below: • BKCAL_OUT = SP (default) • BKCAL_OUT = OUT (when OSDL_OPTS = “Use OUT for BKCAL_OUT”). • BKCAL_OUT = OUT_1 (When OSDL_OPTS = “Use OUT_1 for BKCAL_OUT_1”). BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the OSDL block will reflect the following causes: • Block Configuration Error – the configuration error occurs when the OUT_TYPE parameter has an invalid value. • Out of Service – When the block is in O/S mode. 2.115 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Schematic Supported Modes O/S, IMAN, AUTO and CAS. Status Handling Standard, plus the following: When one or both of the IN’s input are Bad, special limiting action must be taken. If the “IFS if Bad IN_x “ or “IFS if Bad CAS_IN “ bit is true in the OSDL_OPTS parameter and the respective input is Bad, both output status go to “good IFS”. If the bit is not true, the block goes to AUTO mode. Sub-Status values received in CAS_IN will be passed onto both outputs, except for those used in the cascade initialization. An IFS will go to both the selected and the non-selected output. Parameters Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store/ Mode 0 None S/RO Spaces Na S Idx Parameter 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) 7 CAS_IN DS-65 8 SP DS-65 9 IN DS-65 D The primary input value of the block. 10 IN_1 DS-65 D Numbered input parameter 1. 11 OP_SELECT DS-66 D An operator adjustable parameter to force a given input to be used. 12 OUT DS-65 D / RO The primary analog value calculated as a result of executing the function. 13 OUT_1 DS-65 D / RO Numbered output parameter 1. S / O/S Options for controlling access of host computer and local control panels to operating, tuning and alarm parameters of the block. 14 2.116 GRANT_DENY DS-70 1 to 255 0 None S 0 None S O/S Na S E D/RO D Description See Mode Parameter This parameter is the remote setpoint value, which must come from another Fieldbus block, or a DCS block through a defined link. N / Auto The analog set point. 0 thru 4 None 0 Na Block Library Idx Parameter Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store/ Mode Description 0 : Invalid Value 15 OUT_TYPE Unsigned8 1 : Output Selector 0 E S / Man This parameter specifies the algorithm type that will be calculated. 2 : Dynamic Limiter Option bit processing. string for handling the block 16 OSDL_OPTS Bitstring(2) 0 Na S / O/S 17 HI_GAIN Float 1.1 None S It is used to calculate the high limit for OUT_1. This gain multiplies IN before adding HI_BIAS. 18 HI_BIAS Float S It is used to calculate the high limit for OUT_1. This bias is added to IN after multiplying by HI_GAIN. 19 LO_GAIN Float S It is used to calculate the low limit for OUT_1. This gain multiplies IN before subtracting LO_BIAS. 20 LO_BIAS Float S It is used to calculate the low limit for OUT_1. This bias is subtracted of IN after multiplying by LO_GAIN. 21 HI_GAIN_1 Float S It is used to calculate the high limit for OUT. This gain multiplies IN_1 before adding HI_BIAS_1. 22 HI_BIAS_1 Float S It is used to calculate the high limit for OUT. This bias is added to IN_1 after multiplying by HI_GAIN_1. 23 LO_GAIN_1 Float S It is used to calculate the low limit for OUT. This gain multiplies IN_1 before subtracting LO_BIAS_1. 24 LO_BIAS_1 Float S It is used to calculate the low limit for OUT. This bias is subtracted of IN_1 after multiplying by LO_GAIN_1. 25 GAIN Float 1 None S Gain applied to OUT after limiting. 26 GAIN_1 Float 1 None S Gain applied to OUT_1 after limiting. 27 BKCAL_IN DS-65 N The value and status from a lower block's BKCAL_OUT that is used to prevent reset windup and to initialize the control loop. 28 BKCAL_IN_1 DS-65 N The back calculated input required to initialize a lower cascade 1. 29 BKCAL_OUT DS-66 D The value and status required by an upper block’s BKCAL_IN so that the upper block may prevent reset windup and provide bumpless transfer to closed loop control. 30 BAL_TIME Float 0 S This specifies the time for the internal working value of bias or ratio to return to the operator set bias or ratio, in seconds. 27 NOT_SEL_VAL Float 0 S Contained parameter that will set the respective output when OUT is not selected by the OP_SELECT. 28 NOT_SEL_VAL_1 Float 0 S Contained parameter that will set the respective output when OUT_1 is not selected by the OP_SELECT. 33 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. Positive 0 0.9 Positive 0 1.1 Positive None 0 0.9 Positive None None 0 Sec na 2.117 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Idx 34 Parameter Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store/ Mode Description The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become BLOCK_ALM DS-72 na D active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters If BEHAVIOR parameter is “Adapted”: The default value of OUT_TYPE is “Dynamic limiter”. The required mode for writing is the actual mode, regardless the target mode: SP. 2.118 Block Library DENS - Density Overview This function block has an algorithm to calculate density in different kinds of engineering units, as Plato degree, Brix, TC and INPM. Schematic Description The algorithm to calculate the density is based on the pressure in two points of the tank in a known difference height. The calculation is done using the average from the sensor pressure samples (the number of the samples is determined by the NUM_SAMPLES parameter). Then, the previous density is calculated using the following formula: D= Conv _ factor * ( P _ 1 − P _ 2) ⎡ g ⎤ 3 ⎢ ⎥⎦ cm ⎣ HEIGHT * GRAVITY Where in the formula above the average pressure is given by: NUM _ SAMPLES P _i = ∑ IN _ i j =1 NUM _ SAMPLES [PRESSURE _ UNITS ] Conv_Factor is a factor to transform the formula coeficients in the same units. HEIGHT and GRAVITY ≠ 0 The temperature is compensated in the density calculation. The DENS_OUT parameter is the 3 compassed density in g/cm . The OUT parameter is the compensated density in a different engineering unit for chosen by the EU_SEL parameter. The density block provides alarm condition and the discrete alarm output to be used any block. If the density exceeds HI_LIM or LO_LIM an alarm is indicated in HI_ALM or LO_ALM and the output OUT_D will be set to true. If one or both of the limit parameters are set +/- INF this indicate that this alarm is disabled. The RESET_IN is a discrete input, which on a false-to-true transition resets the density block. Including the previous density, the round buffer and all outputs of the block. The status will be the same as the last cycle. 2.119 Function Blocks Instruction Manual BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the DENS block will reflect the following causes: Out of Service – it occurs when the block is in O/S mode. Supported Modes O/S, MAN and AUTO. Mode Handling Manual mode disconnects the outputs from the algorithm and permits manual substitution of the OUT, DENS_OUT, OUT_D values for test or other purposes. Although the OUT_D parameter is also disconnected from the alarm, the alarm and the limits (OUT_HI_LIM and OUT_LO_LIM) continue to check the output. Status Handling The primary input status (IN_1 and IN_2 parameters) are propagated to the outputs. If the status of any primary input becomes bad or uncertain and their respective option “use uncertain” of STATUS_OPTS is not set, the actual mode block will be forced to manual and the algorithm stops the calculation. If the secondary input (IN_3 parameter) is unusable, the algorithm uses the last usable value and the output status will be Uncertain. A bad status in RESET_IN input does not stop the algorithm. If target mode is Man then the output status is Good. Parameters DataType Valid Range/ Default Units Store/ Mode 0 None S/RO OctString(3 2) Spaces Na S STRATEGY Unsigned16 0 None S 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 0 None S 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 O/S Na S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) E D / RO OUT D / Man The analog value calculated as a result of executing the function. 0-100% OUT S / Man The high and low scale values to the OUT parameter. 0 E S / Man Selection of engineering unit for density. 0 na D 0 Na S / O/S Idx Parameter 4 ST_REV Unsigned16 5 TAG_DESC 6 (length) 7 OUT DS-65 8 OUT_SCALE DS-68 Options 1 to 255 Value OUT_SCALE +/- 10% Description See Mode Parameter 0:Plato degree 1:Brix 9 EU_SEL Unsigned8 10 GRANT_DENY DS-70 11 STATUS_OPTS Bitstring(2) 12 IN_1 DS-65 D The first input (pressure P1) must have the same engineering units of IN_2. 13 IN_2 DS-65 D The second input (pressure P2) must have the same engineering units of IN_1. 14 IN_3 DS-65 D The third input. (Temperature T in Degrees Celsius) 15 PRESSURE_UNITS Unsigned16 S This is the pressure engineering unit of IN_1 and IN_2. 2:TC 3:INPM 2.120 See Block Options See valid pressure units 1144 (g/cm2) E See Block Options Block Library Idx Parameter DataType Valid Range/ (length) Options Default Value Units Store/ Mode Description 16 HEIGHT Float Positive 1000.0 mm S Distance between the two pressure transmitters. The engineering units must be compatible to the inputs IN_1 and IN_2. If it is mmH20, the EU of HEIGHT is mm. 17 GRAVITY Float Positive 9.80665 m/s2 S The gravity acceleration used in the density calculation, the EU of GRAVITY is m/s2. 18 NUM_SAMPLES Unsigned16 1-1000 10 Na S Number of samples. 19 NUM_AVERAGES Unsigned16 1-30 10 Na S Number of averages in the round buffer. 3 g/cm D / Man The density compensated by the temperature. g/cm3 S / RO This is the engineering unit of DENS_OUT that is fixed in g/cm3. DS-66 D This is a discrete output parameter to indicate alarm state. RESET_IN DS-66 D When it is true, it resets the average calculation and it clears the round buffer of averages. 24 OUT_HI_LIM Float 100 OUT S High limit for OUT. 25 OUT_LO_LIM Float 0 OUT S Low limit for OUT. 26 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 Na D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. 20 DENS_OUT DS-65 21 DENS_UNITS Unsigned16 22 OUT_D 23 1100 27 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 Na D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. 28 ALARM_SUM DS-74 Na S The current alert status, unacknowledged states, unreported states, and disabled states of the alarms associated with the function block. 0 Na S Selection of whether alarms associated with the block will be automatically acknowledged 0.5% % S Alarm hysteresis parameter. In order to clear the alarm the amount the PV must return within the alarm limit plus hysteresis. S Priority of the high alarm. S The setting for high alarm in engineering units. S Priority of the low alarm. OUT S The setting for low alarm in engineering units. OUT D The status for high alarm and its associated time stamp. 0: Auto ACK Disable 29 ACK_OPTION Bitstring(2) 30 ALARM_HYS Float 31 HI_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 1: Auto ACK Enable 0 to 50 % 32 HI_LIM Float OUT_SCALE, +INF 33 LO_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 34 LO_LIM Float OUT_SCALE, INF 35 HI_ALM DS-71 36 LO_ALM +INF -INF OUT The status for low alarm and its associated time stamp. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters DS-71 OUT D If BEHAVIOR parameter is “Adapted”: The required mode for writing is the actual mode, regardless the target mode : OUT, DENS_OUT, 2.121 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Valid Pressure Units 2.122 Index Unit 1130 PA 1133 KPA 1132 MPA 1137 BAR 1138 MBAR 1139 TORR 1140 ATM 1141 PSI 1144 GCM2 1145 KGCM2 1148 INH20 1147 INH204C 1151 MMH20 1150 MMH204C 1154 FTH20 1156 INHG 1158 MMHG Block Library CT – Constant Overview The Constant function block generates constant values to use in input parameters of other blocks. It can also read/write in contained parameters of other blocks into the same device. Schematic Description The Constant function block has two functions: • As Constant: It generates constant values to use in input parameters of other blocks. This block allows up to 6 discrete constant and 6 analogical constant. • As Contained RW: The input writes in contained parameters of any other block into the same device. The output reads data of the contained parameters of any other block into the same device. Generating Constant Values for other Blocks This block can generate up to six discrete outputs and 6 analogic outputs, where: • The OUT_1 to OUT_4 and OUT_D1 to OUT_D4 outputs become available in the output the constant values of CT_VALxx and CT_STATUS_xx. • The OUT_5, OUT_6, OUT_D5 and OUT_D6 outputs have the feature Reading of Contained Parameter of other blocks and are associated with the LOC_OUT_xx parameter. If these parameters are not configured, the output will show the CT_VAL_xx abd CT_STATUS_xx constant values. If the Mode is Man, it is allowed the manual substitution of all ouput values. In the Auto mode, the output values are the respective constant values. Reading or Writing from/to Contained Variables of other blocks The writing and/or reading in the contained parameters of other blocks is associated to the block execution in the Auto mode. Input Treatment – Writing in Contained Parameters During the block execution in the Auto mode, the block writes the value of the IN_xx parameter in a 1 parameter of any other block in the same device. The value will be written in the parameter configured in the following situations: • While the value had a usable valuein the IN_xx input (i.e., IN_xx Status was Good or Uncertain and the option “Use Uncertain as Good” in STATUS_OPTS was set). • The DISABLE_IN_xx input is usable and with FALSE value, or when the IN_xx input was with an usable value. 2.123 Function Blocks Instruction Manual • • For the IN_Dx inputs will just be done the writing when the actual value was different of the previous. This avoids cyclical writing in static parameters which causes a cyclical increment of the ST_REV and event generation by the UPD_EVT. For the IN_x inputs will just be done the writing when the actual value was upper or lower that DEAD_BAND_x. In this range would not have writing in the parameter. When the DEAD_BAND_X parameter is equal zero, it means continued writing. If the writing does not accomplish in the desired block, the input with failure will be indicated in the BAD_STATUS parameter. Output Treatment – Reading of the Contained Parameters 1 During the block execution in the Auto mode, the block reads the parameter value of any other block in the same device and become available in the OUT_xx. VALUE parameter. The Ouput status will be GoodNonCascade in this case. If the block does not read the parameter, the correspondet output with failure will be indicated in the BAD_STATUS parameter, and also OUT_xx.STATUS = Bad No Comm. When the LOC_OUT_xx parameter was not configured (BLOCK_TAG = Spaces or the RelativeIndex is equal a zero and the SubIndex is equal zero), thus the OUT_xx output makes available the correspondent constatnt value and status (CT_VAL_xx and CT_STATUS_xx). Configuration of Contained Parameter to be Read/Write To address the contained parameter, the respective input or output will have a LOC_xxx parameter composed of the following structure (DS-262): E Element Name Data Type Length Description 1 BlockTag VisibleString(32) 32 Block Tag which it desired to monitor (the tag is case sensitive). 2 RelativeIndex Unsigned16 2 Parameter Index relative. 1 Parameter Subindex beginning byr 1. When the parameter was a structure (DS_xxx), it indicates the Structure Element number. When it was BitString parameter, it indicates the byte of the parameter to be considered. In simple parameters this subindex is not considered. 3 SubIndex Unsigned8 The input/output is considered NOT CONFIGURED when the BlockTag was blank or the RelativeIndex and the SubIndex was equal zero. When there was a configuration error in the contained parameter, the correspondent bit of the input/output in CONFIG_STATUS will be set and the BLOCK_ERR will indicate “Configuration Error”. 1 The reading or writing is not supported in all parameter types. The table below summarizes the operations supported by the block: 2.124 Block Library Parameter Input/Output Data Type Direction From Data Type from / Other Block Parameter To IN_x Float In_x Other Block Parameter In_Dx Unsigned8 In_Dx Other Block Parameter Out_x Float Other Block Parameter Out_x Out_Dx Unsigned8* Other Block Parameter Out_Dx Boolean * Float Integer8 * Integer16 * Integer32 Unsigned8 * Unsigned16 * Unsigned32 Bitstring * Boolean Float Integer8 Integer16 Integer32 Unsigned8 Unsigned16 Unsigned32 Bitstring * Boolean Float Integer8 Integer16 Integer32 Unsigned8 Unsigned16 Unsigned32 Bitstring Boolean Float Integer8 Integer16 Integer32 Unsigned8 Unsigned16 Unsigned32 Bitstring Note 1: The data type assigned with * means the block will cut the values out of range of the correspondent type: - Unsigned 8 / Bitstring – 0 to 255 - Integer 8 – (-127) a (+127) - Boolean – 0 and 1 - Unsigned16 – 0 to 65535 - Integer16 – (-32767) to (+32767) Note 2: For the BitString type, the Subindex identifies the correspondent Byte. Note 3: The reading or writing in contained parameters are not supported in the same block Constant. Supported modes O/S, MAN, AUTO Parameters Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Idx Parameter 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) 1 to 255 Units Store / Mode 0 None S/RO Spaces Na S 0 None S 0 None S O/S Na S E D/RO Description See Mode Parameter 2.125 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store / Mode Idx Parameter Description 7 OUT_1 DS-65 N / Man Numbered output 1. 8 OUT_2 DS-65 D / Man Numbered output 2. 9 OUT_3 DS-65 D / Man Numbered output 3. 10 OUT_4 DS-65 D / Man Numbered output 4. 11 OUT_5 DS-65 D / Man Numbered output 5. This output can have the value of a constant CT_VAL_xx or the value of a contained parameter from another block depends on if the LOC_OUT_5. 12 OUT_6 DS-65 D / Man Numbered output 6. This output can have the value of a constant CT_VAL_xx or the value of a contained parameter from another block depends on if the LOC_OUT_6. 13 OUT_D1 DS-66 N / Man Numbered discrete output 1. 14 OUT_D2 DS-66 D / Man Numbered discrete output 2. 15 CT_VAL_1 Float 0 S Analog constant value transferred to the output OUT_1. 16 CT_VAL_2 Float 0 S Analog constant value transferred to the output OUT_2. 17 CT_VAL_3 Float 0 S Analog constant value transferred to the output OUT_3. 18 CT_VAL_4 Float 0 S Analog constant value transferred to the output OUT_4. 19 CT_VAL_5 Float 0 S Analog constant value transferred to the output OUT_5. 20 CT_VAL_6 Float 0 S Analog constant value transferred to the output OUT_6. 21 CT_VAL_D1 Unsigned8 0 S Discrete constant value transferred to the output OUT_D1. 22 CT_VAL_D2 Unsigned8 0 S Discrete constant value transferred to the output OUT_D2. 23 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. Na 24 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 25 CT_VAL_D3 Unsigned8 0 S Discrete constant value transferred to the output OUT_D3. 26 CT_VAL_D4 Unsigned8 0 S Discrete constant value transferred to the output OUT_D4. 27 CT_VAL_D5 Unsigned8 0 S Discrete constant value transferred to the output OUT_D5. 28 CT_VAL_D6 Unsigned8 0 S Discrete constant value transferred to the output OUT_D6. 29 CT_STATUS_1 Unsigned8 GNC S Constant Status transferred to the output OUT_1. 30 CT_STATUS_2 Unsigned8 GNC S Constant Status transferred to the output OUT_2. 31 CT_STATUS_3 Unsigned8 GNC S Constant Status transferred to the output OUT_3. 2.126 Na Block Library Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Store / Mode Description GNC S Constant Status transferred to the output OUT_4. Unsigned8 GNC S Constant Status transferred to the output OUT_5. CT_STATUS_6 Unsigned8 GNC S Constant Status transferred to the output OUT_6. 35 CT_STATUS_D1 Unsigned8 GNC S Constant Status transferred to the output OUT_D1. 36 CT_STATUS_D2 Unsigned8 GNC S Constant Status transferred to the output OUT_D2. 37 CT_STATUS_D3 Unsigned8 GNC S Constant Status transferred to the output OUT_D3. 38 CT_STATUS_D4 Unsigned8 GNC S Constant Status transferred to the output OUT_D4. 39 CT_STATUS_D5 Unsigned8 GNC S Constant Status transferred to the output OUT_D5. 40 CT_STATUS_D6 Unsigned8 GNC S Constant Status transferred to the output OUT_D6. 41 OUT_D_3 DS-66 D/Man Numbered discrete output 3 42 OUT_D_4 DS-66 D/Man Numbered discrete output 4 D/Man Numbered discrete output 5.This output can have the value of a CT_VAL_XX or the value of a contained parameter from another block depends on if the LOC_OUT_D5. Idx Parameter 32 CT_STATUS_4 Unsigned8 33 CT_STATUS_5 34 43 OUT_D_5 Units DS-66 44 OUT_D_6 DS-66 D/Man Numbered discrete output 6.This output can have the value of a CT_VAL_xx or the value of a contained parameter from another block depends on if the LOC_OUT_D6. 45 IN_1 DS-65 D Analog input that writes to a contained parameter configured in the LOC_IN_1. 46 DISABLE_1 DS-66 D Disable the IN_1 writing in the correspondent contained parameter.. 47 LOC_IN_1 DS-262 S / OOS Indicate which the contained parameter will be written by the IN_1 input. 48 DEAD_BAND_1 Float S Dead band for the IN_1 input where the variation into this range would not cause writing in the block parameter. 49 IN_2 DS-66 D Analog input that writes to a contained parameter configured in the LOC_IN_2. 50 DISABLE_2 DS-66 D Disable the IN_2 writing in the correspondent contained parameter. 51 LOC_IN_2 DS-262 S / OOS Indicate which the contained parameter will be written by the IN_2 input. 52 DEAD_BAND_2 Float S Dead band for the IN_2 input where the variation into this range would not cause writing in the block parameter. 53 IN_D_1 DS-66 D Discrete input that writes to a contained parameter configured in the LOC_IN_D1. 54 DISABLE_D1 DS-66 D Disable the IN_D1 writing in the correspondent contained parameter 55 LOC_IN_D1 DS-262 S / OOS Indicate which the contained parameter will be written by the IN_D1 input. 1.0 1.0 IN_1 IN_2 2.127 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Store / Mode Description DS-66 D Discrete input that writes to a contained parameter configured in the LOC_IN_D2. DISABLE_D2 DS-66 D Disable the IN_D2 writing in the correspondent contained parameter 58 LOC_IN_D2 DS-262 S / OOS Indicate which the contained parameter will be written by the IN_D2 input. 59 LOC_OUT_5 DS-262 S / OOS Indicates which contained parameter will be read for the OUT_5 output. 60 LOC_OUT_6 DS-262 S / OOS Indicates which contained parameter will be read for the OUT_6 output. 61 LOC_OUT_D5 DS-262 S / OOS Indicates which contained parameter will be read for the OUT_D5 output. 62 LOC_OUT_D6 DS-262 S / OOS Indicates which contained parameter will be read for the OUT_D6 output 63 BAD_STATUS Bitstring(2) D/RO Writing/reading status of the parameter. The set bit indicates the algorithm does not get read/write the specified “Block.Parameter”. 64 CONFIG_STATUS Bitstring(2) D/RO Indicates which input configuration error. 65 STATUS_OPTS Bitstring(2) S/ OOS Idx Parameter 56 IN_D_2 57 Units or outpt is with See the parameter description in “Function Block Options”. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters If BEHAVIOR parameter is “Adapted”: The required mode for writing is the actual mode, regardless the target mode: OUT_1, OUT_2, OUT_3, OUT_4, OUT_5, OUT_6, OUT_D1 and OUT_D2. BAD_STATUS and CONFIG_STATUS Bitstring Bit Description 0 IN_1 1 IN_2 2 IN_D1 3 IN_D2 4 OUT_5 5 OUT_6 6 OUT_D5 7 OUT_D6 2.128 Block Library FFET - Flip-Flop and Edge Trigger Overview It can be configured to work as: • SR flip-flop • RS flip-flop • D-latch • Rising edge trigger • Falling edge trigger • Bi-directional edge trigger Schematic Description The following tables summarize the block behavior: RESET_IN SET_IN OUT_D (SR flip-flop) OUT_D (RS flip-flop) L L Qn-1 Qn-1 H L L L L H H H H H H L RESET_IN SET_IN IN_D1 IN_D2 OUT_D (D-latch) L H X X H H L X X L H H X X H L L Rising L L L L Rising H H L L H,L or Falling X OUT_Dn-1 2.129 Function Blocks Instruction Manual RESET_IN SET_IN IN_D1 OUT_D (Rising Edge) OUT_D (Falling Edge) OUT_D (Bi-directional) L L Rising H L H L L Falling L H H L L No transition L L L X H X H H H H L X L L L BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the FFET block will reflect the following causes: - Out of Service – When the block is in O/S mode. Supported Modes O/S, MAN and AUTO. Idx Parameter Parameters DataType Valid Range/ (length) Options Default Value Units Store / Mode 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 0 None S/RO 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) 1 to 255 0 None S 0 None S O/S Na S E D / RO E S / Man Description See Mode Parameter 0 : SR flip-flop 1 : RS flip-flop 2 : D-latch 7 DISC_OP Unsigned8 3 : rising edge Selection of discrete operation. 4 : falling edge 5 : bi-directional edge 8 STATUS_OPTS Bitstring(2) S / O/S 9 IN_D1 DS-66 D Numbered discrete input 1. 10 IN_D2 DS-66 D Numbered discrete input 2. 11 SET_IN DS-66 D The set input. 12 RESET_IN DS-66 D The reset input. 13 OUT_D DS-66 14 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 15 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 0 : Off 1 : set 0 : Off 1 : reset N / Man Na Na The output of flip-flop. D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. If BEHAVIOR parameter is “Adapted”: The required mode for writing is the actual mode, regardless the target mode : OUT_D. 2.130 Block Library AEQU – Advanced Equations Overview This block was specially designed to support specific calculations. Schematic Description As this block has a general purpose, some parameters may not be used by a selecteled equation. It follows a description of each equation type, as well the meaning of used parameters: Ln x : It calculates natural logarithm. Inputs : IN_1 : input to the function, x. Configurable parameters: None Outputs : OUT : result of natural logarithm Log x : It calculates base 10 logarithm. Inputs : IN_1 : input to the function, x. Configurable parameters: None Outputs : OUT : result of base 10 logarithm Exp x : It calculates e to power of x. Inputs : IN_1 : input to the function, x. Configurable parameters: None Outputs : OUT : result of e to power of x. Dew point temperature : It calculates the dew point temperature , water vapor saturation pressure (psia) and water vapor pressure (pw). 2.131 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Inputs : IN_1 : dry bulb temperature (F) IN_2 : relative humidity (percent) Configurable parameters: None Outputs : OUT : dew point temperature OUT_1 : water vapor saturation pressure (psia) OUT_2 : water vapor pressure (pw) Special : Reserved option. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the AEQU block will reflect the following causes: • Out of Service – When the block is in O/S mode. • Block Configuration Error – When an abnormal result occurs (+/- INF, NaN). Supported modes O/S, MAN, AUTO. Parameters Data Type Valid Range/ Default Units Store / Mode None S/RO Idx Parameter 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 0 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 0 None S 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 0 None S 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 O/S Na S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) E D/RO E S / Man (length) Options 1 to 255 Value Description See Mode Parameter 0 : Ln x 1 : Log x 7 EQ_TYPE Unsigned8 2 : Exp x 0 Equation type 3 : Dew Point Temperature 255 : Special 8 IN_1 DS-65 D Numbered input 1. 9 IN_2 DS-65 D Numbered input 2. 10 IN_3 DS-65 D Numbered input 3. 11 IN_4 DS-65 D Numbered input 4. 12 IN_D1 DS-66 D Numbered discrete input 1. 13 IN_D2 DS-66 D Numbered discrete input 2. 14 OUT DS-65 D / Man Primary output. 15 OUT_D1 DS-66 D / Man Numbered discrete output 1. 16 OUT_1 DS-65 D / RO Numbered output 1. 17 OUT_2 DS-65 D / RO Numbered output 2. 18 CT_VAL_1 Float 0 S Constant value 1. 19 CT_VAL_2 Float 0 S Constant value 2. 20 CT_VAL_3 Float 0 S Constant value 3. 21 CT_VAL_4 Float 0 S Constant value 4. 22 CT_VAL_5 Float 0 S Constant value 5. 23 CT_VAL_6 Float 0 S Constant value 6. 24 CT_VAL_D1 Unsigned8 0 S Integer constant value 1. 2.132 Block Library Idx Parameter Data Type Valid Range/ (length) Options Default Value Units Store / Mode Description 25 CT_VAL_D2 Unsigned8 0 S Integer constant value 2. 26 OUT_HI_LIM Float 100 OUT S High limit for OUT. 27 OUT_LO_LIM Float 0 OUT S Low limit for OUT. D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. 28 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 Na Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters 2.133 Function Block Instruction Manual Modbus Function Blocks MBCF – ModBus Configuration Overview This block allows configuration of several communication parameters of the Modbus protocol. Description This block allows setting parameters of the communication between DFI302 and Modbus slave devices through Ethernet and serial (EIA232). User defines rate of transference of data of the serial ports, parity, timeout and number of retransmissions. Note Every time a MODBUS parameter is changed it is necessary to set the ON_APPLY parameter of the MBCF block to “Apply”. Otherwise these alterations will not be effective. User must set ONLY one MBCF block for each device. MODBUS Addresses User must attribute a Modbus address to the DFI302. However this address cannot be the same of any other device in the Modbus network to whom it is connected in the serial and Ethernet mean. In this case user must set the parameter DEVICE_ADDRESS. The default value of this parameter is 247. In applications where the DFI302 acts as master TCP/IP user will have also to inform the IP address of the devices in the parameter SLAVE_ADRESSES. Parameters MASTER_SLAVE and MEDIA These parameters set the DFI302 behavior and media where the communication is done. In the MASTER_SLAVE parameter is defined if the DFI302 will work as a slave or master MODBUS device. MEDIA may be serial or TCP/IP. It is necessary that DEVICE_ADDRESS is unique within the MODBUS network. Rate of transference of the serial ports It is possible to select the baudrate of data in the serial ports. They may be set through the parameter BAUD_RATE. It allows the selection among the following baudrates: - 0:100 bps - 1:300 bps - 2:600 bps - 3:1200 bps - 4:2400 bps - 5:4800 bps - 6:9600 bps(default) - 7:19200 bps - 8:38400 bps - 9:57600 bps - 10:115200 bps Parity Parameter PARITY defines the type o parity to the serial ports. - 0: No parity - 1: Even Parity - 2: Odd parity Timeout, number of retransmissions Timeout is the time waited for answer from a slave after a message having been sent to the serial port or Ethernet. The default value is 1000 ms. This parameter is directly connected with the parameter NUMBER_RETRANSMISSIONS. Number of retransmissions is the number of times the DFI302 will retry to establish communication with the slave device after not getting a reply. The time waited for this answer is set by the TIME_OUT parameter. The number of retransmissions is chosen through the NUMBER OF RETRANSMISSIONS parameter. User may select a value in the range 0 to 255 to this parameter. The default value is 1. 2.134 Block Library Parameters Idx Parameter DataType (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store/ Mode S/RO Description 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 0 None 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 0 None S 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 0 None S 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 O/S Na S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) E D / RO 7 MEDIA Unsigned8 0:Serial, 1:TCP/IP Serial E S Define the type of Modbus channel. 8 MASTER_SLAVE Unsigned8 0:Master, 1:Slave Slave E S Define if DFI is master or slave. 9 DEVICE_ADDRESS Unsigned8 0-247 1 E S Define the DFI Modbus address (only for DFI slave). 19200 E S Define the baud rate (only for media serial). 1 E S Define the number of stop bits (only for media serial). Even E S Define the parity (only for media serial). 1000 ms S Time to wait a response from a slave (for DFI master) or time to wait the OUTs be updated (for DFI slave). S Number of retransmission if DFI doesn’t receive response from slave. S IP number and modbus addresses of slaves ( only for DFI master in TCP/IP media); S Indicate if after a communication fail with slave, there will be a new transmission after the time defined in TIME_TO_RESTART (only for DFI master). S When the device is working as master, it is the time between the periodic scan that commands. S Enable or not handshaking. S Apply the changes made in the modbus blocks. 1 to 255 10 BAUD_RATE Unsigned8 0:110, 1:300, 2:600, 3:1200, 4:2400, 5:4800, 6:9600, 7:19200, 8:38400, 9:57600, 10:115200 11 STOP_BITS Unsigned8 0:1, 1:2 12 PARITY Unsigned8 0:None, 2:Odd. 13 TIMEOUT Unsigned16 0-65535 14 NUMBER_RETRANS MISSIONS Unsigned8 15 SLAVE_ADDRESSES DS-263 16 RESTART_MODBUS Boolean 17 TIME_TO_RESTART Unsigned16 18 RTS_CTS Boolean 19 ON_APPLY Unsigned8 1:Even, 0-255 1 FALSE 1-65535 1 s FALSE 0:None, 1: Apply None E See Mode Parameter It configures for the Standby if it will test the Modbus communication with the slave devices. 20 CHECK_COMM_STA NDBY Unsigned8 0 ~ 255 0 NA S / RW 0: Disable test. 1 – 255: Enable test defining the time interval between each test (s). Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S – static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters 2.135 Function Block Instruction Manual MBCS – ModBus Control Slave Overview MBCS supervision READ MOD_VAR_IN Modbus WRITE MOD_VAR_OUT DF 5 1 DFI slave1 FF block slave2 in out MBCS modbus address by local_mod_map Master (PLC) FF block MOD_VAR_IN=MBCS.IN.VALUE after conversion MBCS.OUT.VALUE=MOD_VAR_OUT after conversion Description MBCS block generates a communication strategy between a MODBUS master and a FIELDBUS FOUNDATION slave. In the present case, the slave is the Smar’s linking device DFI302 that has slave behavior for the MODBUS network. It allows MODBUS variables to be associated with FIELDBUS variables and data between these two “worlds” to be exchanged through DFI302. Note Every time a MODBUS parameter is changed it is necessary to set the ON_APPLY parameter of the MBCF block to “Apply”. Otherwise these alterations will not be effective. Inputs and Outputs This block has 4 digital inputs, 4 analog inputs, 4 digital outputs and 4 analog outputs that may be connected to other FIELDBUS function blocks or to the MODBUS world. • • • • IN1, IN2, IN3 and IN4 are analog inputs. IN_D1, IN_D2, IN_D3 and IN_D4 are digital inputs. OUT1, OUT2, OUT3 and OUT4 are analog outputs. OUT_D1, OUT_D2, OUT_D3 and OUT_D4 are digital outputs. Digital outputs and Digital inputs are of the DS-66 data type. Thus they contain both a Status and a value (both Unsigned 8). The analog outputs and inputs are of the DS-65 data type, containing status and value as well. Type of values is Float. For more details (see on Chapter 1, “Data Type and Data Structure Definition”) Parameter LOCAL_MOD_MAP This parameter defines the address range of the MODBUS addresses attributed to the input and output FIELDBUS variables of the MBCS block. In order to set this parameter properly user needs first to check the tables below : 2.136 Block Library LOCA MOD_MAP (MBCS) PARAMETER IN1-Value IN2-Value IN3-Value IN4-Value LOCAL_MOD_MAP = x e.g. OFFSET = 40 * x LOCAL_MOD_MAP x = 0 ~ 15 =1 40001+ OFFSET 40041 40002+ OFFSET 40042 40003+ OFFSET 40043 40004+ OFFSET 40044 40005+ OFFSET 40045 40006+ OFFSET 40046 40007+ OFFSET 40047 40008+ OFFSET 40048 40009+ OFFSET 40049 40010+ OFFSET 40050 40011+ OFFSET 40051 40012+ OFFSET 40052 40013+ OFFSET 40053 40014+ OFFSET 40054 40015+ OFFSET 40055 40016+ OFFSET 40056 IN1-Status 40017+ OFFSET 40057 IN2-Status 40018+ OFFSET 40058 IN3-Status 40019+ OFFSET 40059 IN4-Status 40020+ OFFSET 40060 OUT1-Status 40021+ OFFSET 40061 OUT2-Status 40022+ OFFSET 40062 OUT3-Status 40023+ OFFSET 40063 OUT4-Status 40024+ OFFSET 40064 IN_D1-Status 40025+ OFFSET 40065 IN_D2-Status 40026+ OFFSET 40066 IN_D3-Status 40027+ OFFSET 40067 IN_D4-Status 40028+ OFFSET 40068 OUT_D1-Status 40029+ OFFSET 40069 OUT_D2-Status 40030+ OFFSET 40070 OUT_D3-Status 40031+ OFFSET 40071 OUT_D4-Status 40032+ OFFSET 40072 IN_D1-Value 1+ OFFSET 41 IN_D2-Value 2+ OFFSET 42 IN_D2-Value 3+ OFFSET 43 IN_D2-Value 4+ OFFSET 44 OUT_D1-Value 5+ OFFSET 45 OUT_D2-Value 6+ OFFSET 46 OUT_D3-Value 7+ OFFSET 47 OUT_D4-Value 8+ OFFSET 48 OUT1-Value OUT2-Value OUT3-Value OUT4-Value Note in the table that: LOCAL_MOD_MAP= X OFFSET = 40*X The second column of the table above shows the values that are attributed to the Inputs and Outputs of the MBCS block according to the value set for LOCAL_MODE_MAP. For example, if LOCAL_MOD_MAP is set equal to 1 it will result in the MODBUS range of addresses showed in the third column. It must be clear that when this parameter is set, a whole range is selected, not a specific address. 2.137 Function Block Instruction Manual INn and OUTn values use two MODBUS registers (for example IN1, 40041 and 40042) because their data type is float. IN_Dn and OUT_Dn values use one MODBUS register (for example IN_D1, 41). Status values also use only one register. Once this MODBUS range is defined, it is possible to set how the MODBUS master will read them. This block allows Modbus Scale Conversion, to do the conversion procedure see the item “Modbus Scale Conversion” in the Chapter 1for more details. Output Status If the OUTs aren’t updated by Modbus Master in a time specified by user (parameter TIMEOUT in MBCF), it will be generated a “bad status”. If TIMEOUT < Macrocycle, TIMEOUT = Macrocycle.Once all parameters are set as mentioned above, now it is possible to use them in your control strategy. The MODBUS master could now see all the MBCS inputs and outputs. Thus it is possible to link them at user’s convenience. Reading from DF I/O modules and then passing their values to the MODBUS master, or setting values in the MODBUS master and then passing them to DF I/O modules. Now each input and output are associated with MODBUS addresses the MODBUS master is able to read their values from the address DEVICE_ADDRESS (set on the MBCF block) and specific MODBUS address (set here). Schematic BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the MBCS block will reflect the following causes: • Other: it occurs when the conversion from Y to DATA_TYPE_IN results in a value out of range of this data type. • Out of Service: it occurs when the block is in O/S mode. Parameters DataType Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store / Mode None S/RO Idx Parameter 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 0 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 0 None S 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 0 None S 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 O/S Na S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) E D / RO 7 LOCAL_MOD_MAP Unsigned8 8 IN1 DS-65 1 to 255 0 to 15 0 S / O/S N 9 SCALE_CONV_IN1 DS-256 S / O/S 10 IN2 DS-65 N 2.138 Description See Mode Parameter Define the Modbus addresses. Analog input 1 Information to generate constants A and B em equation Y=A*X+B. Analog input 2 Block Library DataType Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store / Mode Idx Parameter Description 11 SCALE_CONV_IN2 DS-256 S / O/S 12 IN3 DS-65 N 13 SCALE_CONV_IN3 DS-256 S / O/S 14 IN4 DS-65 N 15 SCALE_CONV_IN4 DS-256 S / O/S 16 IN_D1 DS-66 N Discrete input 1 17 IN_D2 DS-66 N Discrete input 2 18 IN_D3 DS-66 N Discrete input 3 19 IN_D4 DS-66 N Discrete input 4 20 OUT1 DS-65 N / Man Analog output 1 21 SCALE_CONV_OUT1 DS-257 S / O/S Information to generate constants A and B em equation Y=A*X+B plus output status. 22 OUT2 DS-65 N / Man Analog output 2 23 SCALE_CONV_OUT2 DS-257 S / O/S Information to generate constants A and B em equation Y=A*X+B plus output status. 24 OUT3 DS-65 N / Man Analog output 3 Information to generate constants A and B em equation Y=A*X+B plus output status. Information to generate constants A and B em equation Y=A*X+B. Analog input 3 Information to generate constants A and B em equation Y=A*X+B. Analog input 4 Information to generate constants A and B em equation Y=A*X+B. 25 SCALE_CONV_OUT3 DS-257 S / O/S 26 OUT4 DS-65 N / Man Analog output 4 27 SCALE_CONV_OUT4 DS-257 S / O/S Information to generate constants A and B em equation Y=A*X+B plus output status. 28 OUT_D1 DS-66 N / Man Discrete output 1 29 STATUS_OUT_D1 Unsigned8 S / O/S Status to OUT_D1 if master will not update. 30 OUT_D2 DS-66 N / Man Discrete output 2 31 STATUS_OUT_D2 Unsigned8 S / O/S Status to OUT_D2 if master will not update. 32 OUT_D3 DS-66 N / Man Discrete output 3 33 STATUS_OUT_D3 Unsigned8 S / O/S Status to OUT_D3 if master will not update. 34 OUT_D4 DS-66 N / Man Discrete output 4 35 STATUS_OUT_D4 Unsigned8 S / O/S Status to OUT_D4 if master will not update. 36 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 37 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 Na Na D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters 2.139 Function Block Instruction Manual MBSS – ModBus Supervision Slave Overview MBSS supervision of modbus variables Master Modbus DF51 DFI slave1 H1 slave2 FY LD DFI_OD MBSS ana 1 ana 2 dis 1 dis 2 LD_OD FY_OD block_tag/Relative_index/subindex modbus address by local_mod_map Description MBSS block generates a communication strategy between a MODBUS master and a FIELDBUS FOUNDATION slave. In the present case, the slave is the Smar’s linking device DFI302 that has slave behavior for the MODBUS network. The MBSS block allows that FIELDBUS variables are monitored. Unlike the MBCS block, the MBSS does not have inputs or outputs that may be connected. In another words, links to other function blocks cannot be made. It will allow only the MODBUS master to monitor specific variables set. For example, suppose there is a PID function block in a FIELDBUS control strategy and it is required to visualize this value in the MODBUS master. With the MBSS this value may be monitored. Note Every time a MODBUS parameter is changed it is necessary to set the ON_APPLY parameter of the MBCF block to “Apply”. Otherwise these alterations will not be effective. I_IDn, F_IDn, B_IDn parameters I_IDn are integer variables, F_IDn are float variables and D_IBn refers to boolean variables. These parameters are of the DS-262 data type, which has 3 elements, and their descriptions are in the Chapter 1 “Data Type and Structure Definitions”. 2.140 Block Library LOCAL_MOD_MAP parameter This parameter will attribute MODBUS address to the variables you need to monitor. See table below: LOCAL_MOD_MAP (MBSS) LOCAL_MOD_MAP = x e.g. OFFSET = 40 * x LOCAL_MOD_MAP x = 0 ~ 15 =1 42601+ OFFSET 42641 42602+ OFFSET 42642 42603+ OFFSET 42643 42604+ OFFSET 42644 42605+ OFFSET 42645 42606+ OFFSET 42646 42607+ OFFSET 42647 42608+ OFFSET 42648 42609+ OFFSET 42649 42610+ OFFSET 42650 42611+ OFFSET 42651 42612+ OFFSET 42652 42613+ OFFSET 42653 42614+ OFFSET 42654 42615+ OFFSET 42655 42616+ OFFSET 42656 42617+ OFFSET 42657 42618+ OFFSET 42658 42619+ OFFSET 42659 42620+ OFFSET 42660 42621+ OFFSET 42661 42622+ OFFSET 42662 42623+ OFFSET 42663 42624+ OFFSET 42664 BVALUE1 2601+ OFFSET 2641 BVALUE2 2602+ OFFSET 2642 BVALUE3 2603+ OFFSET 2643 BVALUE4 2604+ OFFSET 2644 BAD_STATUS 42625+OFFSET 42665 PARAMETER FVALUE1 FVALUE2 FVALUE3 FVALUE4 FVALUE5 FVALUE6 FVALUE7 FVALUE8 IVALUE1 IVALUE2 IVALUE3 IVALUE4 LOCAL_MOD_MAP= X OFFSET = 40*X Once values for LOCAL_MOD_MAP are set, MODBUS ADDRESSES are given to the variables you wish to monitor. So, each integer, float or boolean variable will have a MODBUS address associated. For example, suppose LOCAL_MODE_MAP = 1 and a float value will be monitored. Picking the F_ID1 and setting its parameters, we have: F_ID1.Tag = Tag of the float parameter necessary to monitor F_ID1.Index= Index of the first column of the parameter necessary to monitor. F_ID1.subindex = The subindex is used for parameters that have a structure. In this case it is necessary to indicate which element of the structure is being referred. See the table above The MODBUS addresses given to this parameter (remember, float values use two MODBUS registers) are 42641 and 42642. 2.141 Function Block Instruction Manual BAD_STATUS Parameter This parameter indicates if the Fieldbus communication is OK or no. If the correspondent bit is in logic level 1 this means there was an error during writing/reading of the respective parameter. The table below presents the values for these status values. Relation between the bits in BAD_STATUS and Modbus addresses BIT PARAMETER 0 FVALUE1 1 FVALUE2 2 FVALUE3 3 FVALUE4 4 FVALUE5 5 FVALUE6 6 FVALUE7 7 FVALUE8 8 IVALUE1 9 IVALUE2 10 IVALUE3 11 IVALUE4 12 BVALUE1 13 BVALUE2 14 BVALUE3 15 BVALUE4 BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the MBSS block will reflect the following causes: • Block Configuration Error: If it is requested a tag with a data type different from permitted or invalid or not found block tag; • Out of Service: it occurs when the block is in O/S mode. Remarks BVALUEx parameters can address FF block parameters of the following data types: boolean, integer8 and unsigned8. Those data types are automatically converted to bit ( 0 or 1) and vice versa for Modbus supervision and also converted to boolean parameter (BVALUEx). IVALUEx parameters can address FF block parameters of the following data types: Integer8, Integer16, Integer32, Unsigned8, Unsigned16 and Unsigned32. Each analog parameter (IVALUEx) is mapping as two analog registers in Modbus, ie, four bytes. Thus, when addressing a FF block parameter with one or two bytes, such parameter will be promoted to Unsigned32 or Integer32. If Relative Index = 5 (MODE_BLK) e Sub Index = 0, it is performed a writing in Sub Index 1 and a reading in Sub Index 2. Parameters Idx Parameter DataType (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store / Mode S/RO 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 0 None 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 0 None S 4 5 ALERT_KEY MODE_BLK Unsigned8 DS-69 0 O/S None Na S S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) E D / RO 2.142 1 to 255 Description See Mode Parameter Block Library Idx Parameter DataType (length) 7 LOCAL_MOD_MAP Unsigned8 8 F_ID1 FVALUE1 DS-262 F_ID2 FVALUE2 DS-262 F_ID3 FVALUE3 DS-262 F_ID4 FVALUE4 DS-262 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 F_ID5 Float Float Float Float F_ID6 DS-262 19 FVALUE6 Float 20 F_ID7 DS-262 21 FVALUE7 Float 22 F_ID8 DS-262 23 FVALUE8 Float 24 I_ID1 IVALUE1 38 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 0 0 Integer32 0 Integer32 B_ID4 BVALUE4 0 0 I_ID4 IVALUE4 B_ID3 BVALUE3 0 DS-262 Integer32 B_ID2 BVALUE2 0 Integer32 DS-262 I_ID3 IVALUE3 B_ID1 BVALUE1 0 0 FVALUE5 I_ID2 IVALUE2 0 0 18 27 0 to 15 Default Value Float DS-262 17 25 26 Valid Range/ Options DS-262 0 DS-262 0 DS-262 Boolean TRUE DS-262 Boolean DS-262 TRUE Boolean TRUE DS-262 Boolean TRUE Units Store / Mode S / O/S Description Define the modbus addresses. S / O/S Information to locate float parameter. N Value from requested float parameter. S / O/S Information to locate float parameter. N Value from requested float parameter. S / O/S Information to locate float parameter. N Value from requested float parameter. S / O/S Information to locate float parameter. N S / O/S Value from requested float parameter. Information to locate float parameter. N Value from requested float parameter. S / O/S Information to locate float parameter. N Value from requested float parameter. S / O/S Information to locate float parameter. N Value from requested float parameter. S / O/S Information to locate float parameter. N Value from requested float parameter. S / O/S Information to locate integer parameter. N S / O/S Value from requested integer parameter. Information to locate integer parameter. N Value from requested integer parameter. S / O/S Information to locate integer parameter. N Value from requested integer parameter. S / O/S Information to locate integer parameter. N Value from requested integer parameter. S / O/S Information to locate boolean parameter. N Value from requested boolean parameter. S / O/S Information to locate boolean parameter. N S / O/S Value from requested boolean parameter. Information to locate boolean parameter. N Value from requested boolean parameter. S / O/S Information to locate boolean parameter. N Value from requested boolean parameter. This alert is generated by any change to the static UPDATE_EVT DS-73 Na D data. The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will BLOCK_ALM DS-72 Na D set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. This parameter indicates if the status of BAD_STATUS BitString (2) D/RO correspondent variable is bad or not. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters 2.143 Function Block Instruction Manual MBCM – ModBus Control Master Overview Description This block allows control of communication in a strategy where the DFI302 is a MODBUS master and the slaves may exchange data between them and with the DFI302. With this block it is not only possible to read MODBUS variables, but also writing variables in the MODBUS world, exchange data and interact with the FIELDBUS FOUNDATION control strategy. Note Every time a MODBUS parameter is changed it is necessary to set the ON_APPLY parameter of the MBCF block to “Apply”. Otherwise these alterations will not be effective. LOCAL_MOD_MAP parameter All MBCM blocks added to the strategy must have different values for LOCAL_MOD_MAP. Otherwise the block will not work properly. Inputs and Outputs This block has 4 digital inputs and outputs and 4 analog inputs and outputs. These inputs and outputs may be connected to other FIELDBUS function blocks in order to be connected to MODBUS I/O modules or registers. • • • • 2.144 INn: Analog input. DS-65 Data type. Value and Status. (See on Chapter 1, “Data Type and Data Structure Definition”). In this parameter user will visualize the value of the parameter set for this input and its status. IN_Dn: Digital input. DS-66 Data type. Value and Status. (See on Chapter 1, “Data Type and Data Structure Definition”). In this parameter user will visualize the value of the parameter set for this input and its status OUTn: Analog output. DS-65 Data type. Value and Status. (See on Chapter 1, “Data Type and Data Structure Definition”). In this parameter user will visualize the value of the parameter set for this output and its status. OUT_Dn: Digital output. DS-66 Data type. Value and Status. (see on Chapter 1, “Data Type and Data Structure Definition”).In this parameter user will visualize the value of the parameter set for this output and its status Block Library SCALE_LOC_INn and SCALE_LOC_OUTn These parameters are of the DS-259 data type. They both convert the value to Engineering Units and address the variable in the MODBUS network. The INn and OUTn inputs and outputs have SCALE_LOC_INn and SCALE_LOC_OUTn parameters associated. It is necessary to set these parameters so the monitoring and data exchanges are properly made. Each one of these parameters consists of the following elements: √ From Eu 100 % √ From Eu 0 % √ To Eu 100 % √ To Eu 0 % √ Data Type √ Slave Address √ Modbus Address of Value √ Modbus Address of Status This block allows Modbus Scale Conversion, to do the conversion procedure see the item “Modbus Scale Conversion” in the Chapter 1 for more details. The Modbus status is related with the Modbus value. Thus, when the “MODBUS_ADDRESS_OF_STATUS” parameter was configured, it is necessary to configure also “MODBUS_ADDRESS_OF_VALUE”. The treatment of inputs and outputs are described in the table below: Input/Ouput Status Configured Status Not Configured (MODBUS_ADDRESS_OF_STATUS ≠ 0) (MODBUS_ADDRESS_OF_STATUS = 0) Inputs The block sends to the modbus slave device the status corresponding of its input.( The status has the FF standard format) (IN_n , IN_Dn) Outputs (OUT_n, OUT_Dn) The block reads from the slave device the corresponding status. ( The block make the interpretation that the modbus variable is the same format of FF Status) No status information is sent to the slave device. - The block updates the status to “Good Non Cascade” when the communication with the modbus slave device is ok. - The block update the status to “Bad No Communication with last value” when the communication with the modbus slave device is not ok. Float values use two MODBUS registers, but it is necessary only to inform the first one. Setting the inputs and outputs of the MBCM block To read a MODBUS variable, connect it to an output of the MBCM function block. To write in a MODBUS register connect it to an input of the MBCM block. Generally MODBUS address are : The standard of the Modbus protocol specifies the division of the address range to the variables. • • • • 0001 to 9999 => Digital Outputs 10001 to 19999 => Digital Inputs. 30001 to 39999 =>Analog Inputs. 40001 to 49999 => Analog Outputs Once the variables required to be mapped are defined and referenced in the MBCM block it is now possible to set the strategy. It is possible to connect the variables to other FIELDBUS function blocks (Connect the output or input of the block to blocks in the strategy), to write in MODBUS registers (Connect the Input of the MBCM block to a MODBUS register). Exchanging data between two slaves (set the input of the MBCM block with the slave address and specific MODBUS address where the value will be written and set the output of the MBCM block with the slave address and MODBUS address of the variable where the value will be read). This last application is showed below: 2.145 Function Block Instruction Manual BAD_STATUS Parameter This parameter indicates if the communication between slaves was established properly. If the correspondent bit is in logic level 1 this means there was an error during writing/reading of the respective parameter. The table below presents the values for these status values. Relation between the bits in BAD_STATUS and Modbus addresses BIT PARAMETER 0 IN1 1 IN2 2 IN3 3 IN4 4 IN_D1 5 IN_D2 6 IN_D3 7 IN_D4 8 OUT1 9 OUT2 10 OUT3 11 OUT4 12 OUT_D1 13 OUT_D2 14 OUT_D3 15 OUT_D4 Remarks Each bit corresponds to an OR between the value and status, indicating if communication with slave is good or bad. • If it is only used the value, the status is considered zero. • If it is only used the status, the value is considered zero. Schematic 2.146 Block Library BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the MBCM block will reflect the following causes: • Other: it occurs when the conversion from Y to DATA_TYPE_IN results in a value out of range of this data type. • Out of Service: it occurs when the block is in O/S mode. Parameters DataType Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store / Mode None S/RO Idx Parameter 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 0 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 0 None S 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 0 None S 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 O/S Na S 1 to 255 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) 7 LOCAL_MOD_MAP Unsigned8 8 BAD_STATUS Bitstring(2) 9 IN1 DS-65 N 10 SCALE_LOC_IN1 DS-259 S/M 11 IN2 DS-65 N 12 SCALE_ LOC_IN2 DS-259 S/M 13 IN3 DS-65 N 14 SCALE_ LOC_IN3 DS-259 S/M 15 IN4 DS-65 N 16 SCALE_ LOC_IN4 DS-259 S/M E 0 to 15 0 0 E Description See Mode Parameter D / RO S / O/S Define the Modbus addresses. D / RO Indicate if communication from slave is good or not (each bit corresponds to a Modbus variable). 17 IN_D1 DS-66 N 18 LOCATOR_IN_D1 DS-261 S / O/S 19 IN_D2 DS-66 N 20 LOCATOR_IN_D2 DS-261 S / O/S 21 IN_D3 DS-66 N 22 LOCATOR_IN_D3 DS-261 S / O/S Analog input 1 Information to generate constants A and B em equation Y=A*X+B plus the addresses in a slave device. Analog input 2 Information to generate constants A and B em equation Y=A*X+B plus the addresses in a slave device. Analog input 3 Information to generate constants A and B em equation Y=A*X+B plus the addresses in a slave device. Analog input 4 Information to generate constants A and B em equation Y=A*X+B plus the addresses in a slave device. Discrete input 1 Addresses in a slave device. Discrete input 2 Addresses in a slave device. Discrete input 3 Addresses in a slave device. 23 IN_D4 DS-66 N 24 LOCATOR_IN_D4 DS-261 S / O/S Addresses in a slave device. 25 OUT1 DS-65 N / Man Analog output 1 26 SCALE_ LOC_OUT1 DS-259 S/M 27 OUT2 DS-65 N / Man 28 SCALE_ LOC_OUT2 DS-259 S/M 29 OUT3 DS-65 N / Man 30 SCALE_ LOC_OUT3 DS-259 S/M Discrete input 4 Information to generate constants A and B em equation Y=A*X+B plus the addresses in a slave device. Analog output 2 Information to generate constants A and B em equation Y=A*X+B plus the addresses in a slave device. Analog output 3 Information to generate constants A and B em equation Y=A*X+B plus the addresses in a slave device. 2.147 Function Block Instruction Manual DataType Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Parameter 31 OUT4 DS-65 N / Man 32 SCALE_ LOC_OUT4 DS-259 S/M 33 OUT_D1 DS-66 N / Man 34 LOCATOR_OUT_D1 DS-261 S / O/S Addresses in a slave device. 35 OUT2_D2 DS-66 N / Man Discrete output 2 36 LOCATOR_OUT_D2 DS-261 S / O/S Addresses in a slave device. 37 OUT_D3 DS-66 N / Man Discrete output 3 38 LOCATOR_OUT_D3 DS-261 S / O/S Addresses in a slave device. 39 OUT_D4 DS-66 N / Man Discrete output 4 40 LOCATOR_OUT_D4 DS-261 S / O/S 41 42 UPDATE_EVT BLOCK_ALM DS-73 DS-72 Units Store / Mode Idx Na Na Description Analog output 4 Information to generate constants A and B em equation Y=A*X+B plus the addresses in a slave device. Discrete output 1 Addresses in a slave device. D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters 2.148 Block Library MBSM – ModBus Supervision Master Overview MBSM supervision of FF block parameters eth Modbus MBSM.BVALUE 1 MBSM.BVALUE 2 DF51 DFI Master slave1 (input device) slave2 (output device) bool int perc float MBSM Description This block enables the DFI302 to monitor MODBUS variables. The DFI302 is the master the slaves contain the MODBUS variables desired to be read. Unlike the MBCM this block does not have inputs and outputs that may be connected. Note Every time a MODBUS parameter is changed it is necessary to set the ON_APPLY parameter of the MBCF block to “Apply”. Otherwise these alterations will not be effective. LOCAL_MODE_MAP All MBCM blocks you add to your strategy must have different values for LOCAL_MODE_MAP. Otherwise the block will not work properly. Parameters FVALUEn, PVALUEn, IVALUEn and BVALUEn User may select these parameters according to his needs. If the variable required to be monitored is a float it is necessary to use a FVALUE parameter. If it is a percentage, the PVALUEn will work. IVALUE refers to Integer values and BVALUE refers to boolean values. To each of these parameters are associated parameters to address them in the MODBUS network so that the MBSM block knows their location. Parameter FLOCATORn It refers to the FVALUEn parameter. This parameter is of the data type DS-260, so it is required to set two elements for this parameter (see on Chapter 1, “Data Type and Data Structure Definition”): The FVALUEn parameters will display the values of the variables set in FLOCATORn. Float values use two MODBUS registers, but it is necessary only to inform the first one. MODBUS Addresses • • • • 0001 to 9999 => Digital Outputs 10001 to 19999 => Digital Inputs. 30001 to 39999 =>Analog Inputs. 40001 to 49999 => Analog Outputs 2.149 Function Block Instruction Manual Parameter PLOCATORn It refers to the PVALUEn parameter. These parameters are of the DS-258 data type. Each of these parameters consist of the following elements: - From Eu 100 % - From Eu 0 % - To Eu 100 % - To Eu 0 % - Data Type: - Slave Address: - MODBUS Address Of Value: This block allows Modbus Scale Conversion, to do the conversion procedure see the item “Modbus Scale Conversion” in the Chapter 1 for more details. Parameter ILOCATORn It refers to the IVALUEn parameter. (see on Chapter 1, “Data Type and Data Structure Definition”): • Slave Address: • Modbus Address OF Value: The IVALUEn parameters will display the values of the variables set in ILOCATORn. Parameter BLOCATORn It refers to the BVALUEn parameter. This parameter is of the data type DS-260, so you will have to set two elements for this parameter (see on Chapter 1, “Data Type and Data Structure Definition”): • Slave Address: • Modbus Address OF Value: The BVALUEn parameters will display the values of the variables set in BLOCATORn. BAD_STATUS Parameter This parameter indicates if the communication between slaves was established properly. If the correspondent bit is in logic level 1 this means there was an error during writing/reading of the respective parameter. The table below presents the values for these status values. Relation between the bits in BAD_STATUS and Modbus addresses 2.150 Bit Mnemonic Parameter 0 B1 BVALUE1 1 B2 BVALUE2 2 B3 BVALUE3 3 B4 BVALUE4 4 B5 BVALUE5 5 B6 BVALUE6 6 B7 BVALUE7 7 B8 BVALUE8 8 I1 IVALUE1 9 I2 IVALUE2 10 P1 PVALUE1 11 P2 PVALUE2 12 F1 FVALUE1 13 F2 FVALUE2 Block Library Parameters DataType (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value Parameter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ST_REV TAG_DESC STRATEGY ALERT_KEY MODE_BLK BLOCK_ERR LOCAL_MOD_MAP 8 BAD_STATUS Bitstring(2) 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 FLOCATOR1 FVALUE1 BLOCATOR8 BVALUE8 DS-260 Float DS-260 Float DS-258 Float DS-258 Float DS-260 Integer8 Interge32 DS-260 Integer8 Interge32 DS-260 Boolean DS-260 Boolean DS-260 Boolean DS-260 Boolean DS-260 Boolean DS-260 Boolean DS-260 Boolean DS-260 Boolean 39 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 Na D 40 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 Na D FLOCATOR2 FVALUE2 PLOCATOR1 PVALUE1 PLOCATOR2 PVALUE2 ILOCATOR1 ILENGTH1 IVALUE1 ILOCATOR2 ILENGTH2 IVALUE2 BLOCATOR1 BVALUE1 BLOCATOR2 BVALUE2 BLOCATOR3 BVALUE3 BLOCATOR4 BVALUE4 BLOCATOR5 BVALUE5 BLOCATOR6 BVALUE6 BLOCATOR7 BVALUE7 Unsigned16 OctString(32) Unsigned16 Unsigned8 1 to 255 DS-69 Bitstring(2) Unsigned8 0 to 15 0 Spaces 0 0 O/S Units Store / Mode Idx None Na None None Na E 0 0 E 0 0 0 2 0 1,2,4 2 0 D / RO S / O/S N S / O/S N S / O/S N S / O/S N S / O/S S / O/S N S / O/S S / O/S N S / O/S N S / O/S N S / O/S N S / O/S N S / O/S N S / O/S N S / O/S N S / O/S N 0 1,2,4 S/RO S S S S D / RO S / O/S TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE Description See Mode Parameter Define the modbus addresses. Indicate if communication from slave is good or not (each bit corresponds to a Modbus variable). Information to locate float parameter Value from requested address. Information to locate float parameter Value from requested address. Information to locate percentage parameter Value from requested address. Information to locate percentage parameter Value from requested address. Information to locate integer parameter Data length. Value from requested address. Information to locate integer parameter Data length. Value from requested address. Information to locate boolean parameter Value from requested addresses. Information to locate boolean parameter Value from requested addresses. Information to locate boolean parameter Value from requested addresses. Information to locate boolean parameter Information to locate boolean parameter Value from requested addresses. Information to locate boolean parameter Value from requested addresses. Information to locate boolean parameter Value from requested addresses. Information to locate boolean parameter Value from requested addresses. This alert is generated by any change to the static data. The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters 2.151 Function Block Instruction Manual Output Function Blocks AO - Analog Output Overview The Analog Output Block is a function block used by devices that work as output elements in a control loop, like valves, actuators, positioners, etc. The AO block receives a signal from another function block and passes its results to an output transducer block through an internal channel reference. Schematic Description The AO block is connected to the transducer block through the CHANNEL parameter that must match with the following parameter in the transducer block: TERMINAL_NUMBER parameter for the FI302 The CHANNEL parameter must be set to 1 (one) if the AO block is running in the FY302 or FP302, and no configuration is necessary in the transducer block to connect it to the AO block . Treatment of Input Values The SP value may be controlled automatically through a cascade or remote cascade control or manually by an operator. The PV_SCALE and XD_SCALE are used to do the scaling conversion of the SP. Treatment of Output Values The transducer scaling (XD_SCALE) is used to convert percent of span to the number used by the transducer. This allows portions of the SP span to cause full span movement of the output. OUT = SP% * (EU_100% - EU_0%) + EU_0% [XD_SCALE] The bit “Increase to Close” in IO_OPTS allows the output to be inverted relative to the span of the input value. For example, if the SP is 100. (PV_SCALE=0-100%; XD_SCALE = 3-15Psi): If the “Increase to Close” bit in IO_OPTS is clear, SP converted to OUT_SCALE will be15 psi. Therefore the actuator type will be “air to open”. If the “Increase to Close” bit in IO_OPTS is true, SP converted to OUT_SCALE will be 3 psi. Therefore the actuator type will be “air to close”. 2.152 Block Library Simulate The SIMULATE parameter is used for the diagnostics and checkout purposes. When it is active, the transducer value and status will be overridden by the simulate value and status. The SIMULATE can be disabled either by software in the SIMULATE parameter or hardware through the jumper. The SIMULATE structure is composed by the following attributes: • Simulate Value and Status • Transducer Value and Status • Simulate Enable/Disable The Transducer Value/Status attributes of SIMULATE parameter are always showing the value that the AO block receives from the corresponding transducer block. There is a hardware jumper to disable the SIMULATE parameter. If this jumper is placed Off, then the simulation will be disabled. In this case, the user cannot change the ENABLE/DISABLE attribute. This jumper prevents simulation from accidentally being enabled during plant operations. When the jumper is placed ON, it will cause “Simulate Active” attribute in the BLOCK_ERR of Resource block to be true. The simulate is active if the following conditions exist: • The simulate hardware jumper is not placed Off; • The SIMULATE.ENABLE/DISABLE parameter is “Active”. When simulation is active, the READBACK and PV parameters will be calculated based on the attribute Simulate Value/Status of the SIMULATE parameter. Otherwise it will be that one supplied by the transducer block in the Transducer Value/Status attribute of the SIMULATE parameter. Readback parameter If the hardware supports a readback value, such as valve position, then the value will be read by the transducer block and it will be provided to the corresponding AO block through the Transducer Value/Status attribute of the SIMULATE parameter. If not supported, the Transducer Value/Status attribute of the SIMULATE parameter is generated from AO.OUT by the transducer block. The READBACK parameter has a copy of the Transducer Value/Status attribute of the SIMULATE parameter if the simulation is disabled, otherwise it is a copy of the Simulate Value/Status attribute of the SIMULATE parameter The PV is the READBACK parameter converted to the PV_SCALE, therefore the PV can be simulated through the SIMULATE parameter. In addition, the block admits safe action as described early in the fault state processing. The AO block supports the mode-shedding feature as described early in the mode parameter. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the AO block will reflect the following causes: • Block Configuration Error – the configuration error occurs when one or more of the following situations occur: o When the CHANNEL or SHED_OPT parameters have an invalid value; o When the XD_SCALE does not have a supported engineering unit and/or range for the respective the transducer block. o When the transducer block is in O/S mode. o When it is not compatible the CHANNEL parameter and HC configuration (DFI302). • Simulate Active – When the Simulate is active. • Local Override – When the block is in LO mode because the fault state is active. • Output Failure – I/O module failure (DFI302) • Out of Service – Occur when the block is in O/S mode. Supported Modes O/S, IMAN, LO, MAN, AUTO, CAS and RCAS. 2.153 Function Block Instruction Manual Parameters Idx Parameter Data Type (length) 1 ST_REV 2 3 Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store/ Mode Unsigned16 0 None S/RO TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S STRATEGY Unsigned16 0 None S 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 0 None S 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 O/S Na S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) E D/RO 7 PV DS-65 PV D / RO 8 SP DS-65 PV_SCALE +/10% PV The analog set point. Can be set manually, N / Auto automatically through the interface device or another field device. 9 OUT DS-65 XD_SCALE OUT 1 to 255 Description See Mode Parameter Process analog value. N / Man The output value result to the transducer block. 1: Disable ; 2: Active 10 SIMULATE DS-82 11 PV_SCALE DS-68 12 13 XD_SCALE GRANT_DENY DS-68 are the Enable/Disable options. Disable 0-100% Depends on the device type. See the corresponding manual for details. DS-70 S / Man The Default value for each Smar device is showed below: FY302: FP302 FI302 DFI302 0 to 100 [%] 3 to 15 [psi] 4 to 20 [mA] 0 to 100 [%] Na D 0 Na S / O/S See Block Options 0 Na S / O/S See Block Options XD D / RO Indicate the readback of the actual position of the transducer, in transducer units. Bitstring(2) 15 STATUS_OPTS Bitstring(2) See Block Options 16 READBACK DS-65 17 CAS_IN DS-65 18 SP_RATE_DN Float Positive +INF 19 SP_RATE_UP Float Positive 20 SP_HI_LIM Float 21 SP_LO_LIM Float 22 CHANNEL Unsigned16 2.154 S / Man The high and low scale values to the SP parameter. 0 IO_OPTS Float Allows the readback value to be manually supplied when simulate is enabled. In this case, the simulate value and status will be the PV value. The high and low scale values, to transducer for a specified channel. XD 14 FSTATE_TIME PV Depends on the Device type. See description for details. See Block Options 23 D D This parameter is the remote setpoint value, which must come from another Fieldbus block, or a DCS block through a defined link. PV/Sec S Ramp rate at which upward setpoint changes in PV units per second. It is disable if is zero or +INF. Rate limiting will apply in AUTO, CAS and RCAS modes. +INF PV/Sec S Ramp rate at which downward setpoint changes in PV units per second. It is disable if is zero or +INF. Rate limiting will apply in AUTO, CAS and RCAS modes. PV_SCALE +/10% 100 PV S The setpoint high limit is the highest setpoint operator entry that can be used for the block. PV_SCALE +/10% 0 PV S The setpoint low limit is the lowest setpoint operator entry that can be used for the block. 0 None S / O/S For more details about .the configuration of this parameter, see Chapter 1 “CHANNEL Configuration”. S The time in seconds to ignore the existence of a new fault state condition. If the fault state condition does not persist for FSTATE_TIME seconds and while this time does not elapse, the block will execute in the last actual mode. Positive 0 Sec Block Library Idx Parameter Data Type (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store/ Mode Description 24 FSTATE_VAL Float PV_SCALE +/10% 0 PV S The preset analog SP value to use when fault occurs. This value be used if the I/O option fault state to value is selected. 25 BKCAL_OUT DS-65 PV D / RO The value and status required by an upper block’s BKCAL_IN so that the upper block may prevent reset windup and provide bumpless transfer to closed loop control. 26 RCAS_IN DS-65 PV D Target setpoint and status provided by a supervisory Host to a analog control or output block. S Defines action to be taken on remote control device timeout. D / RO Block setpoint and status after ramping – provided to a supervisory Host for back calculation and to allow action to be taken under limiting conditions or mode change. 1: NormalShed, NormalReturn 2: NormalShed, NoReturn 3: ShedToAuto, NormalReturn 4: ShedToAuto, NoReturn 27 SHED_OPT Unsigned8 5: ShedToMan, NormalReturn 6: ShedToMan, NoReturn 0 7: ShedToRetained Target, NormalReturn 8: ShedToRetained Target, NoReturn 28 RCAS_OUT DS-65 PV 29 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 Na D 30 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 Na D Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters If BEHAVIOR parameter is “Adapted”: The default value of CHANNEL is the lowest available number. The default value of SHED_OPT is NormalShed/NormalReturn. The required mode for writing is the actual mode, regardless the target mode: SP and OUT 2.155 Function Block Instruction Manual DO - Discrete Output Overview The DO block converts the value in SP_D to something useful for the hardware found at the CHANNEL selection. Schematic Description The Invert I/O option can be used to do a Boolean NOT function between the SP_D and the hardware. The SP_D supports the full cascade sub-function. Cas mode must be used to transfer the output of another block to the SP_D of the DO. There are additional I/O options which will cause the SP_D value to track the PV_D value when the block is in an actual mode of LO or Man. If the hardware supports a readback value, it is used for READBACK_D, which, after accounting for the Invert I/O option, acts as the PV_D for this block. If not supported, READBACK_D is generated from OUT_D. The OUT_D and READBACK_D parameters both use XD_STATE. The PV_D and SP_D use PV_STATE. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the DO block will reflect the following causes: • Block Configuration Error – the configuration error occurs when one or more of the following situations occur: o When the CHANNEL or SHED_OPT parameters have an invalid value; o When it is not compatible the CHANNEL parameter and HC configuration (DFI302). • Simulate Active – When the Simulate is active. • Local Override – When the block is in LO mode because the fault state is active. • Output Failure – I/O module failure (DFI302) • Out of Service – Occur when the block is in O/S mode. Supported Modes O/S, LO, Iman, Man, Auto, Cas, and RCas. The Man mode can be used to force the output, in a PLC sense. It may be that Man mode is not permitted, but it must be supported so that Man mode may be entered when leaving O/S. . The IMan mode is used to indicated that there is no path to the final element. 2.156 Block Library Parameters Idx Parameter Data Type (length) 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 0 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 0 None S 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 0 None S 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 O/S Na S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) E D/RO 7 PV_D Valid Range/ Options 1 to 255 Default Value DS-66 Units Store / Mode None S/RO PV D / RO Description See Mode Parameter Either the primary discrete value for use in executing the function, or a process value associated with it. May also be calculated from the READBACK_D value of a DO block. 8 SP_D DS-66 PV_STATE PV N / Auto The discrete setpoint of this block. 9 OUT_D DS-66 OUT_STATE OUT N / Man The primary discrete value calculated as a result of executing the function. D Allows the transducer discrete input or output to the block to be manually supplied when simulate is enabled. When simulation is disabled, the simulate value and status track the actual value and status. 1: Disable ; 2: Active 10 SIMULATE_D DS-83 11 PV_SCALE Unsigned16 0 PV S Index to the text describing the states of a discrete PV. 12 XD_SCALE Unsigned16 0 XD S Index to the text describing the states of a discrete for the value obtained from the transducer. 13 GRANT_DENY DS-70 0 Na D Options for controlling access of host computer and local control panels to operating, tuning and alarm parameters of the block. 14 IO_OPTS Bitstring(2) See Block Options 0 Na S / O/S See Block Options 15 STATUS_OPTS Bitstring(2) See Block Options 0 Na S / O/S See Block Options 16 READBACK_D DS-66 XD D / RO This indicates the readback of the actual discrete valve or other actuator position, in the transducer state. 17 CAS_IN_D DS-66 PV D / RW This parameter is the remote setpoint value of a discrete block, which must come from another Fieldbus block, or a DCS block through a defined link. 18 CHANNEL Unsigned16 None S / O/S For more details about the configuration of this parameter, see Chapter 1 “CHANNEL Configuration”. S The time in seconds to ignore the existence of a new fault state condition. If the fault state condition does not persist for FSTATE_TIME seconds and while this time does not elapse, the block will execute in the last actual mode. S The preset discrete SP_D value to use when fault occurs. This value will be used if the I/O option Fault State to value is selected. 19 20 FSTATE_TIME FSTATE_VAL_D Float Unsigned8 are the Enable/Disable options. Disable 0 Positive 0 0 Sec PV 2.157 Function Block Instruction Manual Idx Parameter Data Type (length) 21 BKCAL_OUT_D 22 RCAS_IN_D Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store / Mode Description DS-66 PV D / RO The output value and status provided to an upstream discrete block. This information is used to provide bumpless transfer to closed loop control. DS-66 PV D Target setpoint and status provided by a supervisory Host to a discrete control or output block. S Defines action to be taken on remote control device timeout. 1: NormalShed, NormalReturn 2: NormalShed, NoReturn 3: ShedToAuto, NormalReturn 4: ShedToAuto, NoReturn 23 SHED_OPT Unsigned8 5: ShedToMan, NormalReturn 6: ShedToMan, NoReturn 0 7: ShedToRetainedTarg et, NormalReturn 8: ShedToRetainedTarg et, NoReturn 24 RCAS_OUT_D DS-66 PV D / RO Block setpoint and status provided to a supervisory Host for back calculation and to allow action to be taken under limiting conditions or mode change. 25 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 Na D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. 26 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 Na Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters 2.158 Block Library MAO - Multiple Analog Output Description The MAO block makes available to the I/O subsystem its eight input parameters IN_1 through IN_8. This function block has the same fault state characteristics as the AO block. It includes option to hold the last value or go to a preset value when fault state active, individual preset values for each point, besides a delay time to go into the fault state. The actual mode will be LO only due to the resource block, otherwise bad status in input parameter and configuration of MO_STATUS_OPTS will not affect the mode calculation. However the functionality of fault state will be done only for that input parameter. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the MAO block will reflect the following causes: • Other – the number of MDI, MDO, MAI and MAO blocks or the device tag in FB700 is different from LC700; • Block Configuration Error – the configuration error occurs when the OCCURRENCE/ CHANNEL has an invalid value; • Output failure – the CPU of LC700 stopped working (FB700); • Power up – there is no CPU of LC700 in the rack or the hardware configuration of LC700 has an error (FB700); • Out of Service – When the block is in O/S mode. Supported Modes O/S, LO and AUTO. Schematic Parameters Idx Parameter Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store / Mode 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 0 None S/RO 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) 1 to 255 0 None S 0 None S O/S Na S E D/RO Description See Mode Parameter 2.159 Function Block Instruction Manual Idx Parameter Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Units Store / Mode Description S / O/S For more details about the configuration of this parameter, see Chapter 1 “CHANNEL Configuration”. It defines the transducer to be used going to or from the physical world. It addresses a group of eight points. OCCURRENCE 7 / Unsigned16 0 None CHANNEL 8 IN_1 DS-65 D Numbered input 1. 9 IN_2 DS-65 D Numbered input 2. 10 IN_3 DS-65 D Numbered input 3. 11 IN_4 DS-65 D Numbered input 4. 12 IN_5 DS-65 D Numbered input 5. 13 IN_6 DS-65 D Numbered input 6. 14 IN_7 DS-65 D Numbered input 7. 15 IN_8 DS-65 D Numbered input 8. MO_OPTS 16 17 (different bit description in profile revision 1) MO_STATUS_OPT S (not available in profile revision 1) Bitstring(2) See Block Options 0 Na S / O/S See Block Options Bitstring(2) See Block Options 0 Na S / O/S See Block Options S The time in seconds to ignore the existence of a new fault state condition. If the fault state condition does not persist for FSTATE_TIME seconds and while this time does not elapse, the block will execute in the last actual mode. 0 S The preset analog value to use when failure occurs in IN_1. Ignored if the “Fault state to value 1” in the MO_OPTS parameter is false. Float 0 S The preset analog value to use when failure occurs in IN_2. Ignored if the “Fault state to value 2” in the MO_OPTS parameter is false. FSTATE_VAL3 Float 0 S The preset analog value to use when failure occurs in IN_3. Ignored if the “Fault state to value 3” in the MO_OPTS parameter is false. 22 FSTATE_VAL4 Float 0 S The preset analog value to use when failure occurs in IN_4. Ignored if the “Fault state to value 4” in the MO_OPTS parameter is false. 23 FSTATE_VAL5 Float 0 S The preset analog value to use when failure occurs in IN_5. Ignored if the “Fault state to value 5” in the MO_OPTS parameter is false. 24 FSTATE_VAL6 Float 0 S The preset analog value to use when failure occurs in IN_6. Ignored if the “Fault state to value 6” in the MO_OPTS parameter is false. 25 FSTATE_VAL7 Float 0 S The preset analog value to use when failure occurs in IN_7. Ignored if the “Fault state to value 7” in the MO_OPTS parameter is false. 26 FSTATE_VAL8 Float 0 S The preset analog value to use when failure occurs in IN_8. Ignored if the “Fault state to value 8” in the MO_OPTS parameter is false. 27 FSTATE_STATUS Unsigned8 18 FSTATE_TIME Float 19 FSTATE_VAL1 Float 20 FSTATE_VAL2 21 2.160 Positive 0 Sec None D / RO It shows which points are in fault state active. Block Library Idx Parameter 28 BLOCK_ALM 29 UPDATE_EVT Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value DS-72 Units Na Store / Mode Description D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. This alert is generated by any change to the static data. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters DS-73 Na D If BEHAVIOR parameter is “Adapted”: The default value of OCCURRENCE is the number of MAO blocks instantiated for the block. Device type FB700 Description Block has OCCURRENCE parameter Block has CHANNEL parameter. DFI302 MO_OPTS has a different bit description MO_STATUS_OPTS is not available in profile revision 1 2.161 Function Block Instruction Manual MDO - Multiple Discrete Output Description The MDO block makes available to the I/O subsystem its eight input parameters IN_D1 through IN_D8. This function block has the same fault state characteristics as the DO block. It includes option to hold the last value or go to a preset value when fault state active, individual preset values for each point, besides a delay time to go into the fault state state. The actual mode will be LO only due to the resource block, otherwise bad status in input parameter and configuration of MO_STATUS_OPTS will not affect the mode calculation. However the functionality of fault state will be done only for that input parameter. The parameter FSTATE_STATE shows which points are in fault state active. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the MDO block will reflect the following causes: • Other – the number of MDI, MDO, MAI and MAO blocks or the device tag in FB700 is different from LC700; • Block Configuration Error – the configuration error occurs when the OCCURRENCE / CHANNEL has an invalid value (FB700); • Output failure – the CPU of LC700 stopped working (FB700); • Power up – there is no CPU of LC700 in the rack or the hardware configuration of LC700 has an error (FB700); • Out of Service – When the block is in O/S mode. Supported Modes O/S, LO and AUTO. Schematic 2.162 Block Library Idx Parameter Parameters Data Type Valid Range/ (length) Options Default Value Units Store/ Mode 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 0 None S/RO 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) 1 to 255 0 None S 0 None S O/S Na S E D/RO OCCURRENCE 7 / Unsigned16 0 None S / O/S CHANNEL Description See Mode Parameter For more details about the configuration of this parameter, see Chapter 1 “CHANNEL Configuration”. It defines the transducer to be used going to or from the physical world. It addresses a group of eight points. 8 IN_D1 DS-66 D Numbered discrete input 1. 9 IN_D2 DS-66 D Numbered discrete input 2. 10 IN_D3 DS-66 D Numbered discrete input 3. 11 IN_D4 DS-66 D Numbered discrete input 4. 12 IN_D5 DS-66 D Numbered discrete input 5. 13 IN_D6 DS-66 D Numbered discrete input 6. 14 IN_D7 DS-66 D Numbered discrete input 7. 15 IN_D8 DS-66 D Numbered discrete input 8. MO_OPTS 16 17 (different bit description in profile revision 1) MO_STATUS_OPT S (not available in profile revision 1) Bitstring(2) See Block Options 0 Na S / O/S See Block Options Bitstring(2) See Block Options 0 Na S / O/S See Block Options S The time in seconds to ignore the existence of a new fault state condition. If the fault state condition does not persist for FSTATE_TIME seconds and while this time does not elapse, the block will execute in the last actual mode. 0 S The preset discrete value to use when failure occurs in IN_D1. Ignored if the “Fault state to value 1” in the MO_OPTS parameter is false. Unsigned8 0 S The preset discrete value to use when failure occurs in IN_D2. Ignored if the “Fault state to value 2” in the MO_OPTS parameter is false. FSTATE_VAL_D3 Unsigned8 0 S The preset discrete value to use when failure occurs in IN_D3. Ignored if the “Fault state to value 3” in the MO_OPTS parameter is false. 22 FSTATE_VAL_D4 Unsigned8 0 S The preset discrete value to use when failure occurs in IN_D4. Ignored if the “Fault state to value 4” in the MO_OPTS parameter is false. 23 FSTATE_VAL_D5 Unsigned8 0 S The preset discrete value to use when failure occurs in IN_D5. Ignored if the “Fault state to value 5” in the MO_OPTS parameter is false. 24 FSTATE_VAL_D6 Unsigned8 0 S The preset discrete value to use when failure occurs in IN_D6. Ignored if the “Fault state to value 6” in the MO_OPTS parameter is false. 25 FSTATE_VAL_D7 Unsigned8 0 S The preset discrete value to use when failure occurs in IN_D7. Ignored if the “Fault state to value 7” in the MO_OPTS parameter is false. 26 FSTATE_VAL_D8 Unsigned8 0 S The preset discrete value to use when failure occurs in IN_D8. Ignored if the “Fault state to value 8” in the MO_OPTS parameter is false. 18 FSTATE_TIME Float 19 FSTATE_VAL_D1 Unsigned8 20 FSTATE_VAL_D2 21 Positive 0 Sec 2.163 Function Block Instruction Manual Idx Parameter 27 FSTATE_STATUS Data Type Valid Range/ Default (length) Options Value Unsigned8 Units Store/ Mode None D / RO Description It shows which points are in fault state active. 28 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 Na D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. 29 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 Na D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters If BEHAVIOR parameter is “Adapted”: The default value of OCCURRENCE is the number of MDO blocks instantiated in the profile revision 0. Device type FB700 Description Block has OCCURRENCE parameter Block has CHANNEL parameter. DFI302 AND DC302 MO_OPTS has a different bit description MO_STATUS_OPTS is not available in profile revision 1 2.164 Block Library STEP – Step Output Pid Overview A Step Control Output block is used most commonly, when the final control element has an actuator driven by an electric motor. The final control element is positioned by rotating the motor clockwise or anticlockwise, which is accomplished by activating a discrete signal for each direction. A control valve, for example, needs a signal to open and another to close. If none of the signals is present, the valve stem would stay at the same position. Fieldbus actuators and switchgears are the transducer blocks of this block. Schematic Description As shown on Fig.1, electric actuators require a switchgear module to power the electric motor and reverse it as demanded by the control loop. Most of the electric actuators require an interlock circuit to prevent the motor to overheat, or even burn, when the actuator reaches one of the travel limits or something blocks the movement in any direction, increasing the torque beyond an established limit. These actuators are normally equipped with torque switches and limit switches to provide this kind of protection. The interlock circuit also establishes priorities for safety signals, manual commands, enabling signals and local commands, that is, commands given from the actuator control panel or some sort of field mounted panel. Motor powering and reversing, interlocks and protection circuits can be combined in one Motor Control Center drawer or in a field device. In any case it will consist in a Transducer that will convert the Fieldbus Function Block action into physical actions. 2.165 Function Blocks Instruction Manual STEP CONTROL OUTPUT BLOCK IN CAS_IN L STEP PID BKCAL_OUT RCAS_IN RCAS_OUT MANUAL o/s O C POWER TRANSDUCER OPEN ACTUATOR INTERLOCK SIGNALS* O C LOCAL CONTROL* O C POWERING AND REVERSING CLOSE LOGIC ENABLING* E Tork switch - open Limit switch - open Limit switch - closed Tork switch - closed M * TRANSDUCER BLOCK SIGNALS. Not defined in this specification. Fig.1- Electric Actuator Using a standard PID controller in cascade with a PI Step Controller. The slave process variable is the position of the final control element, as shown in Fig.2. Controlling the process variable regardless of the valve position measurement. 2.166 Block Library Setpoint e PID OPEN OUT STEP LOGIC POWER CLOSE Process Variable Valve Position PROCESS Fig. 2 - Step controller working as a positioner. Setpoint OPEN e STEP LOGIC POWER CLOSE Process Variable PROCESS Fig. 3 - Step Controller Modified Deviationê Hystereses -0.5DB’ 0.5 DB Actual Deviatione DB = Dead Band Fig. 4 - Modified deviation or gap deviation The actuator has a Travel Time, that is the time it takes to drive the final control element from one end limit to another. For a control valve, for example, it is the time required to drive it from closed to completely open. The proportional action will actuate the final control element in the required direction during a time proportional to: tP = [GAIN]* (ê /100)* [TRAVEL_TIME].....(s) If the proportional action is not enough to turn ê = 0, the Integral Action will move the final control element at a speed of: V = [GAIN] * ê / [RESET]......(% / s) where the reset is the Integral time constant in seconds. As most of the actuators work with constant and fixed speed, they can not give a speed larger than: Maximum speed = 100% / [TRAVEL TIME].......(% / s) while the smaller speeds required by the Integral action are obtained by giving pulses of a specified duration [PULSE_DUR]. Each pulse will move the final control element a ∆x % in the required direction. ∆x % =[PULSE_DUR] * 100% / [TRAVEL_TIME]..........(%) 2.167 Function Blocks Instruction Manual The pulse frequency is given by: f = V / ∆x %..........(pulses / s) The Derivative or Rate action is given by: tD = [GAIN] * (dê/dt) * [RATE] where Rate is the derivative time constant in seconds and dê/dt can be calculated in several ways, including derivative gain, filtering, etc. The PID Step Controller activates the OPEN or CLOSE signals according to the modified deviation, ê, the PID parameters and the other parameters in the following way: The signal is activated during a time equivalent to: = tP + tD If the modified deviation is still different of zero, the Integral or Reset action will give pulses with a duration defined by [PULSE_DUR], with a frequency calculated by “f." t and f are dynamically modified by ê. In order to avoid the Reset wind-up, the actuation time in one direction must be integrated and limited. If the actuation time in one direction is larger than the [TRAVEL_TIME], there is no use in making the respective output signal to pulse, therefore it is recommendable to maintain it continuously activated. The block provides a full PV and Deviation alarm support. The meaning of possible values for OUT_D are : OUT_D.value = 0 Æ Stop OUT_D.value = 1 Æ Close OUT_D.value = 2 Æ Open As the STEP block requires two discrete outputs, when setting the CHANNEL parameter , indeed two outputs are allocated. The value of CHANNEL points to the CLOSE output, and the next channel points to the OPEN output. Supported Modes Out-of-service, Manual, Auto, CAS and RCAS are supported. In Out-of-service mode, the status of the output will be Out-of -service. In Manual mode, the OUT_D can be set by the operator. The block stops output calculation. In Auto mode the block operates normally. In CAS (cascade), the Setpoint is supplied by another function block through the CAS_IN parameter. In RCAS the block setpoint is set by a control application running on a computer, DCS or PLC. Status Handling The status of OUT_Di shall reflect the worst quality of the status of any connected input. Initial Value Handling The initial value of OUT_Di should be zero, that is, no action in both directions and the Integral action value should also go to zero. 2.168 Block Library Parameters Idx Parameter Data Type (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Store / Units Mode Value 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 0 None S/RO 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 4 Unsigned8 5 ALERT_KEY MODE_BLK 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) 7 PV DS-65 8 SP DS-65 9 OUT_D DS-66 10 PV_SCALE DS-68 0-100% 11 XD_STATE Unsigned16 12 GRANT_DENY DS-70 13 CONTROL_OPTS Bitstring(2) 14 STATUS_OPTS Bitstring(2) 15 IN DS-65 16 PV_FTIME Float Non-Negative 17 JOG_TIME Float Positive 18 CAS_IN DS-65 19 SP_RATE_DN Float Positive +INF 20 SP_RATE_UP Float Positive 21 SP_HI_LIM Float 22 SP_LO_LIM Float 23 GAIN Float 24 RESET Float 1 to 255 DS-69 Description 0 None S 0 None S O/S Na S E D / RO PV D / RO PV The analog set point. Can be set manually, N / Auto automatically through the interface device or another field device. PV_SCALE +/- 10% See Mode Parameter Process analog value. This is the IN value after pass over the PV filter. N / Man The output value result of the Step Output PID calculation. PV S / Man The high and low scale values to the PV and SP parameter. 0 XD S Index to the text describing the states of a discrete for the value obtained from the transducer. 0 na D Options for controlling access of host computer and local control panels to operating, tuning and alarm parameters of the block. See Block Options 0 na S / O/S See Block Options See Block Options 0 Na S / O/S See Block Options PV D The primary input value of the block, or PV value. 0 Sec S Time constant of a single exponential filter for the PV, in seconds. 0 Sec S Duration of OUT_D in the active state when commanded by the operator to jog open or jog closed. D This parameter is the remote setpoint value, which must come from another Fieldbus block, or a DCS block through a defined link. PV/Se c S Ramp rate at which upward setpoint changes in PV units per second. It is disable if is zero or +INF. Rate limiting will apply only in AUTO mode. +INF PV/Se c S Ramp rate at which downward setpoint changes in PV units per second. It is disable if is zero or +INF. Rate limiting will apply only in AUTO mode. PV_SCALE +/- 10% 100 PV S The setpoint high limit is the highest setpoint operator entry that can be used for the block. PV_SCALE +/- 10% 0 PV S The setpoint low limit is the lowest setpoint operator entry that can be used for the block. 0 None S Proportional term of the PID. It is the Kp value. Positive +INF sec S Integral term of the PID. It is the Tr value. This specifies the time for the internal working value of bias or ratio to return to the operator set bias or ratio, in seconds. 25 BAL_TIME Float Positive 0 sec 26 RATE Float Positive 0 sec 27 IO_OPTS Bitstring(2) See Block Options 0 na S In the PID block, it may be used to specify the time constant at which the integral term will move to obtain balance when the output is limited and the mode is Auto, Cas, or RCas. S Derivative term of the PID. It is the Td value. S / O/S See Block Options 2.169 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Idx Parameter Data Type (length) 28 CHANNEL Unsigned16 29 FSTATE_TIME Float 30 FSTATE_VAL_D Unsigned8 Valid Range/ Options Positive Default Store / Units Mode Value 0 None 0 Sec 0 Description For more details about the configuration of this parameter, see Chapter 1 “CHANNEL Configuration”. In the DFI302, this parameter is selecting two discrete outputs. The first one is the CLOSE output and the S / O/S next point in the same group will be the OPEN output. The CHANNEL parameter will be addressing the CLOSE output, despite of it is allocating the OPEN output too. S The time in seconds from detection of fault of the output block remote setpoint to the output action of the block output if the condition still exists. S The preset discrete SP_D value to use when fault occurs. This value will be used if the I/O option Fault State to value is selected. 31 BKCAL_OUT DS-65 PV D / RO The value and status required by an upper block’s BKCAL_IN so that the upper block may prevent reset windup and provide bumpless transfer to closed loop control. 32 RCAS_IN DS-65 PV D Target setpoint and status provided by a supervisory Host to a analog control or output block. 1: NormalShed, NormalReturn Defines action to be taken on remote control device timeout. 2: NormalShed, NoReturn 33 SHED_OPT Unsigned8 3: ShedToAuto, NormalReturn 4: ShedToAuto, NoReturn 5: ShedToMan, NormalReturn 6: ShedToMan, NoReturn 0 S 7: ShedToRetainedTar get, NormalReturn 8: ShedToRetainedTar get, NoReturn 34 RCAS_OUT DS-65 35 TRAVEL_TIME Float Positive 36 PULSE_DUR Float 37 DEAD_BAND 38 39 2.170 Block setpoint and status after ramping - provided to a supervisory Host for back calculation and to allow action to be taken under limiting conditions or mode change. PV D / RO 60 Sec The time required by the actuator to drive the final S / Man control element from one end position to another, in seconds. Positive 1 Sec S / Man It is the width, in seconds, of the pulses given due to the integral action. Float Non-negative 0 % S / Man It is the interval where changes in the Input will not change the output HYSTERESIS Float Non-negative 0 % S / Man Difference between the switching points. UPDATE_EVT DS-73 Na D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. Block Library Idx Parameter Data Type (length) Valid Range/ Options 40 BLOCK_ALM DS-72 41 ALARM_SUM DS-74 See Block Options 42 ACK_OPTION Bitstring(2) 0: Auto ACK Disable Default Store / Units Mode Value Description Na D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. Na S The current alert status, unacknowledged states, unreported states, and disabled states of the alarms associated with the function block. 0 Na S 0.5% % S Alarm hysteresis parameter. In order to clear the alarm the amount the PV must return within the alarm limit plus hysteresis. S Priority of the high high alarm. Selection of whether alarms associated with the block will be automatically acknowledged 1: Auto ACK Enable 43 ALARM_HYS Float 0 to 50 % 44 HI_HI_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 0 45 HI_HI_LIM Float OUT_SCALE, +INF +INF 46 HI_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 0 47 HI_LIM Float OUT_SCALE, +INF +INF 48 LO_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 0 49 LO_LIM Float OUT_SCALE, -INF -INF 50 LO_LO_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 0 51 LO_LO_LIM Float OUT_SCALE, -INF -INF 52 DV_HI_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 0 53 DV_HI_LIM Float 0 to PV span, +INF +INF 54 DV_LO_PRI Unsigned8 0 to 15 0 55 DV_LO_LIM Float -INF, -PV span to 0 -INF 56 HI_HI_ALM 57 PV PV PV S The setting for high high alarm in engineering units. S Priority of the high alarm. S The setting for high alarm in engineering units. S Priority of the low alarm. S The setting for low alarm in engineering units. S Priority of the low low alarm. S The setting for low low alarm in engineering units. S Priority of the deviation high alarm. S The setting for deviation high alarm in engineering units. S Priority of the deviation low alarm. PV S The setting for deviation low alarm in engineering units. DS-71 PV D The status for high high alarm and its associated time stamp. HI_ALM DS-71 PV D The status for high alarm and its associated time stamp. 58 LO_ALM DS-71 PV D The status for low alarm and its associated time stamp. 59 LO_LO_ALM DS-71 PV D The status for low low alarm and its associated time stamp. 60 DV_HI_ALM DS-71 PV D The status for deviation high alarm and its associated time stamp. 61 DV_LO_ALM DS-71 PV D The status for deviation low alarm and its associated time stamp. PV PV Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters 2.171 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Output Transducer Blocks FR302 – Fieldbus Relay Description Using the transducer block the user can see the output relay type definition. Supported Modes OOS and Auto Parameters Idx 9 10 Parameter DataType (length) TRANSDUCER_DIRECTORY Unsigned16 TRANSDUCER_TYPE Unsigned16 Valid Range/Options Other (0xffff) Defaut Value Units Store Description 0 None S A directory that specifies the number and the starting indices of the transducers in the transducer block. Other (0xffff) None S Identifies the transducer that follows. Default Value Set (0x10) None D Define an error code. Default Value Set (0x10) General Error (0x11) Calibration Error (0x12) Configuration Error (0x13) 11 XD_ERROR Unsigned8 Electronics Failure (0x14) Mechanical Failure (0x15) I/O Failure (0x16) Data Integrity Error (0x17) Software Error (0x18) Algorithm Error (0x19) 12 COLLECTION_DIRECTORY Unsigned 0 0 None S A directory that specifies the number, the starting indices, and DD Item IDs of data collections in each transducers in the transducer block. Not Initializ ed. (0x0) None S The type of each output relay. 0 None S The device serial number Spaces None S Indicates informations about the sensor and control from production factory. Not Initialized. (0x0) Both Normally Opened. (0x1) 13 OUTPUT_RELAY_TYPE Unsigned8 Both Normally Closed. (0x2) One Normally Opened and other Normally Closed . (0x3) 2.172 14 SERIAL_NUMBER Unsigned32 15 ORDERING_CODE Visible String[50] 0 to 4294967296 Block Library FY302 – Fieldbus Positioner Transducer Description The fieldbus positioner transducer receives the demanded valve position FINAL_VALUE from the AO block and uses it as a setpoint for a PID servo-positioning algorithm with adjustable gains SERVO_GAIN and SERVO_RESET. The transducer block also makes the corrected actual position sensor reading RETURN available to the AO block. The engineering unit and the final value range are selected from the XD_SCALE in the AO block. The units allowed are: for linear valve % and mm, for rotary valve %,°,rad. After setting GAIN and RESET an automatic calibration should be done using SETUP to start the valve operation. The supported mode is OOS and AUTO. As the transducer block runs together with AO block, the transducer block goes to AUTO only if the AO mode block is different from OOS. The sensor module temperature may be read from the SECONDARY_VALUE parameter. Warning messages may appear in Return status or in the Block Error in certain condition as explain below. Supported Modes OOS and AUTO. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the transducer block will reflect the following causes: • Block Configuration – When the XD_SCALE has an improper range or unit. • Output Failure – When mechanic module is disconnected from main electronic board or no air supply (if FINAL_VALUE is different from 0 or 100%). • Out of Service – When the block is in OOS mode. Return Status The RETURN status of the transducer block will reflect the following causes: Bad::NonSpecific:NotLimited – When mechanic module is disconnected from main electronic board or no air supply (if FINAL_VALUE is different from 0 or 100%). Parameters Idx Parameter DataType (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 OOS, AUTO OOS None S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) None D/RO Indicates the status associated with hardware or software in the Transducer. 13 FINAL_VALUE DS-65 XD_SCALE D The requested current and status written by the AO block. Description Indicates the operation Transducer Block. mode of The High and Low range limit values, the engineering unit code and the number of digits to the right of the 14 FINAL_VALUE_RANGE DS-68 18 SERVO_GAIN Float 19 SERVO_RESET 0-100 % XD_SCALE S 1-45 20 None S The servo PID gain valve. Float 0-999 4 Min/rep S The servo PID reset valve. Linear None S The type of the valve. SVU D The secondary value, related to the sensor decimal point to be used for Final Value. 28 VALVE_TYPE Unsigned8 Linear, Rotary 37 SECONDARY_VALUE DS-65 (-40) –100°C 38 SECONDARY_VALUE_UNIT Unsigned16 °C, °F, °R,K °C E S The engineering units to be used with SECONDARY_VALUE. 80 SETUP Unsigned8 Enable/Disab le Disable None N Enable self calibration 83 RETURN DS-65 0-100 None D The return value to the AO block. 2.173 Function Blocks Instruction Manual FP302 - Fieldbus Pressure Transducer Description The fieldbus pressure transducer block is a basic positioner transducer, which means that it is actually only a direct output, without positioning algorithm. The transducer block receives the demanded pneumatic signal output FINAL_VALUE from the AO block and makes the corrected actual position sensor reading RETURN available to the AO block. The engineering unit and the final value range are selected from the XD_SCALE in the AO block. The units allowed are: Pa, KPa, MPa, bar, mbar, torr, atm, psi, g/cm², kg/cm², inH20 a 4°C, inH2O a 68°F, mmH20 a 68°F, mmH20 a 4°C, ftH20 a 68°F, inHg a 0°C, mmHg a 0°C. The XD_SCALE range must be inside the range in the unit selected (3-30 psi). The supported mode is OOS and AUTO. As the transducer block runs together with AO block, the transducer block goes to AUTO only if the AO mode block is different from OOS. The sensor module temperature may be read from the SECONDARY_VALUE parameter. Warning messages may appear in Return status or in the Block Error in certain condition as explain below. Supported Modes OOS and AUTO. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the transducer block will reflect the following causes: • Block Configuration – When the XD_SCALE has an improper range or unit. • Output Failure – When mechanic module is disconnected from main electronic board or no air supply. • Out of Service – When the block is in OOS mode. Return Status The RETURN status of the transducer block will reflect the following causes: Bad::NonSpecific:NotLimited – When mechanic module is disconnected from main electronic board or no air supply. Parameters Idx Parameter DataType (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store None S Description Indicates the operation Transducer Block. mode of 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) None D/RO Indicates the status associated with hardware or software in the Transducer. 13 FINAL_VALUE DS-65 XD_SCALE D The requested current and status written by the AO block. XD_SCALE S The High and Low range limit values, the engineering unit code and the number of digits to the right of the decimal point to be used for Final Value. SVU D The secondary value, related to the sensor E S The engineering units to be used with SECONDARY_VALUE. OOS, AUTO 14 FINAL_VALUE_RANGE DS-68 3-30 psi 33 SECONDARY_VALUE DS-65 (-40) –100°C 34 SECONDARY_VALUE_UNIT Unsigned16 °C, °F, °R,K 35 2.174 OOS 3-15 psi °C The actual valve position and status could be used at the readback_valve in an AO block. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters RETURN DS-65 0 D Block Library FI302 – Fieldbus Current Transducer Description The fieldbus current transducer block is a basic converter transducer, which means that it is actually only a direct output, without positioning algorithm. The transducer block receives the demanded current signal output FINAL_VALUE from the AO block and it makes the actual position/status reading RETURN available to AO block. The engineering unit and the final value range are selected from the XD_SCALE in the AO block. The only unit allowed in this case is mA. The XD_SCALE range must be inside the current range (4-20). The selection of the output terminal for this transducer is done in TERMINAL_NUMBER (1-3). The AO block connected to this transducer has the CHANNEL the same selection as TERMINAL_NUMBER. The supported mode is OOS and AUTO. As the transducer block runs together with AO block, the transducer block goes to AUTO only if the AO mode block is different from OOS. Warning messages may appear in Return status or in the Block Error in certain condition as explain below. Supported Modes OOS and AUTO. BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the transducer block will reflect the following causes: • Block Configuration – When the XD_SCALE has an improper range or unit. • Output Failure – When the current loop is broken. • Out of Service – When the block is in OOS mode. Return Status The RETURN status of the transducer block will reflect the following causes: Bad::NonSpecific:NotLimited – When the current loop is broken. Parameters Idx Parameter DataType (length) Valid Range/ Options Default Value Units Store 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 OOS, AUTO OOS None S 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) None D/RO Indicates the status associated with hardware or software in the Transducer. 13 FINAL_VALUE DS-65 XD_SCALE D The requested current and status written by the AO block. XD_SCALE S The High and Low range limit values, the engineering unit code and the number of digits to the right of the decimal point to be used for Final Value. None D The return value to the AO block. None S Indicates the input terminal number 4-20 14 FINAL_VALUE_RANGE DS-68 4-20 mA 24 RETURN DS-65 4-20 25 TERMINAL_NUMBER Unsigned8 1,2,3 4-20 mA 0 Description Indicates the operation Transducer Block. mode of Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S – static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters 2.175 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Flexible Function Block Description The FFB block can receive up to 8 discrete input variables from the FF network through the parameters IN_D1 to IN_D8 parameters and also make available to the FF network 8 discrete output variables through the parameters OUT_D1 to OUT_D8 parameters. It can receive up to 16 discrete input variables from its hardware inputs(HIN) and also make available 8 discrete outputs through its hardware(HOUT). Status indication for the inputs depends on the I/O subsystem. Status indication for the outputs depends on the block calculation The FFB block provides logic such as AND, OR, XOR and NOT and functions such as Timer OnDelay, Timer Off-Delay, Timer Pulse, Pulse Counter Down (CTD), Pulse Counter Up(CTU), RS FlipFlop and SR Flip-Flop. The logic is done using the eight discrete variables available for the FF network (OUT_Dx), the eight input parameters from the FF network (IN_Dx), the sixteen input discrete variables from DC302 hardware(HIN), the eight output discrete variables from DC302 hardware(HOUT), failsafe(FSx) values and auxiliary bit variables(AUX’s). BLOCK_ERR The BLOCK_ERR of the FFB block will reflect the following causes: • Block Configuration Error – the configuration error occurs when there is error in the logic line indicates by ERROLINE parameter and ERROCODE parameter. • Input failure – When occurs failure in the input power supply. • Output failure – When occurs failure in the output power supply. • Out of Service – When the block is in O/S mode. Status Handling The status of OUT_Dx will be the following if the BLOCK_ERR indicates: • Other – Bad : Configuration Error • Input failure – Bad : Device Failure • Power up – Bad : Device Failure In the logic, a status higher and equal to 0x80 is considered true and a status lower than 0x80 is considered false. Supported Modes O/S, MAN and AUTO. Changes on the Logic Lines and its configuration parameters depend on the CHANGE_OPTION selection. Schematic 2.176 Block Library Parameters Data Type/ Valid Range/ Default (Length) Options Value Parameter 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 0 None S/RO 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) Spaces Na S The user description of intended application of the block. 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 0 None S The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks. This data is not checked or processed by the block. 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 0 None S The identification number of the plant unit. This information may be used in the host for sorting alarms, etc. 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 O/S Na S The actual, target, permitted and normal modes of the block. 6 BLOCK_ERR Bitstring(2) 7 PI_POINTER Unsigned32 1 to 255 0 0 Units Store/ Idx Mode Description The revision level of static data associated with the function block. E D / RO This parameter reflects the error status associated with the hardware and software components associated with the block. It is a bit string, so multiple errors may be shown. None S Index of the PI associated to the function block or resource. An index of 0 indicates that there is no PI associated to the function block or resource. S This attribute indicates the revision level of the FFB algorithm. The low order 16 bits contain the minor revision level and the upper 16 bits contain the major revision level. 8 CONTENTS_REV Unsigned32 None 9 IN_D1 DS-66 D Discrete Input 1 for the calculation block. 10 IN_D2 DS-66 D Discrete Input 2 for the calculation block. 11 IN_D3 DS-66 D Discrete Input 3 for the calculation block. 12 IN_D4 DS-66 D Discrete Input 4 for the calculation block. 13 IN_D5 DS-66 D Discrete Input 5 for the calculation block. 14 IN_D6 DS-66 D Discrete Input 6 for the calculation block. 15 IN_D7 DS-66 D Discrete Input 7 for the calculation block. 16 IN_D8 DS-66 D Discrete Input 8 for the calculation block. 17 FSTATE_VAL_D1 Unsigned8 0 S The preset discrete value to use in failure for hardware output 1. 18 FSTATE_VAL_D2 Unsigned8 0 S The preset discrete value to use in failure for hardware output 2. 19 FSTATE_VAL_D3 Unsigned8 0 S The preset discrete value to use in failure for hardware output 3. 20 FSTATE_VAL_D4 Unsigned8 0 S The preset discrete value to use in failure for hardware output 4. 21 FSTATE_VAL_D5 Unsigned8 0 S The preset discrete value to use in failure for hardware output 5. 22 FSTATE_VAL_D6 Unsigned8 0 S The preset discrete value to use in failure for hardware output 6 23 FSTATE_VAL_D7 Unsigned8 0 S The preset discrete value to use in failure for hardware output 7. 24 FSTATE_VAL_D8 Unsigned8 0 S The preset discrete value to use in failure for hardware output 8. 25 OUT_D1 DS-66 D / Man The calculated discrete output variable 1 of the block in AUTO mode or specified by the user when in MAN mode. 26 OUT_D2 DS-66 D / Man The calculated discrete output variable 2 of the block in AUTO mode or specified by the user when in MAN mode. 2.177 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Data Type/ Valid Range/ Default (Length) Options Value Parameter 27 OUT_D3 DS-66 D / Man The calculated discrete output variable 3 of the block in AUTO mode or specified by the user when in MAN mode. 28 OUT_D4 DS-66 D / Man The calculated discrete output variable 4 of the block in AUTO mode or specified by the user when in MAN mode. 29 OUT_D5 DS-66 D / Man The calculated discrete output variable 5 of the block in AUTO mode or specified by the user when in MAN mode. 30 OUT_D6 DS-66 D / Man The calculated discrete output variable 6 of the block in AUTO mode or specified by the user when in MAN mode. 31 OUT_D7 DS-66 D / Man The calculated discrete output variable 7 of the block in AUTO mode or specified by the user when in MAN mode. 32 OUT_D8 DS-66 D / Man The calculated discrete output variable 8 of the block in AUTO mode or specified by the user when in MAN mode. 33 HW_IN DS-160 D / Man Data Structure: 16 unsigned8 values and 1 unsigned8 status for Hardware Discrete Inputs. 34 HW_OUT DS-159 D / Man Data Structure: 8 unsigned8 values and 1 unsigned8 status for Hardware Discrete Outputs. 35 AUX_01_16 Bitstring(2) D/ OS Auxiliary bit enumerated variable 01_16. 36 AUX_17_32 Bitstring(2) D/ OS Auxiliary bit enumerated variable 17_32. 37 AUX_33_48 Bitstring(2) D/ OS Auxiliary bit enumerated variable 33_48. 38 AUX_49_64 Bitstring(2) D/ OS Auxiliary bit enumerated variable 49_64. 39 AUX_65_80 Bitstring(2) D/ OS Auxiliary bit enumerated variable 65_80. 40 AUX_81_96 Bitstring(2) D/ OS Auxiliary bit enumerated variable 81_96. 41 TON_PST 16 Floats 42 TON_CTA 16 Floats 43 TON_OUT Bitstring(2) 44 TOFF_PST 16 Floats 45 TOFF_CTA 16 Floats 46 TOFF_OUT Bitstring(2) 47 TP_PST 16 Floats 48 TP_CTA 16 Floats 49 TP_OUT Bitstring(2) 50 2.178 CTU_PST 16 Unsigned32 Positive Positive Positive Positive Units Store/ Idx Mode Description 0 sec S/ OS Array of 16 float elements where the user can set the PST timer duration in seconds for each Timer ON Delay. 0 sec D Array of 16 float elements where the user can read the lapsed time until the PST timer duration in seconds for each Timer ON Delay. D A bit enumerated that indicates the timer output states. 0 sec S/ OS Array of 16 float elements where the user can set the PST timer duration in seconds for each Timer OFF Delay. 0 sec D Array of 16 float elements where the user can read the lapsed time until the PST timer duration in seconds for each Timer OFF Delay. D A bit enumerated that indicates the timer output states. 0 sec S/ OS Array of 16 float elements where the user can set the PST timer duration in seconds for each Timer Pulse. 0 sec D Array of 16 float elements where the user can read the lapsed time until the PST timer duration in seconds for each Timer Pulse. D A bit enumerated that indicates the timer output states. 0 None S/ OS Array of 16 unsigned integer32 elements where the user can set the PST value of each pulse counter. The counter will increment from zero to PST value. Block Library Data Type/ Valid Range/ Default (Length) Options Value Idx Parameter 51 CTU_CTA 16 Unsigned32 52 CTU_OUT Bitstring(2) 53 CTD_PST 16 Unsigned32 54 CTD_CTA 16 Unsigned32 55 CTD_OUT 56 0 Positive Units None Store/ Mode Description D Array of 16 unsigned integer32 elements where the user can read the incremented value of each pulse counter. D A bit enumerated that indicates the counter output states. Array of 16 unsigned integer32 elements where the user can set the PST value of each pulse counter. PST is a preset value since the counter will decrement until zero. 0 None S/ OS 0 None D Array of 16 unsigned integer32 elements where the user can read the decremented value of each pulse counter. Bitstring(2) D A bit enumerated that indicates the counter output states. RS_OUT Bitstring(2) D A bit enumerated that indicates the RS FlipFlop output states. 57 SOUT Bitstring(2) D A bit enumerated that indicates the SR FlipFlop output states. 58 LOGIC_01 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 1. 59 LOGIC_02 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 2. 60 LOGIC_03 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 3. 61 LOGIC_04 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 4. 62 LOGIC_05 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 5. 63 LOGIC_06 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 6. 64 LOGIC_07 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 7. 65 LOGIC_08 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 8. 66 LOGIC_09 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 9. 67 LOGIC_10 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 10. 68 LOGIC_11 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 11. 69 LOGIC_12 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 12. 70 LOGIC_13 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 13. 71 LOGIC_14 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 14. 72 LOGIC_15 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 15. 73 LOGIC_16 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 16. 74 LOGIC_17 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 17. 75 LOGIC_18 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 18. 76 LOGIC_19 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 19. 77 LOGIC_20 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 20. 78 LOGIC_21 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 21. 79 LOGIC_22 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 22. 80 LOGIC_23 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 23. 81 LOGIC_24 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 24. 82 LOGIC_25 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 25. 83 LOGIC_26 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 26. 84 LOGIC_27 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 27. 85 LOGIC_28 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 28. 86 LOGIC_29 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 29. 87 LOGIC_30 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 30. 88 LOGIC_31 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 31. 89 LOGIC_32 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 32. 2.179 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Data Type/ Valid Range/ Default (Length) Options Value Store/ Idx Parameter Units 90 LOGIC_33 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 33. 91 LOGIC_34 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 34. 92 LOGIC_35 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 35. 93 LOGIC_36 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 36. 94 LOGIC_37 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 37. 95 LOGIC_38 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 38. 96 LOGIC_39 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 39. 97 LOGIC_40 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 40. 98 LOGIC_41 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 41. Mode Description 99 LOGIC_42 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 42. 100 LOGIC_43 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 43. 101 LOGIC_44 VisibleString(24) S/ OS Logical Line Command 44. 102 LOGIC_45 VisibleString(24) 103 LOGIC_46 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 46. 104 LOGIC_47 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 47. 105 LOGIC_48 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 48. 106 LOGIC_49 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 49. 107 LOGIC_50 VisibleString(24) Spaces Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 50. 1 - Checked. Na D/OS Allows the check for logic line. 1 S Indicates the logic line where there is an error. S Indicated the code for the error in the logic line. Spaces Spaces Na Na S/ OS Logical Line Command 45. 0 - Enable., 108 LOGIC_CHECk Unsigned8 1 – Checked. 2- Changed but not checked yet. 109 ERROR_LINE Unsigned8 0-50 Na 0 - Logic Ok. 1 - Exceed String Length or string not valid. 2 - Non valid operand. 3 - No implemented logic or missing ';' 4 - Missing parentheses or argument not valid. 110 ERROR_CODE Unsigned8 3 - No implemented Na logic or 6 - Argument not missing ';' valid. 5 - Non valid resource. 7 - Function not valid 8 - Non available resource. 9 - Non valid attribution. 10 - First Argument not valid. 11- Second Argument not valid. 2.180 Block Library Idx 111 Parameter CHANGE_OPTION Data Type/ Valid Range/ Default (Length) Options Value Unsigned8 0 - Logic parameter changes are only allowed in Out of Service. 1 - Always accept Logic parameter changes. 112 UPDATE_EVT 113 BLOCK_ALM 0 - Logic parameter changes are only allowed Na in Out of Service. DS-73 DS-72 Store/ Units Na Na Description Mode S Enable logic parameter changes independent of Mode Block parameter D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Gray Background Line: Custom Parameters The following table describes the Logic Operation and Command line and the correspondent Symbols used in the logic line: Logic Operation and Command line AND OR XOR NOT EQUAL (arg1,arg2) ; Symbol - description & | ^ ! = To define function arguments End of logic line The logic NOT (!) works only with simple variables. Example: OUT1=!IN1; Note That is not allowed to have, for example, OUT1=!TP01(IN1);. To use this way, we should have: A01= TP01(IN1);. -> OUT1=!A01; The logic is always executed line by line and from left to right in the logic line. Spaces are not allowed between the characters. It is not allowed empty lines between logic lines and the implemantation of logic lines must be in sequence. After writing the logic into the LOGIC_XX (XX:01 -> XX:50) parameters, the user needs to select the option “Enable” in the parameter LOGIC_CHECK to verify the errors. When the logic is configured using the download process, it is necessary to configure firstly the LOGIC_XX (XX:01 -> XX:50) parameters and then the LOGIC_CKECK parameter. This sequence is fundamental to performing the check. The following table shows the mnemonic for each block parameter used in the logic lines. The mnemonic must be in capital letters: 2.181 Function Blocks Instruction Manual 2.182 Parameter Mnemonic HW_IN.Value1 I01 HW_IN.Value2 I02 HW_IN.Value3 I03 HW_IN.Value4 I04 HW_IN.Value5 I05 HW_IN.Value6 I06 HW_IN.Value7 I07 HW_IN.Value8 I08 HW_IN.Value9 I09 HW_IN.Value10 I10 HW_IN.Value11 I11 HW_IN.Value12 I12 HW_IN.Value13 I13 HW_IN.Value14 I14 HW_IN.Value15 I15 HW_IN.Value16 I16 HW_IN.Status SI HW_OUT.Status SO HW_OUT.Value1 O1 HW_OUT.Value2 O2 HW_OUT.Value3 O3 HW_OUT.Value4 O4 HW_OUT.Value5 O5 HW_OUT.Value6 O6 HW_OUT.Value7 O7 HW_OUT.Value8 O8 IN_D1.Status IN1S IN_D2.Status IN2S IN_D3.Status IN3S IN_D4.Status IN4S IN_D5.Status IN5S IN_D6.Status IN6S IN_D7.Status IN7S IN_D8.Status IN8S IN_D1.Value IN1 IN_D2.Value IN2 IN_D3.Value IN3 IN_D4.Value IN4 IN_D5.Value IN5 IN_D6.Value IN6 IN_D7.Value IN7 IN_D8.Value IN8 OUT_D1.Status SOUT1 OUT_D2.Status SOUT2 OUT_D3.Status SOUT3 OUT_D4.Status SOUT4 OUT_D5.Status SOUT5 OUT_D6.Status SOUT6 Block Library Parameter Mnemonic OUT_D7.Status SOUT7 OUT_D8.Status SOUT8 OUT_D1.Value OUT1 OUT_D2.Value OUT2 OUT_D3.Value OUT3 OUT_D4.Value OUT4 OUT_D5.Value OUT5 OUT_D6.Value OUT6 OUT_D7.Value OUT7 OUT_D8.Value OUT8 FSTATE_VAL_D1 FS1 FSTATE_VAL_D2 FS2 FSTATE_VAL_D3 FS3 FSTATE_VAL_D4 FS4 FSTATE_VAL_D5 FS5 FSTATE_VAL_D6 FS6 FSTATE_VAL_D7 FS7 FSTATE_VAL_D8 FS8 AUX_01_16 A01-A16 AUX_17_32 A17-A32 AUX_33_48 A33-A48 AUX_49_64 A49-A64 AUX_65_80 A65-A80 AUX_81_96 A81-A96 TON TON01-TON16 TOFF TOF01-TOF16 TP TP01-TP16 CTU CTU01-CTU16 CTD CTD01-CTD16 RS RS01-RS16 SR SR01-SR16 Functions For each type of function there are 16 available resources and the user can user only once each resource. To use the function results, the user can make attribution for auxiliary bits. TP TIMER PULSE This function generates a fixed time pulse in the output timer for every rising (false to true transition) on the input timer. The pulse width is determined by TP_PST parameter in seconds. Transitions in the input timer will be ignored while the pulse is active. The current time is available in the TP_CTA parameter. 2.183 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Timer Pulse Function – timing diagrams The syntax for Timer Pulse is: TPxx(arg) Where, xx is the used resource from 01 to 16 and arg is the function argument and it must be a simple variable. Examples: O1=TP01(IN1); OUT1= TP01(A05); OUT3=TP08(FS1); For example, the following examples are not allowed in the logic line: O1=TP01(IN1&IN2);: note that the argument is a result of an operation, it is not allowed. O1=TP10(!IN1);: note that the argument is a result of NOT function, it is not allowed. O1=TP10(CTD01(IN1,IN2));: note that the argument is a result of a function, it is not allowed. TON TIMER ON-DELAY This function delays the timer output of going to true for a period of time after the input has moved to true. This period is configured by TON_PST parameter in seconds. If the input goes to false before the PST time, the output timer will remain in false. The CTA parameter will show the remainder time until PST value. Timer On-Delay Function – timing diagrams The syntax for Timer On-Delay is: TONxx(arg) Where, xx is the used resource from 01 to 16 and arg is the function argument and it must be a simple variable . Examples: O1=TON01(IN1)&SI; OUT1= TON01(A05); OUT3=TON08(FS1); 2.184 Block Library For example, the following examples are not allowed in the logic line: O1=TON01(IN1&IN2);: note that the argument is a result of an operation, it is not allowed. O1=TON10(!IN1);: note that the argument is a result of NOT function, it is not allowed. O1=TON10(CTD01(IN1,IN2));: note that the argument is a result of a function, it is not allowed. TOF TIMER OFF-DELAY This function extends the true state of timer input for a determined period of time for the output timer. This period is configured by TOF_PST parameter in seconds. If the input goes to true before the out goes to false, the out will stay on true and the time period will begin to count again at the moment when the input goes to false. The CTA parameter will show the remainder time until PST value. Timer OFF-Delay Function – timing diagrams The syntax for Timer Off-Delay is: TOFxx(arg) Where, xx is the used resource from 01 to 16 and arg is the function argument and it must be a simple variable .Examples: O1=TOF01(IN1)&SI; OUT1= TOF01(A05); OUT3=TOF08(FS1); For example, the following examples are not allowed in the logic line: O1=TOF01(IN1&IN2);: note that the argument is a result of an operation, it is not allowed. O1=TOF10(!IN1);: note that the argument is a result of NOT function, it is not allowed. O1=TOF10(CTD01(IN1,IN2));: note that the argument is a result of a function, it is not allowed. CTD PULSE COUNTER DOWN This function is used to count rising transitions (from false to true) in the counter input(arg1). Every time it is seeing a rising transition the internal counter accumulator (CTA) decrements of one. When the CTA reaches zero the counter output will go to true. The counter value will be preset for PST.A transition from false to true in the second argument(arg2) presets the counter. The syntax for CTD is: CTDxx(arg1,arg2) Where, xx is the used resource from 01 to 16 and arg1 and arg2 are the function arguments and they must be simple variables. Examples: O3=CTD10(IN1,IN2); OUT1=CTD03(A11,A14)&SI; For example, the following examples are not allowed in the logic line: O1=CTD01(IN1&IN2,IN3);: note that the argument is a result of an operation, it is not allowed. O1=CTD10(!IN1,IN3);: note that the argument is a result of NOT function, it is not allowed. O1=CTD10(TP01(IN1),IN2);: note that the argument is a result of a function, it is not allowed. 2.185 Function Blocks Instruction Manual CTU PULSE COUNTER UP This function is used to count rising transitions (from false to true) in the counter input(arg1). Every time it is seeing a rising transition the internal counter accumulator (CTA) increments of one. When the CTA reaches the preset value PST, the counter output will go to true. A transition from false to true in the second argument(arg2) resets the counter. The syntax for CTU is: CTUxx(arg1,arg2) Where, xx is the used resource from 01 to 16 and arg1 and arg2 are the function arguments and they must be simple variables. Examples: O3=CTU10(IN1,IN2); OUT1=CTU03(A11,A14)&SI; For example, the following examples are not allowed in the logic line: O1=CTU01(IN1&IN2,IN3);: note that the argument is a result of an operation, it is not allowed. O1=CTU10(!IN1,IN3);: note that the argument is a result of NOT function, it is not allowed. O1=CTU10(TP01(IN1),IN2);: note that the argument is a result of a function, it is not allowed. RS FLIP-FLOP This function has the following operation table: R(arg1) 0 0 1 1 S(arg2) 0 1 0 1 OUT Last state 1 0 0 The syntax for RS Flip-Flop is: RSxx(arg1,arg2) Where, xx is the used resource from 01 to 16 and arg1 and arg2 are the function arguments and they must be simple variables. Examples: O3=RS10(IN1,IN2); OUT1=RS03(A11,A14)&SI; For example, the following examples are not allowed in the logic line: O1=RS01(IN1&IN2,IN3);: note that the argument is a result of an operation, it is not allowed. O1=RS10(!IN1,IN3);: note that the argument is a result of NOT function, it is not allowed. O1=RS10(TP01(IN1),IN2);: note that the argument is a result of a function, it is not allowed. SR FLIP-FLOP This function has the following operation table: S(arg1) 0 0 1 1 R(arg2) 0 1 0 1 OUT Last state 0 1 1 The syntax for SR Flip-Flop is: SRxx(arg1,arg2) Where, xx is the used resource from 01 to 16 and arg1 and arg2 are the function arguments and they must be simple variables. Examples: O3=SR10(IN1,IN2); OUT1=SR03(A11,A14)&SI; For example, the following examples are not allowed in the logic line: O1=SR01(IN1&IN2,IN3);: note that the argument is a result of an operation, it is not allowed. O1=SR10(!IN1,IN3);: note that the argument is a result of NOT function, it is not allowed. O1=SR10(TP01(IN1),IN2);: note that the argument is a result of a function, it is not allowed. 2.186 Block Library Error Code Some examples of error conditions: Error Code: "Exceed String Length or string not valid." a) OUT1=IN1&IN2&IN2|IN4^IN5|IN6; Note that they are 29 characters on the string and the maximum allowed is 24. b) OUT1=IN1&in2; Note that the logic is case sensitive. All characters must be in capital letters. Error Code: "Non valid operand." OUT1=IN1%IN2; Note that the % is not allowed. See the table that describes the Logic Operation and Command line. Error Code: "No implemented logic or missing ';' ." OUT1=IN1 Note that is missing the “; “at the final of logic line. Error Code: "Missing parentheses or argument not valid." OUT1=TP10(IN1; Note that is missing parentheses in the timer pulse function. Error Code: "Non valid resource." OUT1=TP18(IN1); Note there are 16 resources for each function Error Code: "Argument not valid." OUT1=TP10(IN10); Note there are only 8 inputs. IN10 is not valid argument. Error Code: "Function not valid." OUT1=TR10(IN1); Note that TR is not valid function. Error Code: "Non available resource." OUT1=TP10(IN1); A03=TP10(IN7); Note there are 16 resources for each function and the resource 10 for the timer was already in using than the user needs to select other resource for the logic line: A03=TP10(IN7); Error Code: "Non valid attribution." IN1=IN2^TP03(IN4); Note that is not allowed attribution to inputs. Error Code: "First Argument not valid." OUT1=CTD01(!IN1,IN2); Note that the arguments are necessarily simple variables and not functions. 2.187 Function Blocks Instruction Manual OUT1=RS11(IN15,IN2); Note that the first argument is not allowed. Error Code: "Second Argument not valid." a) OUT1=CTD01(IN1,!IN2); Note that the arguments are necessarily simple variables and not functions. OUT1=RS11(IN1,IN20); Note that the second argument is not allowed. Example of applications: 1) According to the next figure, we have an industrial application where the aim is to fill up the bottles with a chemical fluid. The conveyor moves the bottles up to the filling direction and then the bottle is detected by a sensor .The conveyor must stop and open the valve of filling and the level is detected by another sensor. After detecting the level, the system must wait for 10 seconds and then moves the conveyor again until the next bottle. Using the Flexible Function Block we have the following definitions: The conveyor will be turned on using the hardware output 01 (O1); The fluid valve will be turned on using the hardware output 02 (O2); The bottle sensor will be connected to the hardware input 01 (I01); The level sensor will be connected to the hardware input 02 (I02); The power system will be connected to the hardware input 03 (I03); We have the following configuration: TON_PST resource [01] = 10.0s. LOGIC_01 A01=TON01(I02); LOGIC_02 O1=I03&!I01|A01; LOGIC_03 O2=I01&!I02; Making an analogy to ladder programming, we have: 2.188 Block Library 2) The following application we have the control of steps to operate an electro-mechanical balance, that weights phosphatic stone . The weight process is done by boat-load, the system executes one full weight cycle each interval time of 20 seconds. See the following figure: M1 e M3 - Motors for the conveyors C2 e C4 - Limit Switches LSH - High Level Sensor LSL - Low Level Sensor SG - Load Cell SV - Solenoid Valve M - Bucket Motor P - Comport Piston 2.189 Function Blocks Instruction Manual C - Weight Circuit Process: The system requires the following conditions to startup: • The phosphatic stone level (LSL non activated); • Oil Pressure (PSL on); • Conveyor 02 active (M3 on); • Bucket in initial position (C4 on); After the initial conditions, we note: • Activating the power switch, the comport opens, and then this begins the loading bucket • After reaches the desired weight, the comport closes. After 5 seconds, the bucket o rotates 180 and unload the product into the conveyor 02. Observation: This new detected position will be detected by C2 and after 5 seconds, the bucket will have to return to initial position and this will be detected by C4. • After the bucket return to the initial position, we have a new weight cycle. Comment: - The operation sequence must be stopped if any requiring is not satisfied. - The silo comport is activated by a hydraulic piston. Using the Flexible Function Block we have the following definitions: • LSL will be connected to the hardware input 01 (I01); • LSH will be connected to the hardware input 02 (I02); • PSL will be connected to the hardware input 03 (I03); • C2 will be connected to the hardware input 04 (I04); • C4 will be connected to the hardware input 05 (I05); • Power will be connected to the hardware input 06 (I06); • M3 will be connected to the hardware input 07 (I07); • M will be activated by hardware output 01 (O1); • The Comport will be activated by hardware output 02 (O2); • M1 will be activated by hardware output 03 (O3); We have the following configuration: TON_PST resource [01] = 5.0s. LOGIC_01 A01=!I01&I03&I07&I05; LOGIC_02 A02=I06&RS01(I02,I01); LOGIC_03 O3=A02&I03; LOGIC_04 A03=I03&I07; LOGIC_05 O2=I06&A03&!I04; LOGIC_06 O1=TON01(I04)&!I05&A03; 3) Using Fault-State values: Lets suppose we have the following condition: - A01: it receives the logic between the status for discrete inputs like this: A01=IN1S&IN2S; when the status is bad for one of these inputs then A01=false(0), otherwise, A01=true (1); - FS1: it is the fault-state value for O1; - A02: it is the bit containing the logic for O1; We have the following table between the FS1, A01 and A02: 2.190 Block Library FS1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 A01 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 A02 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 O1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 Then, A03=!FS1&A01&A02; A04=FS1&!A01&!A02; A05=FS1&!A01&A02; A06=FS1&A01&A02; O1=A03|A04|A05|A06; 2.191 Function Blocks Instruction Manual HART Function Blocks Instructions on HI302 Configuration The minimum configuration to be applied in the Syscon consists of: • • • • 1 RESOURCE block; 1 HCFG block; 1HIRT block for each HART device; Just one HVT block, if necessary to use specific commands or a complete set of “Common Practice” commands. This block is shared with all the devices installed. The maximum block limit and its quantity in the factory configuration are shown below: BLOCK MAXIMUM FCT INIT RS 1 1 DIAG 1 1 MAO/MAI 1* 1* HCFG 1 1 HBC 1 0 HIRT 32 8 HVT 1 1 HCD 4 0 HWPC 4 0 * Except for the HI302-N = 0 IMPORTANT Every time a download is performed, wait until the yellow LED turns off in order to save the data in the EEPROM memory. After saving, you can turn off the equipment or reset it. If the equipment is turned off or reset during the data saving procedure, the configuration must be done again. See the chapter “HI302 Configuration Example” for more details. HCFG Block Configuring the HCFG block The HCFG block (HART Configuration) has a series of parameters which can be divided into two categories: operation parameters and diagnostic parameters. 2.192 Block Library HART communication Operation Parameters FIRMWARE_VERSION: A parameter indispensable to solve problems. If something is not working properly, confirm the equipment version before contacting the technical support. COMM_BEHAVIOR: Defines the HI302 behavior. It can operate in two ways: if the parameter is Autonomous, the HI302 communicates with the HART devices by using the previous configuration, i.e., in an independent way. The second way uses bypass parameters to send and receive HART messages. To do so, this parameter should be configured as Bypass. COMM_ENABLE: This parameter has two important functions: • To disable the whole HART communication for maintenance and configuration changes; • To validate the configuration loaded in the equipment and then begin the communication (afterwards). Its first value is DISABLED. Before making any change in the block configuration, (a must) set it on ENABLED, stopping the HART communication. After the configuration download, this parameter should be re-set to ENABLED. ATTENTION When changing the channel in the HIRT block or downloading new configurations, this parameter is automatically set on DISABLED, stopping, then, the HART communication in all channels. When the download finishes ENABLED must be set manually. If this procedure is not performed, the HI302 will not work properly. CHANNEL_ACTIVE: This indicates how many HIRT blocks are instantiated for each HART channel. If no HIRT block is instantiated for the channel, the corresponding element of this parameter will display NO and the channel will be deactivated. As a result, there will be no device communication or scanning. The LED channel will blink at approximately ¼ Hz. This parameter is useful to check the configuration. The HVT block is also counted in this parameter. 2.193 Function Blocks Instruction Manual MASTER_TYPE: This parameter allows for adjusting the channel as a Primary master or as a Secondary master. Remember that each channel is an independent master. In normal conditions, the channel should be a primary master in order to permit the use of a portable configurator. RETRIES: This parameter adjusts the number of times the HI302 will try to communicate with a device, before detecting that the device doesn’t respond. The standard value is 3 retries. HART Communication Diagnostic Parameters MASTER_SYNCHRONIZED: Indicates if every Master channel has synchronized the communication layer and if each is ready to transmit the HART messages in normal operation or in Bypass mode. CHANNEL_MODE: Indicates if the channel is operating normally or there is any device in BURST_MODE. MASTER_STATE: Shows the status of the HART channel at every moment:. • • • WATCHING, indicates that the channel is only reading data that passes through the line and are crucial to keep the synchronism if there is another Master or any device in Burst mode. ENABLED, the channel is free to send a HART message. USING, indicates that a message was sent and a corresponding response is expected. The response has to be sent within the maximum number of retries configured in the RETRIES parameter. COMM_ERRORS: shows the percentage of detected errors in the communication of each HART channel. If the error percentage is lower than 0,5%, communication is in high quality. REQUEST_COUNTER: Totals the number of messages sent by each channel, including the retries. RETRIES_COUNTER: Totals the number of repetitions for each channel. A high value in this parameter (>0,5%) may indicate any installation problem or any command not supported by the device. INVALID_SOM: Totals the number of invalid SOM (Start of Message) detected in the channel. A high value in this parameter may indicate installation problems or any device with a problem. INVALID_RX_FRAMES: Totals the number of HART messages received but not considered because of any inconsistency in the message, for example, checksum error. VALID_RX_FRAMES: Totals the number of valid messages received and processed by the HI302, even if they are not addressed to it, for example, OACK, OBACK, STX etc WARNING The counter parameters, used for diagnostic purposes, are always reset when the COMM_ENABLE parameter goes to ENABLED. 2.194 Block Library HIRT Block Configuring the HIRT block This block has a set of parameters that map all of the HART variables that can be accessed by the universal commands and by the some of the most usable “common practice” commands. Remember that there is a HIRT block for each HART device installed and that the configuration may vary according to the application mode and type. A minimum set of parameters needs a configuration to allow the HI302 to work properly. Most of the parameters have standard values that are suitable for many operation cases. Thus, it is not necessary to download them. However, a comprehensive analysis must be done in order to determine the best profile for each device configuration. The HI302 offers several resources that must be understood. The parameters that require configuration to work are the following: MODE_BLK: Should be set on AUTO. If it is in OS, the communication with the respective device is interrupted. When the block is set on OS, it returns to the initial Identification state. When it is set on AUTO, all the update and identification processes are repeated. HART_CHANNEL: Indicates the channel on which the device is installed, from 1 to 8. In normal operation, any change in this parameter will stop the HART communication. See the HCFG.COMM_ENABLE parameter. POLL_ADDR: Indicates the polling address that has been configured in the device, from 0 to 15. This address is used to recognize the device if the command 0 has been selected in the ID_CMD parameter. IMPORTANT If the HART communication is enabled and this parameter has been written, the HI302 will accept the writing in the HART device and will generate a writing transaction. To change this value, without doing it in the device, write DISABLED in the HCFG.COMM_ENABLE parameter or set the block on OS. 2.195 Function Blocks Instruction Manual HART_TAG: the HART device’s tag that can be configured by the HI302 module or by a portable configurator. It supports 8 characters and is used by the command 11 to identify the device. The same POLL_ADDR writing observation mentioned above, applies here. ID_CMD: This parameter indicates to the module which universal command identification (0, or 11) will be used to identify the device. The standard value is 0: • The command 0 uses the “polling address” (POLL_ADDR) and is the most used command. • The command 11 uses an 8-character tag and can be used provided the device has a tag configured in the block through the HART_TAG parameter. This option is indicated when there are equipments in multidrop. IMPORTANT The identification using TAG is very useful when the device is operating in the multidrop mode and the analog signal is enabled, ranging from 4 mA to 20 mA. In this case, the polling address for all devices in the channel should be 0 making the identification impossible through the command 0. IMPORTANT If the command 0 is selected, the HI302 will find the device by scanning the polling address from 0 to 15. This is a useful function if the user does not know the device’s polling address and its Tag because it identifies the device automatically. This function must not be used in multidrop topologies for obvious reasons. POLL_CTRL: Indicates if the HI302 will keep polling the device IMPORTANT The HI302 will poll the device only if the block has performed the initial procedure successfully and reached the UPDATE status. See the BLK_EXEC_STATE parameter. COMMON_CMD_FILTER: This parameter is a set of filters that prevents a HART command configured and not supported by the device, to be sent. Their elements should be filled in the HCD block with the definition index of the HART command. See the chapter “Example of Configuration” for more details. VIEW_SELECTION: Allows the user to choose the group of variables to be updated cyclically in the polling, according to the following table: HIRT Block Output Parameters See in the following picture the HIRT block diagram. It shows the output parameters that can be used in the FF strategy. Although each HIRT block has 8 output parameters, the maximum limit of HI302 external links is 15. This limit applies to all external links between all device blocks, including MAI and MAO, if they are used. This limit is going to be extended in future implementations. 2.196 Block Library DYNAMIC VARIABLES POLLING MAP - VIEWS DESCRIPTION View number Needs Configuration? Polling cycle ~ [s] Parameter name COMM_ERR DEVICE_STATUS ADDITIONAL_STATUS LOOP_CURRENT PV PERC PV_UC PV_VAL SV_UC SV_VAL TV_UC TV_VAL QV_UC QV_VAL A1_UC A1_VAL A2_UC A2_VAL A3_UC A3_VAL A4_UC A4_VAL B1_UC B1_VAL B2_UC B2_VAL B3_UC B3_VAL B4_UC B4_VAL C1_UC C1_VAL C2_UC C2_VAL C3_UC C3_VAL C4_UC C4_VAL D1_UC D1_VAL D2_UC D2_VAL D3_UC D3_VAL D4_UC D4_VAL 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 N N Y 2 3 2 X X X X X Y Y Y 2 2 3 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Y Y X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 3 3 4 6 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 5 Updated Parameters X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Configuration needed? : N means that no additional configuration must be done in order to read/write the VIEW-related parameters. Otherwise, if Y, the corresponding parameters XX_CODE must be set to a proper value in order to tell to HI302 which HART variables are associated which the parameters. This is necessary because HART command 33 is used to read those values and HI302 takes the values stored at XX_CODE parameters to assembly HART command 33. Check the device´s specific documentation to find out the variable codes associated with command 33. Poling cycle ~ [s] : represents the approximate time that each polling cycle will take for that particular VIEW. This time is evaluated as 1 second for each HART transaction (issued command). 2.197 Function Blocks Instruction Manual HVT Block Configuring the HVT Block The HVT block can be seen as a complement for the HIRT block. It includes all non-mapped variables in the HIRT block. Therefore, it is not necessary to have all of the parameters configured, except the following: MODE_BLK: Should be set on AUTO. If it is set on OS, the block operation will stop. When the block is set on OS, it returns to the initial Identification state. When the block is set on AUTO, the block identification and the update process is repeated if there is a valid TAG in the DEV_TAG_SEL parameter. DEV_TAG_SEL: This parameter doesn’t need to be configured for the download. It connects the HIRT block to the HVT block temporarily, allowing the HVT block to communicate with the HART device. This connection is made through the HART_TAG parameter. If the supervisory software has to read the HVT parameters for any device, it should fill the device’s HART_TAG. The HVT block then searches in every HIRT block for a written HART_TAG in order to make an association with it automatically. Then, it identifies the HART device and the specific command configuration to be used, as long as this configuration is stored in the Flash memory of the HI302 or in any HCD block. See the chapter about Functioning Theory for more details. HI302-I - Configuring the MAI block All HI302-I inputs have an input circuit for the 4-20 mA acquisition. So, it is possible to instantiate a block with a multiple analog input or with 8-output parameters that provide the percentage value of the analog input related to the 16 mA span (4 mA = 0% and 20 mA = 100%). This block needs no configuration to operate. MODE_BLK: Set on AUTO. HI302-O - Configuring the MAO block The HI302-O has 8 HART channels in parallel to circuits that control the loop current and the actuators connected to them. The input parameter value should always be written in percentage. The following parameters should be configured: MODE_BLK: Set on AUTO. There are other configuration options, for example, the output value in case of failure. Starting the HI302 Operation After configuring the block, download it. Upon the download completion, set the HCFG.COMM_ENABLE parameter on ENABLED to enable the configuration and start the HART communication over all channels. IMPORTANT After the download is completed, the configuration should be saved in the non-volatile memory. Saving is automatic and starts with the download. It will take approximately 20 minutes, according to the configuration size. While the SAVING LED is lit, the HI302 cannot be turned off or reset, otherwise, the configuration will be lost.. If the user has devices whose configuration is already in the HI302 memory, e.g. Smar devices, go to the chapter about operation and functioning theory. In case the user has to set a specific configuration, see the chapter about advanced configuration, first. For more details on how to configure the HI302, visit our site www.smar.com. 2.198 Block Library Calibrating the analog HI302circuits In order to achieve the most accurate operation of the HI302-I or HI302-O, it is important to calibrate the analog boards. During the factory tests, a preliminary calibration is done, being sufficient for most applications. However, it may be necessary to perform a new calibration in the field. To do so, follow the steps described in the Help of the HCFG.ANALOG_INPUT_TRIM or HCFG.ANALOG_OUTPUT_CAL parameters. See a summary below. Important When the calibration is done, it is valid for the pair GLL1193+(GLL1205 or GLL1194). If the analog board has been changed for any reason, a new calibration should be done because the calibration data is stored in the base board for that particular analog board (GLL1193). Calibration of the HI302-I (GLL1205) To calibrate a GLL1205, the user should use an accurate current source and follow the steps below: 1. Apply a 12 mA current (50% of the 16mA span) to each input. The calibration can be done in only one channel or in all of the 8 channels at once. 2. After stabilizing the current, write the number of the desired channel on the HCFG.ANALOG_INPUT_TRIM parameter or write All Channels to calibrate all of them at once. 3. Check, in the MAI block, if the value of the current is 50%. If the reading, in any channel, is incorrect, re-do the procedures. 4. If the reading in the 8 channels is 50%, write on the HCFG.ANALOG_INPUT_TRIM parameter the Trimmed and Checked value in order to save the calibration data. 5. Wait until the SAVING Led turns off and then, turn off the device. The accuracy of the HI302-I analog input is approximately 0.15% of the span for all the operation o temperature range (0 to 50 C). During operation, for the temperatures around the calibration one o (±2 C), the accuracy can reach approximately 0.05%. Calibration of the HI302-O (GLL1194) The user should use an accurate multimeter to calibrate the GLL1194. Follow the steps below: 1. Write 50% on all of the input parameters of the MAO block. 2. Measure the current in each loop using the multimeter. Write each read value on the corresponding element of the HCFG.ANALOG_OUTPUT_CAL[channel] parameter. Write all of the numbers displayed on the multimeter to maximum accuracy. 3. Measure the current again and check if its value has changed, that is, approximately 12 mA. 4. In case the current has changed, write on the HCFG.ANALOG_INPUT_TRIM parameter the Trimmed and Checked value to save the calibration data. The accuracy of the HI302-O analog output is approximately 0.5% of the span for all of the o operation temperature range (0 to 50 C). During operation, for the temperatures around the o calibration one (±2 C), the accuracy can reach approximately 0.1%. 2.199 Function Blocks Instruction Manual HIRT - HART IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION AND REAL TIME DATA Parameters Idx Parameter Data Type 0 BLOCK_STRUCTUR E DS-64 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 6 BLK_ERR Bitstring(2) 7 HART_CHANNEL Unsigned8 8 ID_CMD Units Store/ Mode NA S 0 None S / RO Spaces NA S 0 None S 0 None S O/S NA S None D / RO HART Read Hart Write See Mode Parameter None S HART channel where the device is attached to. 0: 0 - Polling Enumerated Address 11: 11 - HART Tag 0 - Polling Address None S Selects the HART Universal Command used to identify the device associated with this block. Automatic None S If Automatic, HI302 will try to (re)identify the device by scanning througout the polling address range. Also, if the device stops to respond, HI302 will periodically send a request trying to reconnect. If Manual, such operations must be done by changing MODE_BLK from OOS to AUTO. 0 None S Device's Polling (short) Address). Spaces NA S Device's TAG. Polling Enabled NA S Real Time Data Polling Control. 0x00: Automatic Boolean 10 POLL_ADDR Unsigned8 11 HART_TAG VisibleString( 8) POLL_CTRL Description 1 ID_METHOD 2.200 1 to 255 Default Value 1 to 8 9 12 Valid Range / Options Boolean 0x01: Manual 0 to 15 0x01: Polling Enabled 0x00: Polling Disabled 7 6 13 18 Block Library Idx Parameter Data Type Valid Range / Options Default Value Units Store/ Mode VIEW_00 None S Selects the set of parameters to be updated at each polling cycle. See HI302's user manual for further information about each VIEW. 0 None S This parameter has 5 positions to ignore commands present in configuration but not supported by the device. See HI302´s User Manual for a complete list of that commands. Identification None Description HART Read Hart Write 0x00: VIEW_00, 0x01: VIEW_01 0x02: VIEW_02, 0x03: VIEW_03 0x04: VIEW_04, 0x05: VIEW_05 0x06: VIEW_06, 0x07: VIEW_07 0x08: VIEW_08, 0x09: VIEW_09 0x0A: VIEW_10, 0x0B: VIEW_11 0x0C: VIEW_12, 0x0D: VIEW_13 13 VIEW_SELECTION Enumerated 0x0E: VIEW_14, 0x0F: VIEW_15 0x10: VIEW_16, 0x11: VIEW_17 0x12: VIEW_18, 0x13: VIEW_19 0x14: VIEW_20, 0x15: VIEW_21 0x16: VIEW_22, 0x17: VIEW_23 0x18: VIEW_24, 0x19: VIEW_25 0x1A: VIEW_26, 0x1B: VIEW_27 0x1C: VIEW_28, 0x1D: VIEW_29 14 COMMON_CMD_FIL Unsigned8[5] TER 0x00: Identification 0x01: Old Data 0x02: Updating 0x03: Updated 0x04: Partially Updated 15 BLK_EXEC_STATE 0x05: Not Enumerated Responding 0x06: Bypass Status of parameter update information and D / RO HART communication. Normal condition is UPDATED. 0x07: Device Not Found 0x08: HCD Error 0x09: TAG Not Found 0x0A: Writing 2.201 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Idx Parameter Data Type Valid Range / Options Default Value Units Store/ Mode HART Read Hart Write None First byte of the last transaction´s Response D / RO Code if communication error has occurred (Bit7 = 1). All All NA Second byte of the last transaction´s Response D / RO Code. See HI302's User Manual or HART specification for further details. All All 48 Description 0x00: No Comm Error 0x01: Undefined 0x02: Buffer Overflow 0x04: Reserved 16 COMM_ERR BitString(8) 0x08: Longitudinal Parity Errorr No Comm Error 0x10: Framing Error 0x20 : Overrun Error 0x40: Vertical Parity Error 0x80: Comm Error 0x01: Primary Variable Out of Limits 0x02: Non-Primary Variable Out of Limits 0x04: Loop Current Saturated 17 DEVICE_STATUS BitString(8) 0x08: Loop Current Fixed 0 0x10: More Status Available 0x20: Cold Start 0x40: Configuration Changed 0x80: Device Malfunction 18 ADDITIONAL_STATU S OctString(6) 0 NA Cyclic read depends on chosen VIEW. Device Additional D / RO specific Status. See device´s specific documentation for details. 19 Enumerated HC TABLE 8 0 None Manufacturer ID Code. D / RO Used to select specific configuration for HVT block. (0, 11) None Manufacturer Device Type Code. Used to D / RO select specific configuration for HVT block. (0, 11) None Revision Level of the HART Universal D / RO Commands. Used to select specific configuration for HVT block. (0, 11) None Revision Level of the Device Specific. Used to D / RO select specific configuration for HVT block. (0, 11) 20 21 22 2.202 MAN_ID DEV_TYPE UNI_REV SPEC_REV Unsigned8 Unsigned8 Unsigned8 0 0 0 Block Library Default Value Units Store/ Mode Unsigned8 0 None Software Revision Level. D / RO Used to select specific configuration for HVT block. (0, 11) HRDW_REV Unsigned8 0 None D / RO Hardware Level. (0, 11) 25 FLAGS BitString(8) 0 NA D / RO Flags (manufacturer specific). (0, 11) 26 DEV_ID OctString(3) 0 NA D / RO Device ID Number. (0, 11) Idx Parameter Data Type 23 SW_REV 24 Valid Range / Options HC TABLE 11 Description Revision HART Read 27 LOOP_CURRENT DS-65 0 mA D Cyclic read depends on chosen VIEW. Loop Current Value (milliamps). LOOP_CURRENT.VAL UE: loop mA last value, LOOP_CURRENT.STA TUS: HART Response Code converted to FF status. See HI302´s User Manual for further details. 28 LOOP_TEST Float 0 mA D Write the desired current value in mA to enter fixed current mode. Write 0 to exit fixed current mode. 29 LOOP_CMODE 0 None 30 MESSAGE Spaces NA 31 DESCRIPTOR Spaces NA 32 DATE_INFO 1/1/2001 00:00:00:00 00 NA 33 WRITE_PCODE Enumerated HC TABLE 7 0 None 34 PLDC Enumerated HC TABLE 8 0 None 35 PV_ACF Enumerated HC TABLE 26 0 None 36 FAN OctString(3) 0 NA 0x00: Invoke Self Enumerated Test 0 None 0 None Enumerated HC TABLE 16 VisibleString( 32) VisibleString( 16) Date 37 DEV_TEST 38 DEV_RESET 39 BURST_MODE Enumerated HC TABLE 9 0 None 40 PV_ULRUC Enumerated HC TABLE 2 0 None 41 PV_RANGE {0, 0, 0, 0} XD_SCAL E 42 PV_CAL_POINT_L 0 None Unsigned8 0x00: Reset Device DS-68 Enumerated 0x00: Set PV Zero Loop Current Mode. See device´s specific documentation. Message for general D purpose. Descriptor, text for D general purpose. Date (Only D Day/Month/Year are considered). Write Protect Code. See D / RO device´s specific documentation. Private Label Distribuitor D / RO Code. PV Analog Channel D / RO Flags. See device´s specific documentation. D Final Assembly Number. Write to perform a D device self test. Write to perfom a device D Master RESET. It allows to control D device's Burst Mode PV Upper & Lower D Range Value Units Code PV_RANGE.EU_100: HART PV Upper Range Value, PV_RANGE.EU_0: HART PV Lower Range Value, PV_RANGE_UNITS_IN D DEX: HART PV Range (Upper & Lower) Value Units Code translated to Fieldbus table, PV_RANGE.DECIMAL: no meam. Write to this parameter to set D (invoke HART Command 43). D Hart Write 2 40 7 6 12 17 13 18 13 18 15 15 15 16 19 41 42 109 15 35 15 35, 44 PV Zero 43 2.203 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Default Value Units Store/ Mode OctString(3) 0 NA D Enumerated HC_TABLE 2 0 None D/O 0 49 Idx Parameter Data Type 43 PV_SENSOR_SN 44 PV_SENSOR_LMSU C 45 PV_SENSOR_MSPA N 46 PV_SENSOR_RANG E 47 PV_ASC 48 PV_TFC 49 PV_DV 50 PV_PERC 51 PV_UC 52 PV_VAL 53 SV_UC 54 SV_VAL 55 TV_UC 56 TV_VAL 57 QV_UC 58 QV_VAL 59 A1_CODE 60 A1_UC 2.204 Valid Range / Options Float XD_SCAL E D / RO Enumerated HC TABLE 6 0 None D / RO Enumerated HC TABLE 3 0 None D Float 0 s D DS-65 0 % D / RO 0 None D 0 PV_UC D / RO 0 None D / RO 0 SV_UC D / RO 0 None D / RO 0 TV_UC D / RO 0 None D / RO 0 QV_UC D / RO Enumerated HC TABLE 2 DS-65 Enumerated HC TABLE 2 DS-65 Enumerated HC TABLE 2 DS-65 Enumerated HC TABLE 2 DS-65 Unsigned8 Enumerated HC TABLE 2 HART Read Hart Write PV Sensor Serial Number. PV Sensor Limits and Minimun Span Units Code. 14 49 D / RO PV Minimun Span. {0, 0, 0, 0} DS-68 Description 0 None S 0 None D / RO PV_SENSOR_RANGE. EU_100: PV Upper Sensor Limit, PV_SENSOR_RANGE. EU_0: PV Lower Sensor Limit. PV_SENSOR_RANGE. UNITS_INDEX: PV Sensor limits and Minimun Span Units Code translated to Fieldbus table. PV_SENSOR_RANGE. DECIMAL: no mean. PV Alarm Select code. PV Transfer Function Code. PV Damping Value. Cyclic read depends on chosen VIEW. PV Percent of Range. PV_PERC.VALUE: the percentual Pv value, PV_PERC.Status: HART Response Code converted to FF status. PV Units Code. Cyclic read depends on chosen VIEW. PV_VAL.Value : actual PV value in engineering units, PV_VAL.Status: HART Response Code converted to FF status. SV Units Code. Cyclic read depends on chosen VIEW. SV_VAL.Value: SV actual value, SV_VAL.Status:HART Response Code converted to FF status. TV Units Code. Cyclic read depends on chosen VIEW. TV_VAL.Value: TV actual value, TV_VAL.Status: HART Response Code converted to FF status. QV Units Code. Cyclic read depends on chosen VIEW. QV_VAL.Value: TV actual value, QV_VAL.Status: HART Response Code converted to FF status. Selects variable to appear on A1_VAL A1 variable Units Code. 14 14 14 15 15 47 15 34 2 15 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 33 33 44 Block Library Default Value Units Store/ Mode DS-65 0 S0_UC D / RO Unsigned8 0 None S 0 None D / RO 0 S1_UC D / RO Idx Parameter Data Type 61 A1_VAL 62 A2_CODE 63 A2_UC 64 A2_VAL 65 A3_CODE 66 A3_UC 67 A3_VAL 68 A4_CODE 69 A4_UC 70 A4_VAL 71 B1_CODE 72 B1_UC 73 B1_VAL 74 B2_CODE 75 B2_UC 76 B2_VAL 77 B3_CODE 78 B3_UC 79 B3_VAL 80 B4_CODE 81 B4_UC 82 B4_VAL 83 C1_CODE 84 C1_UC 85 C1_VAL 86 C2_CODE 87 C2_UC 88 C2_VAL 89 C3_CODE 90 C3_UC 91 C3_VAL 92 C4_CODE 93 C4_UC Valid Range / Options Enumerated HC TABLE 2 DS-65 Unsigned8 0 None S 0 None D / RO DS-65 0 S2_UC D / RO Unsigned8 0 None S 0 None D / RO DS-65 0 S3_UC D / RO Unsigned8 0 None S 0 None D / RO DS-65 0 S0_UC D / RO Unsigned8 0 None S 0 None D / RO DS-65 0 S1_UC D / RO Unsigned8 0 None S 0 None D DS-65 0 S2_UC D / RO Unsigned8 0 None S 0 None D / RO DS-65 0 S3_UC D / RO Unsigned8 0 None S 0 None D / RO DS-65 0 S0_UC D / RO Unsigned8 0 None S 0 None D / RO DS-65 0 S1_UC D / RO Unsigned8 0 None S 0 None D / RO DS-65 0 S2_UC D / RO Unsigned8 0 None S 0 None D / RO Enumerated HC TABLE 2 Enumerated HC TABLE 2 Enumerated HC TABLE 2 Enumerated HC TABLE 2 Enumerated HC TABLE 2 Enumerated HC TABLE 2 Enumerated HC TABLE 2 Enumerated HC TABLE 2 Enumerated HC TABLE 2 Enumerated HC TABLE 2 Description OUTPUT PARAMETER. Cyclic read depends on chosen VIEW and A1_CODE. Selects variable to appear on A2_VAL A2 variable Units Code. Cyclic read depends on chosen VIEW and A2_CODE. Selects variable to appear on A3_VAL A3 variable Units Code. Cyclic read depends on chosen VIEW and A3_CODE. Selects variable to appear on A4_VAL A4 variable Units Code. Cyclic read depends on chosen VIEW and A4_CODE. Selects variable to appear on B1_VAL B1 variable Units Code. Cyclic read depends on chosen VIEW and B1_CODE. Selects variable to appear on B2_VAL B2 variable Units Code. Cyclic read depends on chosen VIEW and B2_CODE. Selects variable to appear on B3_VAL B3 variable Units Code. Cyclic read depends on chosen VIEW and B3_CODE. Selects variable to appear on B4_VAL B4 variable Units Code. Cyclic read depends on chosen VIEW and B4_CODE. Selects variable to appear on C1_VAL C1 variable Units Code. Cyclic read depends on chosen VIEW and C1_CODE. Selects variable to appear on C2_VAL C2 variable Units Code. Cyclic read depends on chosen VIEW and C2_CODE. Selects variable to appear on C3_VAL C3 variable Units Code. Cyclic read depends on chosen VIEW and C3_CODE. Selects variable to appear on C4_VAL C4 variable Units Code. HART Read Hart Write 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 2.205 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Valid Range / Options Default Value Units DS-65 0 S3_UC Unsigned8 0 None 0 None DS-65 0 S0_UC Unsigned8 0 None 0 None DS-65 0 S1_UC Unsigned8 0 None 0 None DS-65 0 S2_UC Unsigned8 0 None 0 None 0 S3_UC Idx Parameter Data Type 94 C4_VAL 95 D1_CODE 96 D1_UC 97 D1_VAL 98 D2_CODE 99 D2_UC 100 D2_VAL 101 D3_CODE 102 D3_UC 103 D3_VAL 104 D4_CODE 105 D4_UC 106 D4_VAL DS-65 107 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 NA 108 BLK_ALM DS-72 NA Enumerated HC TABLE 2 Enumerated HC TABLE 2 Enumerated HC TABLE 2 Enumerated HC TABLE 2 Store/ Mode Description HART Read Cyclic read depends 33 D / RO on chosen VIEW and C4_CODE. Selects variable to 33 S appear on D1_VAL 33 D / RO D1 variable Units Code. Cyclic read depends 33 D / RO on chosen VIEW and D1_CODE. Selects variable to 33 S appear on D2_VAL 33 D / RO D2 variable Units Code. Cyclic read depends 33 D / RO on chosen VIEW and D2_CODE. Selects variable to 33 S appear on D3_VAL 33 D / RO D3 variable Units Code. Cyclic read depends 33 D / RO on chosen VIEW and D3_CODE. Selects variable to 33 S appear on D4_VAL 33 D / RO D4 variable Units Code. Cyclic read depends 33 D / RO on chosen VIEW and D4_CODE. This alert is generated by any change D to the static data. The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active D will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static 2.206 Hart Write Block Library HCFG - HART Configuration Transducer Block Parameters Idx 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Parameter Data Type BLOCK_STRUCTUR DS-64 E ST_REV Unsigned16 TAG_DESC OctString(32) STRATEGY Unsigned16 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 MODE_BLK DS-69 BLK_ERR Bitstring(2) FIRMWARE_VERSIO VisibleString(32) N COMM_BEHAVIOR COMM_ENABLE 10 CHANNEL_ACTIVE 11 COMM_ERRORS 12 MASTER_TYPE Enumerated Enumerated Valid Range / Default Options Value 1 to 255 0x00: Autonomous 0x01: Bypass 0x01 Enabled 0x00: Disabled 0x00: No 0x01: 1 Enumerated[8] 0x02: 2 0x0F: 15 Float[8] 0x01: Primary Enumerated[8] 0x00: Secondary Units Store / Mode Description NA S 0 Spaces 0 0 O/S None NA None None NA None S / RO S S S S D / RO 0 NA D / RO Useful for information and diagnostic purposes. S Autonomous means the normal behavior where the database is built automatically. If set to Bypass the device depends on external applications to send HART commands and the block HBC must be used. S After a download or if a channel has been changed in a HIRT block, this parameter will be set to Disabled automatically. Set it to Enabled to start HART communication. Caution: this parameter must not be saved OFF LINE and downloaded. It must always be written in ON LINE mode only! Autonomo us Disabled NA NA See Mode Parameter No NA D / RO This parameter shows how many HIRT blocks have been configured to use the corresponding channel. If no block is using the channel, it will remain deactivated. 0 % D / RO Shows the percentual of communication errors. Up to 0.5% is acceptable for more than 10k requests. Primary NA S HART Master Type, normally Primary. 3 None S Number of retries if slave does not respond before slave timeout or if any error is received. Increase the number to make the communication more reliable in noisy environments. Not synchroniz ed NA D / RO FACTORY USE - Synchronized means normal operation. Normal None D / RO FACTORY USE - This parameter shows if any burst mode device was detected on the respective channel. 0x00: Watching Enumerated[8] 0x01: Enabled Watching 0x02: Using None D / RO FACTORY USE - It's the Master State Machine behavior at each moment. REQUEST_COUNTE R Unsigned32[8] 0 None D / RO FACTORY USE - Counts the number of requests made to all devices on that channel. 18 RETRIES_COUNTER Unsigned32[8] 0 None D / RO FACTORY USE - Counts the number of retries to all devices on each channel. 19 INVALID_SOM Unsigned32[8] 0 None D / RO FACTORY USE - Counts the number of invalid Start Of Messages captured in that channel. 20 INVALID_RX_FRAME S Unsigned32[8] 0 None D / RO FACTORY USE - It totalizes the number of INVALID frames received by each channel, whichever the error. 21 VALID_RX_FRAMES Unsigned32[8] 0 None D / RO FACTORY USE - It totalizes the number of VALID frames received by each channel. 13 RETRIES 14 MASTER_SYNCHRO NIZED 15 CHANNEL_MODE 16 MASTER_STATE 17 Unsigned8[8] 3 to 10 0x01: Synchronized Boolean[8] 0x00: Not synchronized 0x00: Normal Enumerated[8] 0x01: Burst Mode 2.207 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Idx 22 23 24 25 Parameter ANALOG_INPUT_TRI M Data Type Valid Range / Default Options Value Enumerated 0x00: Channel 1, 0x01: Channel 2, 0x02: Channel 3, 0x03: Channel 4, 0x04: Channel 5, 0x05: Channel 6, 0x06: Channel 7, 0x07: Channel 8, 0x08: All Channels, 0x09: Not Trimmed, 0x0A: Trimmed and Checked Not Trimmed Units NA Store / Mode Description S FACTORY USE - Used to calibrate the analog inputs when applicable. Apply a stable signal of 12 mA (+/- 0.005 mA) to the channel (or to all channels at once) and write to this parameter accordingly to the channel you want to calibrate (or All Channels if you want to calibrate all at once). After calibrate and test write this parameter to Trimmed and Checked to save the data. FACTORY USE - This array is used to calibrate the analog outputs when applicable. Using a precision miliampmeter (+/- 1uA) put all outputs in 50% by actuating in MAO block. Using the value the meter is reading, write it in the correspondig ANALOG_OUTPUT_ element of this array, always with at least 2 Float[8] 1.00 mA S CAL decimal, in mA (should be ~ 12 mA). After written the value look at the meter again and confirm the reading now is 12.0 mA. After calibrate and test write ANALOG_INPUT_TRIM parameter to Trimmed and Checked to save the calibration data. This alert is generated by any change to the static UPDATE_EVT DS-73 NA D data. The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active BLK_ALM DS-72 NA D will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static 2.208 Block Library HVT - HART VARIABLE TEMPLATE Parameters Valid Range / Data Type Options Idx Parameter 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 BLOCK_STRUCTU RE ST_REV TAG_DESC STRATEGY ALERT_KEY MODE_BLK BLK_ERR Unsigned16 OctString(32) Unsigned16 Unsigned8 DS-69 Bitstring(2) 7 DEV_TAG_SEL VisibleString(8) 8 9 HCD_SELECTED Default Value DS-64 Units NA 1 to 255 OctString(5) HCD_DEVICE_INF VisibleString(32) O 0x00: Identification 0x01: Old Data 0x02: Updating 0x03: Updated 0x04: Partially Updated 0x05: Not Responding 0x06: Bypass 0x07: Device Not Found 0x08: HCD Error 0x09: TAG Not Found 0x0A: Writing 0 Spaces 0 0 O/S None NA None None NA None Spaces NA Store / Mode Description S S / RO S S S S See Mode Parameter D / RO S Write here a valid HIRT.HART_TAG from an installed device to start HVT on demand reading. This code is used to identify the specific configuration associated with the chosen D / RO device. This code is read from HIRT block and is a combination of MAN_ID, DEV_TYPE, UNI_REV, SPEC_REV, SW_REV. This parameter shows comment related to D / RO selected specific configuration. 0 None Spaces NA 0 None D / RO Reflects the execution progress conditions. See also BLK_ERR. or error 10 BLK_EXEC_STATE Unsigned8 11 12 U8B_ARRAY_1 U8B_ARRAY_2 Unsigned8[20] Unsigned8[20] 0 0 None None D D First array used for 8-bit variables Second array used for 8-bit variables 13 U8B_ARRAY_3 Unsigned8[20] 0 None D Thirdy array used for 8-bit variables 14 U8B_ARRAY_4 Unsigned8[20] 0 None D Fourth array used for 8-bit variables 15 16 U8B_ARRAY_5 FLOAT_ARRAY_1 Unsigned8[20] FloatingPoint[20] 0 0 None None D D Fifth array used for 8-bit variables First array used for Floating Point variables 17 FLOAT_ARRAY_2 FloatingPoint[20] 0 None D Second array used for Floating Point variables 18 19 FLOAT_ARRAY_3 FLOAT_ARRAY_4 FloatingPoint[20] FloatingPoint[20] 0 0 None None D D Third array used for Floating Point variables Fourth array used for Floating Point variables 20 FLOAT_ARRAY_5 FloatingPoint[20] 0 None D Fifth array used for Floating Point variables 21 22 U16B_ARRAY_1 U32B_ARRAY_1 Unsigned16[20] Unsigned32[10] 0 0 None None D D First array of 16-bit (2-byte) values First array of 32-bit variables 23 U32B_ARRAY_2 Unsigned32[10] 0 None D Second array of 32-bit variables 24 25 String_01 String_02 VisibleString(8) VisibleString(8) Spaces Spaces NA NA D D First general string (8 characters) 8 characters general use string 26 String_03 VisibleString(8) Spaces NA D 8 characters general use string 27 String_04 VisibleString(8) Spaces NA D 8 characters general use string 28 29 String_05 String_06 VisibleString(8) VIsibleString(16) Spaces Spaces NA NA D D 8 characters general use string 16 characters general use string 30 String_07 VisibleString(16) Spaces NA D 16 characters general use string 31 32 String_08 String_09 VIsibleString(16) VisibleString(16) Spaces Spaces NA NA D D 16 characters general use string 16 characters general use string 33 String_10 VIsibleString(16) Spaces NA D 16 characters general use string 34 35 String_11 String_12 VisibleString(32) VisibleString(32) Spaces Spaces NA NA D D 32 characters general use string 32 characters general use string 36 String_13 VisibleString(32) Spaces NA D 32 characters general use string 2.209 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Default Value Units Store / Mode VisibleString(32) Spaces NA D 32 characters general use string VisibleString(32) VisibleString(32) Spaces Spaces NA NA D D 32 characters general use string 32 characters general use string String_17 VisibleString(32) Spaces NA D 32 charactres general use string String_18 String_19 VisibleString(32) VisibleString(32) Spaces Spaces NA NA D D 32 characters general use string 32 characters general use string String_20 VisibleString(32) Spaces NA D Idx Parameter Data Type 37 String_14 38 39 String_15 String_16 40 41 42 43 44 45 2.210 Valid Range / Options Description 32 characters general use string This alert is generated by any change to the UPDATE_EVT DS-73 NA D static data. The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the BLK_ALM DS-72 NA D Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static Block Library HCD - HART Commands Definition Parameters Idx Parameter Data Type 0 BLOCK_STRUCTU RE ST_REV TAG_DESC STRATEGY ALERT_KEY MODE_BLK BLK_ERR Unsigned16 OctString(32) Unsigned16 Unsigned8 DS-69 Bitstring(2) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Valid Range / Options Default Value DS-64 1 to 255 0 Spaces 0 0 O/S Units Store / Mode NA S None NA None None NA None S / RO S S S S D / RO 7 HCD_CODE OctString(5) 0 None S 8 DEVICE_INFO VisibleString(32) Spaces NA S 9 CMD_00 OctString(44) 0 NA S 10 CMD_01 OctString(44) 0 NA S 11 CMD_02 OctString(44) 0 NA S 12 CMD_03 OctString(44) 0 NA S 13 CMD_04 OctString(44) 0 NA S 14 CMD_05 OctString(44) 0 NA S 15 CMD_06 OctString(44) 0 NA S 16 CMD_07 OctString(44) 0 NA S 17 CMD_08 OctString(44) 0 NA S 18 CMD_09 OctString(44) 0 NA S 19 CMD_10 OctString(44) 0 NA S 20 CMD_11 OctString(44) 0 NA S 21 CMD_12 OctString(44) 0 NA S 22 CMD_13 OctString(44) 0 NA S 23 CMD_14 OctString(44) 0 NA S 24 CMD_15 OctString(44) 0 NA S 25 CMD_16 OctString(44) 0 NA S 26 CMD_17 OctString(44) 0 NA S 27 CMD_18 OctString(44) 0 NA S 28 CMD_19 OctString(44) 0 NA S 29 CMD_20 OctString(44) 0 NA S 30 CMD_21 OctString(44) 0 NA S Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Description See Mode Parameter This code identifies uniquely this configuration and must be formed by combining MAN_ID, DEV_TYPE, UNI_REV, SPEC_REV and SW_REV of the targeted device. This parameter stores the device name or any other comment related to this set of command definitions. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. 2.211 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Idx Parameter Data Type 31 CMD_22 OctString(44) 32 CMD_23 OctString(44) 33 CMD_24 OctString(44) 34 CMD_25 OctString(44) 35 CMD_26 OctString(44) 36 CMD_27 OctString(44) 37 CMD_28 OctString(44) 38 CMD_29 OctString(44) 39 CMD_30 OctString(44) 40 CMD_31 OctString(44) 41 CMD_32 OctString(44) 42 CMD_33 OctString(44) 43 CMD_34 OctString(44) 44 CMD_35 OctString(44) 45 CMD_36 OctString(44) 46 CMD_37 OctString(44) 47 CMD_38 OctString(44) 48 CMD_39 OctString(44) 49 CMD_40 OctString(104) 50 CMD_41 OctString(104) 51 CMD_42 OctString(104) 52 CMD_43 OctString(104) 53 CMD_44 OctString(104) 54 CMD_45 OctString(104) 55 CMD_46 OctString(104) 56 CMD_47 OctString(104) 57 CMD_48 OctString(104) 58 CMD_49 OctString(104) 59 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 2.212 Valid Range / Options Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Request and Response parameters Default Value Units Store / Mode 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S 0 NA S NA D Description See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. See HART Command configuration parameters. This alert is generated by any change to the static data. Block Library Idx 60 Parameter Data Type Valid Range / Options Default Value Units Store / Mode Description The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the BLK_ALM DS-72 NA D Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static 2.213 Function Blocks Instruction Manual HWPC - HART WRITEABLE-PARAMETER TO COMMAND CORRELATION Parameters Idx Parameter Data Type 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 BLOCK_STRUCTURE ST_REV TAG_DESC STRATEGY ALERT_KEY MODE_BLK BLK_ERR HWPC_CODE DS-64 Unsigned16 OctString(32) Unsigned16 Unsigned8 DS-69 Bitstring(2) OctString(5) 8 WPC_00 9 Valid Range / Options Default Value Units 0 NA None NA None None NA None None Unsigned8[20] 0 None WPC_01 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 10 WPC_02 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 11 WPC_03 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 12 WPC_04 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 13 WPC_05 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 14 WPC_06 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 15 WPC_07 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 16 WPC_08 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 17 WPC_09 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 18 WPC_10 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 19 WPC_11 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 20 WPC_12 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 21 WPC_13 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 22 WPC_14 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 23 WPC_15 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 24 WPC_16 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 25 WPC_17 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 26 WPC_18 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 27 WPC_19 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 28 WPC_20 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 29 WPC_21 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 30 WPC_22 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 31 WPC_23 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 32 WPC_24 Unsigned8[20] 0 None 2.214 1 to 255 0 Spaces 0 0 O/S Store / Mode Description S S / RO S S S S See Mode Parameter D / RO S Must be equal to the associated HCD. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. See parameter to command correlation S description. Block Library Idx Parameter Data Type 33 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 34 BLK_ALM DS-72 Valid Range / Options Default Value Units Store / Mode Description NA D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. NA D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed. Legend: E – Enumerated parameter; na – Admensional parameter; RO – Read only; D – dynamic; N – non-volatile; S - static 2.215 Function Blocks Instruction Manual HBC – HART Bypass Communication Bypass mode using HBC block was created to allow HART messages to be sent to any device by writing a block parameter. The written content in the parameter is whole sent to the channel, when it is available. Thus, the application should include in the message the preambles, the delimiter and so on, until the HART frame check byte. For operation in the BYPASS mode, only the RESOURCE, HCFG and HBC blocks are needed. Any HIRT or HVT block, perchance instantiated, will stay in the BYPASS state (BLK_EXEC_STATE parameter) have not any function. • Before use BYPASS the HCFG.COMM_BEHAVIOR parameter must be configured as BYPASS. The HBC.HART_BYPASS_STATUS parameter indicates the message situation, it can be: • IDLE: the channel is ready to use. • BUSY: REQUEST issued waiting reply from the device . • TIMEOUT: after the programmed number of retries, it was not possible to receive a valid response. • RESPONSE AVAILABLE: there is an available response to read. This response is valid while the parameter is in this state. The HI302 does not check integrity for transmitted or received message contents, passing totally what was received by the communication channel. It is responsibility of the user to guarantee the quality of the sent messages and the response interpretation. HART transaction sequence in the BYPASS mode 1. Check if the HBC.HART_BYPASS_STATUS[n] parameter is in IDLE, TIMEOUT or RESPONSE AVAILABLE state. 2. If so, the message can be written in the HBC. HART_BYPASS_REQ_n parameter. 3. The HI302 will check if the channel is available and in the first chance will transmit the parameter content. 4. While the HBC. HART_BYPASS_STATUS[n] parameter is in BUSY, the HI302 will be waiting the response or repeating the request until the retries limit configured in HCFG.RETRIES[n]. 5. The HBC. HART_BYPASS_STATUS[n] parameter goes to RESPONSE AVAILABLE if it receives a valid message and goes to TIMEOUT if not. 6. The user application must read the content of the HBC. HART_BYPASS_RES_n parameter and interpret the income message. Example of HART bypass transaction 2.216 Block Library Idx Parameter 0 BLOCK_STRUCTURE Parameters Valid Range / Data Type Options Default Units Value DS-64 1 ST_REV Unsigned16 2 TAG_DESC OctString(32) 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 4 ALERT_KEY Unsigned8 5 MODE_BLK DS-69 6 BLK_ERR Bitstring(2) 1 to 255 0x00: Idle, 0x01: Busy, Unsigned8[8] 0x02: Timeout, 0x03: Response Available Store / Mode NA S 0 None S / RO Spaces NA S 0 None S 0 None S O/S Description NA S None D / RO See Mode Parameter 0x00: Idle, NA D / RO This array shows the status of the bypass execution for all the channels and must be supervised for response check purposes. 7 HART_BYPASS_STATUS 8 HART_BYPASS_REQ_1 OctString(100) 0 NA D This parameter allows the user to send and entire HART frame trough the channel. 9 HART_BYPASS_REQ_2 OctString(100) 0 NA D This parameter allows the user to send and entire HART frame through the channel. 10 HART_BYPASS_REQ_3 OctString(100) 0 NA D This parameter allows the user to send and entire HART frame through the channel. 11 HART_BYPASS_REQ_4 OctString(100) 0 NA D This parameter allows the user to send and entire HART frame through the channel. 12 HART_BYPASS_REQ_5 OctString(100) 0 NA D This parameter allows the user to send and entire HART frame through the channel. 13 HART_BYPASS_REQ_6 OctString(100) 0 NA D This parameter allows the user to send and entire HART frame through the channel. 14 HART_BYPASS_REQ_7 OctString(100) 0 NA D This parameter allows the user to send and entire HART frame through the channel. 15 HART_BYPASS_REQ_8 OctString(100) 0 NA D This parameter allows the user to send and entire HART frame through the channel. 13 HART_BYPASS_RES_1 OctString(100) 0 NA D / RO This is the response grabbed by the channel if the addressed device has replied. 13 HART_BYPASS_RES_2 OctString(100) 0 NA D / RO This is the response grabbed by the channel if the addressed device has replied. 13 HART_BYPASS_RES_3 OctString(100) 0 NA D / RO This is the response grabbed by the channel if the addressed device has replied. 13 HART_BYPASS_RES_4 OctString(100) 0 NA D / RO This is the response grabbed by the channel if the addressed device has replied. 13 HART_BYPASS_RES_5 OctString(100) 0 NA D / RO This is the response grabbed by the channel if the addressed device has replied. 2.217 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Valid Range / Options Default Units Value Store / Mode Description NA D / RO This is the response grabbed by the channel if the addressed device has replied. 0 NA D / RO This is the response grabbed by the channel if the addressed device has replied. 0 NA D / RO This is the response grabbed by the channel if the addressed device has replied. NA D This alert is generated by any change to the static data. D The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As so Idx Parameter Data Type 13 HART_BYPASS_RES_6 OctString(100) 0 13 HART_BYPASS_RES_7 OctString(100) 13 HART_BYPASS_RES_8 OctString(100) 24 UPDATE_EVT DS-73 25 2.218 BLK_ALM DS-72 NA Block Library Block Options Resource Block Bit Strings HARD_TYPES CYCLE_TYPE and CYCLE_SEL Hardware types supported Types of cycle supported Bit Meaning Bit Meaning 0 Scalar input (LSB) 0 Scheduled (LSB) 1 Scalar output 1 Completion of block execution 2 Discrete input 2 Manufacturer specific 3 Discrete output 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 Bit FEATURES and FEATURE_SEL Order of Resource Block Alerts Things that this resource supports For ALARM_SUM and ACK_OPTION Meaning Bit 0 1 Reports supported Meaning Writes have been enabled 1 2 Fault State supported 2 3 Soft Write lock supported 3 4 5 Output readback supported (*) 5 7 Change of bypass in an automatic mode (*) 7 8 MVC supported (*) 8 6 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 Block alarm 15 (*) This feature depends on the Hardware Type 2.219 Function Blocks Instruction Manual FEATURES and FEATURE_SEL Unicode strings This feature is not supported. Reports supported It is necessary to set this feature in order to enable alert reporting in the resource. Fault State supported If this feature is selected in FEATURE_SEL, setting the SET_FSTATE parameter will force all output function blocks (AO and DO) in the resource to go to fault state. Individual output function block will go to Fault State due to a loss of communication to CAS_IN or IFS status in CAS_IN, regardless the selection of this feature. Soft Write lock supported It is necessary to select this feature to set the WRITE_LOCK parameter. Hard Write lock supported This feature is not supported. Output readback supported Only the FY302 and FP302 support output readback and this feature is used regardless the selection in FEATURE_SEL. Direct write to output hardware This feature is not supported. Change of BYPASS in an automatic mode If this feature is selected in FEATURE_SEL, it is allowed to write in BYPASS in an automatic mode, otherwise only in Man or O/S modes. MVC supported The selection of this feature allows optimize communication performance by transferring a grouped data as a single variable list in either publisher/subscriber transactions for function block links, or report distribution to a host device. 2.220 Block Library Function Block Options IO_OPTS Bit Meaning AI DI AO DO X X 0 Invert (LSB) 1 SP-PV Track in Man 2 Reserved 3 SP-PV Track in LO X X 4 SP Track retained target X X 5 Increase to close X 6 FAULT STATE to value X X X 7 Use FAULT STATE value on restart X X X 8 Target to Man if FAULT STATE actived X X X X X 9 Use PV for BKCAL_OUT 10 Low cutoff 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved X STEP X X Invert Indicate whether the discrete input value should be logically inverted before it is stored in the process variable. SP-PV Track in Man Permit the setpoint to track the process variable when the target mode of the block is Man. SP-PV Track in LO Permit the setpoint to track the process variable when the actual mode of the block is LO. IMan is not possible in an I/O block. SP TRACKS RCAS OR CAS if LO OR MAN Permit the set point to track the Rcas or Cas parameter based on the retained target mode when the actual mode of the block is LO or Man. Increase to close Indicate whether the output value should be inverted before it is communicated to the I/O channel. FAULT STATE to value The output action to take when failure occurs. (0: freeze, 1: go to preset value) Use FAULT STATE value on restart Use the value of FSTATE_VAL if the device is restarted, otherwise use the non-volatile value. This does not act like Fault State, just uses the value. Target to Man if FAULT STATE activated Set the target mode to Man, thus losing the original target, if Fault State is activated. This latches an output block into the manual mode. Use PV for BKCAL_OUT The BKCAL_OUT value is normally the working SP. This option changes it to the PV. Low cutoff The AI low cutoff algorithm is enabled. 2.221 Function Blocks Instruction Manual CONTROL_OPTS Bit Meaning PID EPID APID CHAR 0 Bypass Enable (LSB) X X X X STEP 1 SP-PV Track in Man X X X 2 SP-PV Track in Rout X X X 3 SP-PV Track in LO or Iman X X X X 4 SP Track Retained Target X X X X 5 Direct Acting X X X X 6 Reserved X 7 Track Enable X X X 8 Track in Manual X X X 9 Use PV for BKCAL_OUT X X X X 10 ACT on IR X 11 Use BKCAL_OUT with IN_1 12 Obey SP limits if Cas or Rcas X X X 13 No OUT limits in Manual X X X 14 Reserved 15 Reserved Bypass Enable This parameter, if true, allows BYPASS to be set. Some control algorithm applications cannot provide closed loop control if bypassed. SP-PV Track in Man Permit the setpoint to track the process variable when the target mode of the block is Man. SP-PV Track in Rout Permit the setpoint to track the process variable when the actual mode of the block is ROut. SP-PV Track in LO or IMan Permit the setpoint to track the process variable when the actual mode of the block is LO or IMan. SP Track retained target Permit the setpoint to track the Rcas or Cas parameter based on the retained target mode when the actual mode of the block is IMAN, LO, Man or ROut. When SP-PV Track options are enable, then SP track retained target will have precedence in the selection of the value to track when the actual mode is MAN, IMAN, ROUT and LO. Direct Acting Define the relationship between a change in PV and corresponding change in output. When Direct is selected, an increase in PV results in an increase in the output. Track Enable This enables the external tracking function. If true, the value in TRK_VAL will replace the value of OUT if TRK_IN_D becomes true and the target mode is not Man. Track in Manual This enables TRK_VAL to replace the value of OUT when the target mode is Man and TRK_IN_D is true. The actual mode will then be LO. Use PV for BKCAL_OUT The BKCAL _OUT and RCAS_OUT values are normally the working SP. If this options is enable, then the PV value will be used after the CASCADE is closed. Act on IR This feature is not used.. 2.222 Block Library Use percent for IN_1 This feature is not used. Obey SP limits if Cas or Rcas Normally the setpoint will not be restricted to the setpoint limits except when entered by a human interface device. However, if this option is selected, the setpoint will be restricted to the setpoint absolute limits in the Cas and Rcas modes. No OUT limits in Manual Do not apply OUT_HI_LIM or OUT_LO_LIM when target and actual mode are Man. Trust the operator to do the right thing. STATUS_OPTS Bit Meaning AI DI PUL PID EPID APID SPLT 0 IFS if BAD IN (LSB) X X X 1 IFS if BAD CAS_IN X X X X 2 Use Uncertain as Good X X X X 3 Propagate Fail Forward 4 Propagate Fail Backward 5 Target to Manual if BAD IN 6 Uncertain if Limited X X 7 BAD if Limited X X 8 Uncertain if Man mode X 9 Target to next permitted mode if BAD CAS_IN 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved X X AALM ISEL SPG TIME LLAG DENS FFET X X X X X X X AO DO X X X X STEP X X X X X X X X X X X IFS if BAD IN Set Initiate Fault State status in the OUT parameter if the status of the IN parameter is BAD. IFS if BAD CAS_IN Set Initiate Fault State status in the OUT parameter if the status of the CAS_IN parameter is BAD. Use Uncertain as Good If the status of the IN parameter is Uncertain, treat it as Good. Otherwise, treat it as BAD. Propagate Fail Forward If the status from the sensor is Bad, Device failure or Bad, Sensor failure, propagate it to OUT without generating an alarm. The use of these sub-status in OUT is determined by this option. Through this option, the user may determine whether alarming (sending of an alert) will be done by the block or propagated downstream for alarming. 2.223 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Propagate Fail Backward If the status from the actuator is Bad, Device failure or Fault State Active or Local Override is active, propagate this as Bad, Device Failure or Good Cascade, Fault State Active or Local Override to BKCAL_OUT respectively without generating an alarm. The use of these sub-status in BKCAL_OUT is determined by this option. Through this option, the user may determine whether alarming (sending of an alert) will be done by the block or propagated upstream for alarming. Target to Manual if BAD IN Set the target mode to Man if the status of the IN parameter is BAD. This latches a PID block into the Man state if the input ever goes bad. Uncertain if Limited Set the output status of an input or calculation block to uncertain if the measured or calculated value is limited. BAD if Limited Set the output status to Bad if the sensor is at a high or low limit. Uncertain if Man Mode Set the output status of an input or calculation block to uncertain if the actual mode of the block is Man. Target to Next Permitted Mode if BAD CAS_IN Set the target mode to next permitted mode if target mode is CAS and the status of CAS_IN is BAD. This latches a control block into the next permitted mode if the CAS_IN is being used in control and the status goes bad. ALARM_SUM and ACK_OPTION (Valid for all blocks, except for Resource Block) 2.224 Bit Description Meaning 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Unack Alarm1 Unack Alarm2 Unack Alarm3 Unack Alarm4 Unack Alarm5 Unack Alarm6 Unack Alarm7 Unack Alarm8 Unack Alarm9 Unack Alarm10 Unack Alarm11 Unack Alarm12 Unack Alarm13 Unack Alarm14 Unack Alarm15 Unack Alarm16 Discrete alarm High High alarm High alarm Low Low alarm Low alarm Deviation High alarm Deviation Low alarm Block alarm AI PUL x x x x x x x x DI APID PID/EPID AALM x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x SPG DENS STEP X x x X x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Block Library APID and EPID Function Blocks Options PID_OPTS Bit Meaning 0 IFS if Bad TRK_IN_D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 IFS if Bad TRK_VAL Man if Bad TRK_IN_D Man if Bad TRK_VAL Target to Manual if BAD TRK_IN_D Target to Manual if BAD TRK_VAL Target to Manual if Tracking Active Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Integrator Function Block Options INTEG_OPTS Bit Meaning 0 Input 1 accumulate 1 Input 2 accumulate 2 Flow forward 3 Flow reverse 4 Use Uncertain 5 Use Bad 6 Carry 7 Reserved 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved 2.225 Function Blocks Instruction Manual Timer Function Block Options INVERT_OPTS Bit Meaning TIMER 0 Invert IN_D1 X 1 Invert IN_D2 X 2 Invert IN_D3 X 3 Invert IN_D4 X 4 Invert OUT_D X 5 Invert OUT_ALM 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved X X Arithmetic Function Block Options INPUT_OPTS 2.226 AALM Bit Meaning 0 IN Use uncertain 1 IN_LO Use uncertain 2 IN_1 Use uncertain 3 IN_1 Use bad 4 IN_2 Use uncertain 5 IN_2 Use bad 6 IN_3 Use uncertain 7 IN_3 Use bad 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved Block Library Output Signal Selector and Dynamic Limiter Function Block Options OSDL_OPTS Bit Meaning 0 IFS if BAD IN 1 IFS if BAD CAS_IN 2 Use Uncertain as Good 3 Reserved 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 IFS if BAD IN_1 12 Keep last value if not select 13 IFS for only selected output 14 Use OUT for BKCAL_OUT 15 Use OUT_1 for BKCAL_OUT Multiple Output Function Block Options MO_STATUS_OPTS Bit Meaning 0 IFS if BAD IN_1 1 IFS if BAD IN_2 2 IFS if BAD IN_3 3 IFS if BAD IN_4 4 IFS if BAD IN_5 5 IFS if BAD IN_6 6 IFS if BAD IN_7 7 IFS if BAD IN_8 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved 2.227 Function Blocks Instruction Manual MO_OPTS (Profile Rev. 0 – FB700) Bit Meaning 0 Fault state to value 1 1 Use fault state value on restart 1 2 Fault state to value 2 3 Use fault state value on restart 2 4 Fault state to value 3 5 Use fault state value on restart 3 6 Fault state to value 4 7 Use fault state value on restart 4 8 Fault state to value 5 9 Use fault state value on restart 5 10 Fault state to value 6 11 Use fault state value on restart 6 12 Fault state to value 7 13 Use fault state value on restart 7 14 Fault state to value 8 15 Use fault state value on restart 8 MO_OPTS (Profile Rev. 1 – DFI302) 2.228 Bit Meaning 0 Fault state to value 1 1 Fault state to value 2 2 Fault state to value 3 3 Fault state to value 4 4 Fault state to value 5 5 Fault state to value 6 6 Fault state to value 7 7 Fault state to value 8 8 Use fault state value on restart 1 9 Use fault state value on restart 2 10 Use fault state value on restart 3 11 Use fault state value on restart 4 12 Use fault state value on restart 5 13 Use fault state value on restart 6 14 Use fault state value on restart 7 15 Use fault state value on restart 8 Block Library Hardware Configuration Block Options MODULE_STATUS_R0_3 Bit Meaning 0 Status of module in rack 0 slot 0 1 Status of module in rack 0 slot 1 2 Status of module in rack 0 slot 2 3 Status of module in rack 0 slot 3 4 Status of module in rack 1 slot 0 5 Status of module in rack 1 slot 1 6 Status of module in rack 1 slot 2 7 Status of module in rack 1 slot 3 Bit Meaning 0 Status of module in rack 2 slot 0 1 Status of module in rack 2 slot 1 2 Status of module in rack 2 slot 2 3 Status of module in rack 2 slot 3 4 Status of module in rack 3 slot 0 5 Status of module in rack 3 slot 1 6 Status of module in rack 3 slot 2 7 Status of module in rack 3 slot 3 MODULE_STATUS_R4_7 Bit Meaning 0 Status of module in rack 4 slot 0 1 Status of module in rack 4 slot 1 2 Status of module in rack 4 slot 2 3 Status of module in rack 4 slot 3 4 Status of module in rack 5 slot 0 5 Status of module in rack 5 slot 1 6 Status of module in rack 5 slot 2 7 Status of module in rack 5 slot 3 Bit Meaning 0 Status of module in rack 6 slot 0 1 Status of module in rack 6 slot 1 2 Status of module in rack 6 slot 2 3 Status of module in rack 6 slot 3 4 Status of module in rack 7 slot 0 5 Status of module in rack 7 slot 1 6 Status of module in rack 7 slot 2 7 Status of module in rack 7 slot 3 2.229 Function Blocks Instruction Manual MODULE_STATUS_R8_11 Bit Meaning 0 Status of module in rack 8 slot 0 1 Status of module in rack 8 slot 1 2 Status of module in rack 8 slot 2 3 Status of module in rack 8 slot 3 4 Status of module in rack 9 slot 0 5 Status of module in rack 9 slot 1 6 Status of module in rack 9 slot 2 7 Status of module in rack 9 slot 3 Bit Meaning 0 Status of module in rack 10 slot 0 1 Status of module in rack 10 slot 1 2 Status of module in rack 10 slot 2 3 Status of module in rack 10 slot 3 4 Status of module in rack 11 slot 0 5 Status of module in rack 11 slot 1 6 Status of module in rack 11 slot 2 7 Status of module in rack 11 slot 3 MODULE_STATUS_R12_14 Bit 0 Status of module in rack 12 slot 0 1 Status of module in rack 12 slot 1 2 Status of module in rack 12 slot 2 3 Status of module in rack 12 slot 3 4 Status of module in rack 13 slot 0 5 Status of module in rack 13 slot 1 6 Status of module in rack 13 slot 2 7 Status of module in rack 13 slot 3 Bit Meaning 0 Status of module in rack 14 slot 0 1 Status of module in rack 14 slot 1 2 Status of module in rack 14 slot 2 3 Status of module in rack 14 slot 3 4 5 6 7 2.230 Meaning Chapter 3 EXAMPLES Simple Control Application Cascade Control 3.1 Function Block Instruction Manual Corresponding Configuration 3.2 Examples Parameterization AI BLOCK (TT302) : TAG=TT-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO PID BLOCK (TT302) : TAG=TIC-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO PV_SCALE=0 - 600 °C OUT_SCALE=0 - 200 kg/h AI BLOCK (LD302) : TAG=FT-101 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO L_TYPE = Indirect, square root XD_SCALE=0 - 200 inH2O OUT_SCALE=0 - 200 kg/h PID BLOCK (LD302) : TAG=FIC-101 MODE_BLK.TARGET=CAS PV_SCALE=0 - 200 kg/h OUT_SCALE=0 - 100 % AO BLOCK (FP302) : TAG=FCV-102 MODE_BLK.TARGET=CAS PV_SCALE=0 - 100 % XD_SCALE=3 - 15 psi Ratio Control 3.3 Function Block Instruction Manual Corresponding Configuration FBMANUAL_05 Parameterization AI BLOCK (LD302-1) : TAG=FT-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO ARTH BLOCK (LD302-1) : TAG=FY-100_1 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO ARITH_TYPE=7 GAIN = adjusted by user to desired ratio. RANGE_LO=0 RANGE_HI=-10 ( for g = 1) AI BLOCK (LD302-2) : TAG=FT-101 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO PID BLOCK (LD302-2) : TAG=FIC-101 MODE_BLK.TARGET=CAS PV_SCALE=0 - 200 inH2O OUT_SCALE=0 - 100 % AO BLOCK (FP302) : TAG=FCV-101 MODE_BLK.TARGET=CAS PV_SCALE=0 - 100 % XD_SCALE=3-15 psi 3.4 Examples Feedforward Control Corresponding Configuration 3.5 Function Block Instruction Manual Parameterization AI BLOCK (TT302): TAG=TT-101 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO PID BLOCK (TT302): TAG=TIC-101 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO PV_SCALE=0 - 600 °C OUT_SCALE=0 - 100 % FF_SCALE=0 - 500 GAL/min FF_GAIN=0.1 AI BLOCK (LD302): TAG=FT-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO L_TYPE = Indirect, square root XD_SCALE=0 - 125 inH2O OUT_SCALE=0 - 500 GAL/min AO BLOCK (FP302): TAG=FCV-101 MODE_BLK.TARGET=CAS PV_SCALE=0 - 100 % XD_SCALE=3-15psi Split Range Control 3.6 Examples Corresponding Configuration Parameterization AI BLOCK (TT302) : TAG=TT-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO PID BLOCK (TT302) : TAG=TIC-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO PV_SCALE=0 - 600 °C OUT_SCALE=0 - 100 % SPLT BLOCK (TT302) : TAG=FY-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=CAS LOCK_VAL=YES IN_ARRAY=0, 48, 50, 100 OUT_ARRAY=100, 0, 0, 100 3.7 Function Block Instruction Manual AO 1 BLOCK (FI302) : TAG=FCV-100A MODE_BLK.TARGET=CAS PV_SCALE=0 - 100 % XD_SCALE= 4-20 mA AO 2 BLOCK (FI302) : TAG=FCV-100B MODE_BLK.TARGET=CAS PV_SCALE=0 - 100 % XD_SCALE= 4-20 mA Level Control Corresponding Configuration 3.8 Examples Parameterization AI BLOCK (LD302) : TAG=LT-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO CHAR BLOCK (LD302) : TAG=FY -100 MODE_BLK.TARGET = AUTO X_UNITS= inH2O Y_UNITS= gal CURV_INPUTS=(0,40,80,100,120,160,200) CURV_OUTPUTS=(0, 14.23, 37.35, 50, 62.64, 85.76, 100) PID BLOCK (LD302) : TAG=LIC -100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO PV_SCALE=0 - 100 gal OUT_SCALE=0 - 100% AO BLOCK (FP302) : TAG=FCV -100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=CAS PV_SCALE=0 - 100 % XD_SCALE= 3-15 psi Rate Control Loop with Lead - Lag FP302 LD302 STEAM TT302 PRODUCT PRODUCT CONDENSATE FBMANUAL_12 3.9 Function Block Instruction Manual Corresponding Configuration Parameterization AI BLOCK (TT302) : TAG=TT-101 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO PID BLOCK (TT302) : TAG=TIC-101 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO PV_SCALE=0 - 600 °C OUT_SCALE=0 - 100 % FF_SCALE=0 - 500 GAL/min FF_GAIN=0.1 AI BLOCK (LD302) : TAG=FT-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO XD_SCALE=0 - 125 inH2O OUT_SCALE=0 - 500 GAL/min L_TYPE = Indirect, square root LLAG BLOCK (LD302): TAG=FY-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO OUT_UNIT=GAL/min LEAD_TIME=60 LAG_TIME=60 AO BLOCK (FP302) : TAG=FCV-101 MODE_BLK.TARGET=CAS PV_SCALE=0 - 100 % XD_SCALE= 3-15 psi 3.10 Examples Flow Compensation Configuration with Totalization Corresponding Configuration Parameterization AI BLOCK (LD302-1) : TAG=PT-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO L_TYPE=DIRECT XD_SCALE.UNIT = Pa AI BLOCK (LD302-2) : TAG=FT-100A MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO XD_SCALE=0 - 20 H2O OUT_SCALE=0 - 156 Cutf/min L_TYPE=SQR ROOT AI BLOCK (LD302-3) : TAG=FT-100B MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO XD_SCALE=0 - 200 inH2O OUT_SCALE=0 - 495 Cutf/min L_TYPE=SQR ROOT 3.11 Function Block Instruction Manual ARTH BLOCK (LD302-3) : TAG=FY-100MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO PV_UNIT=GAL/min OUT_UNIT=GAL/min ARITH_TYPE=2 (flow comp. square root – AGA3) GAIN_IN_1 = 1 GAIN = 1 RANGE_LO=400 RANGE_HI=600 COMP_HI_LIM=+INF COMP_LO_LIM=-INF INT BLOCK (LD302-3) : TAG=FQ-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO OUT_UNITS=GAL AI BLOCK (TT302) : TAG=TT-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO XD_SCALE.UNIT=K Hydrostatic Tank Gauging 3.12 Examples Corresponding Configuration Parameterization AI BLOCK (LD302-2) : TAG=PT-100B MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO XD_SCALE.UNIT = Pa ARTH BLOCK (LD302-2) : TAG=PY-100_1 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO 3 OUT_UNIT=kg/m ARITH_TYPE=7 (traditional summer) GAIN_IN_1=1 GAIN = 1/(H2*g) RANGE_LO=-20 RANGE_HI=-10 AI BLOCK (LD302-1) : TAG=PT-100A MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO XD_SCALE.UNIT = Pa ARTH BLOCK (LD302-1) : TAG=PY-100_2 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO 3 PV_UNIT=m OUT_UNIT = Ton ARITH_TYPE = 5 (traditional mult. div.) GAIN_IN_2 = 1 GAIN = 1 3.13 Function Block Instruction Manual COMP_HI_LIM=+INF COMP_LO_LIM=-INF AI BLOCK (LD302-3) : TAG=PT-100C MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO XD_SCALE.UNIT = Pa ARTH BLOCK (LD302-3) : TAG=PY-100.3 MODE_BLK.TARGET = AUTO PV_UNIT=mH2O OUT_UNIT = m ARITH_TYPE = 9 (HTG comp. level) GAIN = H2 BIAS = H1 RANGE_LO=-20 RANGE_HI=-10 CHAR BLOCK (LD302-3) : TAG=PY -100_4 MODE_BLK.TARGET = AUTO X_UNITS = m 3 Y_UNITS = m CURVE_X=(0 ,20,40,50,70,80,100) CURVE_Y=(0,20,40,50,70,80,100) AI BLOCK (TT302) : TAG=TT-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO 3.14 Examples Combustion Control with Double Cross Limits This type of control tries to keep the air-fuel ratio strictly within the limits. A sudden change on the load would require a corresponding air and fuel variation. The master controller supplies Setpoint values to air and fuel flow controllers while it is stabilized. During the transitions, the air flow determines the maximum upper and lower limits that the fuel flow cannot exceed. The same occurs for the air flow, whose limits are fixed by those of the fuel flow. In this way, even when there is a large shift in the master signal the air/fuel ratio is maintained very close to the desired value. The “double cross limits” prevents that the fastest variable unbalance the desired ratio. This strategy is implemented using the OSDL Block, that generates the setpoint for the air and fuel controllers based on the output of the master controller, air flow (Qa –> IN parameter) and fuel flow (Qc –> IN_1 parameter). This configuration allows the air flow setpoint to vary just between (Qc-LO_BIAS) and (Qc+HI_BIAS) and the fuel flow setpoint to vary just between (Qa-LO_BIAS_1) and (Qa+HI_BIAS_1). When the double crossed limit is interfered with, then an unexpected change in the consumption upsets the desired ratio and in the same way when there is a transient in the master signal of the air/fuel flow it is able to be maintained very close to the desired ratio. 3.15 Function Block Instruction Manual Corresponding Configuration TAG: FY302-1 TAG FT-102 AI OIL FLOW TAG: TT302 TAG TT-100 AI OUT TAG: LD302-2 TAG FT-101 AI OUT AIR FLOW OUT IN TAG TIC-100 P ID OUT BKCAL_OUT CAS_IN IN_1 T_ OU IN CAS_IN IN OSDL OU T 1 BKCAL_IN TAG FY-100 OUT BKCAL_IN CAS_IN IN BKCAL_IN TAG FIC-102 BKCAL_IN P ID P ID BKCAL_OUT OUT BKCAL_OUT OUT TAG FIC-101 TAG: FY302-1 TAG: FY302-2 TAG FCV-102 CAS_IN AO BKCAL_OUT TAG FCV-101 AO BKCAL_OUT OIL Parameterization AI BLOCK (LD302-1) : TAG=FT-102 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO XD_SCALE=0 - 300 mm H2O OUT_SCALE=0 - 100 % AI BLOCK (LD302-2) : TAG=FT-101 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO XD_SCALE=0 - 200 inH2O OUT_SCALE=0 - 100 % AI BLOCK (TT302) : TAG=TT-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO XD_SCALE=0 - 600 °C L_TYPE=direct PID BLOCK (TT302) : TAG=TIC-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO PV_SCALE=0 - 600 °C OUT_SCALE=0 - 100 % CONTROL_OPTS.Direct-acting = Reverse OSDL BLOCK (TT302) : TAG=FY-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=CAS 3.16 CAS_IN AIR Examples OUT_TYPE=dynamic limiter HI_GAIN=1 HI_BIAS=5% LO_GAIN=1 LO_BIAS=2% HI_GAIN_1=1 HI_BIAS_1=2% LO_GAIN_1=1 LO_BIAS_1=5% GAIN = 1 GAIN_1=1 PID BLOCK (FY302-1) : TAG=FIC-102 MODE_BLK.TARGET=CAS PV_SCALE=0 - 100 % OUT_SCALE=0 - 100 % CONTROL_OPTS.Direct-acting = REVERSE AO BLOCK (FY302-1) : TAG=FCV-102 MODE_BLK.TARGET=CAS PV_SCALE=0 - 100 % XD_SCALE= 0 – 100% PID BLOCK (FY302-2) : TAG=FIC-101 MODE_BLK.TARGET=CAS PV_SCALE=0 - 100 % OUT_SCALE=0 - 100 % CONTROL_OPTS.Direct Acting=REVERSE AO BLOCK (FY302-2) : TAG=FCV-101 MODE_BLK.TARGET=CAS PV_SCALE=0 - 100 % XD_SCALE= 0 – 100% 3.17 Function Block Instruction Manual 3 Element Boiler Level/Feedwater Control This control loop uses feed forward control combined with cascade control. In this case the feed forward steam flow correction is done for steam flow and the feedback is done through the transmitter and the level controller LIC-100, whilst the feed water flow is maintained by the secondary cascade control loop of water. In this loop the drum level controller LIC-100 provides the setpoint for the feedwater controller FIC100 in cascade. Any disturbance in feed water flow is corrected by a feed forward arrangement in FIC-100. By connecting FT-101 to the FF_VAL input of FIC-100, any change in flow adjusts the FIC-100 output directly. The FF_SCALE is set -100 to +100 % to provide a fixed 50 % bias, giving a 50 % setpoint when load and manipulated flow are perfectly matched. 3.18 Examples Corresponding Configuration Parameterization AI BLOCK (LD302-2): TAG=LT-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO XD_SCALE=-642 -140 mmH2O OUT_SCALE=0 - 100 % PID BLOCK (LD302-2): TAG=LIC-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO PV_SCALE=0 - 100 % OUT_SCALE=0 - 150 Ton/hr CONTROL_OPTS.Direct Acting = Reverse AI BLOCK (LD302-3): TAG=FT-101 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO XD_SCALE=0 - 9500 mmH2O OUT_SCALE=0 - 150 Ton/hr L_TYPE = Indirect, Square Root INT BLOCK (LD302-3): TAG=FQ-101 MODE_BLK.TARGET= AUTO TIME_UNIT1=HourS 3.19 Function Block Instruction Manual OUT_UNITS = Ton AI BLOCK (LD302-1): TAG=FT-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=AUTO XD_SCALE=0 - 3500 mmH2O 3 OUT_SCALE=0 - 150 m /hr L_TYPE = Indirect, Square Root INT BLOCK (LD302-1): TAG=FQ-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET = Auto TIME_UNIT1=Hours 3 OUT_UNITS=m PID BLOCK (FP302): TAG=FIC-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=CAS 3 PV_SCALE=0 - 150 m /hr OUT_SCALE=0 - 100 % CONTROL_OPTS.Direct Acting = Reverse FF_SCALE = -100 to +100 % FF_GAIN = 1 AO BLOCK (FP302): TAG=FCV-100 MODE_BLK.TARGET=CAS PV_SCALE=0 - 100 % XD_SCALE = 3-15 psi 3.20
